Loading...
6671 - Construction of G. Roland Vela Athletic Complex, 3.Statement of Work/ Specifications CITY OF DENTON 215 East McKinney Street Denton, Texas 76207 (817) 349-8200 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PARK IMPROVEMENTS AT Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex - Phase 1 November 15, 2017 Prepared by: Dunaway Associates, LP 550 Bailey Avenue, Suite 400 Fort Worth, Texas 76107 (817) 335-1121 Dunaway Project No: B000399.001 00 00 00-1 SEALS PAGE PAGE 1 OF 1 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 00 00 00 SEALS PAGE ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 1 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ------ Geotechnical Investigation (D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Job No. 16-0009) 01010 Summary of Work 01025 Measurement and Basis of Payment 01027 Application for Payment 01040 Coordination 01045 Cutting and Patching 01200 Project Meetings 01300 Administrative Submittals 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Sample Submittals 01350 Progress Schedule 01440 Testing and Laboratory Control 01500 Construction Facilities 01605 Warranties and Maintenance 01610 Product Handling 01630 Product Options, Equal Materials and Substitutions 01705 Project Closeout 01710 Cleaning 01720 Project Record Documents DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02225 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Utilities 02270 Erosion and Sediment Control 02308 Compost 02310 Laser Grading 02510 Site Water Distribution 02512 Concrete Vehicular Paving 02515 Concrete Walks 02580 Pavement Marking 02830 Chain Link Fencing 02930 Hydraulically Applied Seeding High Performance-Flexible Growth Medium 02938 Turf and Grasses ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 2 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03100-A Concrete Formwork 03100-S Concrete Formwork & Accessories 03200 Reinforcing Steel 03200-A Concrete Reinforcement 03200-S Concrete Reinforcement 03300-A Cast-in-Place Concrete - Architectural 03300-S Cast-in-Place Concrete - Structural 03310 Cast-In-Place Concrete - Sitework 03366 Integrally Colored and Stamped Concrete DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04100 Masonry Mortar 04100-A Mortar and Masonry Grout 04230 Structural Reinforced Unit Masonry 04300 Unit Masonry System 04300-A Unit Masonry 04720-A Cast Stone Masonry DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120-A Structural Steel 05120-S Structural Steel 05500 Miscellaneous Metals and Finishes 05500-A Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS 06110-A Rough Carpentry 06175-A Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 3 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07213-A Thermal Insulation 07410-A Preformed Metal Roofing 07530-A Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 07620-A Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07710-A Roof Specialties 07720-A Roof Accessories 07900-A Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111-A Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08560-A Special Function Windows 08710-A Door Hardware 08920-A Louvers and Vents DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09670-A Fluid Applied Flooring 09700-A Special Wall Surfaces 09800-A High Performance Coatings 09900-A Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10425-A Identifying Devices 10430 Site Signage 10800-A Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11510 Site Furnishings and Park Equipment ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 4 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15010-A General Requirements for Mechanical Work 15020-A Basic Materials and Methods 15070-A Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting for Pipe, Cables and Ducts 15110-A Valves 15120-A Pipe and Fittings 15250-A Insulation 15440-A Plumbing Fixtures 15480-A Domestic Water Heaters 15720-A Package Rooftop Units 15820-A Exhaust Fans 15830-A Low Velocity Metal Ductwork 15850-A Ductwork Accessories 15870-A Air Diffusers DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 16010 General Requirements for Electrical Work 16010-A Electrical General Provisions 16030-A Testing 16111 Raceways and Fittings 16111-A Conduit 16112 Surface raceways 16120 Wire and Cables 16120-A Wire and Cable 16130 Boxes 16130-A Boxes 16141 Wiring Devices ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 5 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 16141-A Wiring Devices 16160 Cabinets and Enclosures 16190-A Supporting Devices 16195 Electrical Identification 16195-A Electrical Identification 16402 Underground Electrical Service 16440-A Disconnect Switches 16450 Secondary Grounding 16461 Transformers 16470-A Panelboards 16471 Panelboards 16485 Contactors 16485-A Contactors 16491 Disconnect Switches 16503 Poles and Standards 16505-A Lighting Fixtures 16510 Lighting Fixtures – Site CIVIL UTILITIES SPECIFICATIONS The City of Denton as adopted the “Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 4th Edition,” published by the North Central Texas Council of Governments, as its basic construction specifications. Civil utilities and related work, including water, wastewater, storm drainage and appurtenances (valves, fittings, blocking, embedment, backfill, manholes, junctions, inlets, vaults, rehabilitation, connection, reconnection, and related work) shall be governed by these specifications. This document is available and can be obtained from the NCTCOG Regional Information Center, 616 Six Flags Drive, Suite 200, P.O. Box 5888, Arlington, TX 76005-5888, ph. (817) 640-3300 or from http://www.nctcog.org . The following sections shall apply as applicable: DIVISION 500 UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION & APPURTENANCES Item# Subject ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 6 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 501. Underground Conduit Materials 501.1. General 501.6. Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, Pipe and Box Section 501.7. Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 501.8. Ductile-Iron Pipe for Pipe Rehabilitation 501.14. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Pipe 501.15. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) 501.17. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Wastewater Pipe & Fittings with Dimension Control 501.18. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Profile Gravity Wastewater Pipe and Fittings For Direct Bury and Slip-lining Applications 502. APPURTENANCES 502.1. Manholes 502.2. Wastewater Main Cleanouts 502.3. Fire Hydrants 502.4. Thrust Restraint 502.5. Fittings 502.6. Valves 502.7. Performed Flexible Conduit Joint Sealant 502.8. Polyethylene Wrap For Metal Pipe Fittings 502.9. Corrosion-Resistant Coatings and Liners for Wastewater Conduit And Appurtenances 502.10. Connections To Conduit For Service 502.11. Miscellaneous Conduit Connections 502.12. Structures 504. OPEN CUT – BACKFILL 504.1. General 504.2. Materials 504.3. Excavation and Foundation 504.4. Backfill-General Requirements 504.5 Embedment 504.6. Final Backfill 505. OPENCUT-GENERALCONDUIT INSTALLATION ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 7 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 505.1. General 505.2. General Installation Requirements for Pipe Types 506. OPEN CUT WATER CONDUIT INSTALLATION 506.1. Description 506.2. Materials 506.3. Laying Water Conduit 506.4. Pipe Joints 506.5. Hydrostatic Test 506.6. Connections to Existing Water Conduits 506.7. Purging and Disinfection of Water Conduits 506.8. Plugs 507. OPEN CUT WASTEWATER CONDUIT INSTALLATION 507.1. Description 507.2. Materials 507.3. Laying Wastewater Conduit 507.4. Wastewater Conduit Joints 507.5. Test and Inspections 508. OPEN CUT STORM WATER CONDUIT INSTALLATION 508.1. Description 508.2. General 508.3. Reinforced Concrete Pipe for Storm Water 508.4. Corrugated Metal Pipe 508.5. Structural Plate Conduit 509. CROSSINGS 509.1. General 509.5. Creek and River Crossings DIVISION 700 STRUCTURES Item# Subject ROLAND G. VELA SOCCER COMPLEX DENTON, TEXAS 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE * ”A” – Designates specifications related to Architectural drawings. * “S” - Designates specifications related to Structural drawings. B000399.001 TOC - 8 Table of Contents 07/06/2016 701. GENRALSTRUCTURES 701.2. Structural Excavation 702. CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 702.1. Concrete Structure Materials 702.2. Mix Design and Mixing Concrete for Structures 702.3. Mix Design and Mixing Lightweight Concrete for Structures 702.4. Constructing Concrete Structures 702.5. Pre-stressed Concrete for Structures 702.6. Pneumatically Placed Concrete (Gunite) 702.7. Drilled Shaft Foundations 702.8. Pre-cast and Cast-In-Place Concrete Units DIVISION 800 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION & MATERIALS Item# Subject 803. SLOPE AND CHANNEL PROTECTION 803.1. Articulating Concrete Block 803.2. Gabion Structures 803.3. Riprap 803.4. Geotextiles Used in Drainage and Stabilization Applications 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Park improvements include concrete parking lots, one (1) concession/restroom building, concrete plaza, playing fields, fencing with mow strip, site furnishings, sidewalk, utilities, sports lighting, bleacher pads, landscape enhancements, irrigation, entry culvert, play area, pavilions and other miscellaneous park features as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 CONTRACT METHOD A. The work shall be done under a Lump Sum Contract. 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Limit use of premises for work, storage, ingress and egress of personnel, and deliveries to areas indicated on Drawings. B. Conform to City of Denton's rules and regulations regarding use of the project site. C. Owner will occupy premises during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations. 1.4 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner Responsibilities: Make arrangements for delivery of shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and delivery of materials to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Cooperate with Owner as to receiving, handling, storage an d protection of Owner-furnished equipment and materials. 1.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Full intent, meaning, and spirit of Contract Documents is to provide complete, finished, and fully operational park facility. B. Drawings show diagrammatically work to be performed, and are not intended to show every incidental part, fitting and member required for a complete project. Incidental parts, fittings, and members shall be required as part of the Contract. C. The specifications establish the quality of materials and workmanship to be performed. They are not intended to describe every step or member in the process of construction. Procedures, craftsmanship and materials of high quality shall be employed where not specifically called for in these specifications. 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.6 SEPARATE CONTRACTS Not Used PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT Page 1 of 1 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01025 – MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES This section governs basis of compensation for construction of park improvements at G. Roland Vela Soccer Complex, Denton, Texas. 1.2 GENERAL A. It is not the intent of the bid schedule or this Section to itemize each and every item required for this project. Items required for project completion and not specifica lly included in the bid schedule will be included with the items to which they are considered subsidiary. B. The various items in the proposal and bid schedule will be paid for by the unit or lump sum price. These prices shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, tools, power, transportation, temporary facilities, incidentals, permits superintendence, overhead and profit required to complete the construction of the various items of the project listed in the bid schedule and as itemized below. 1.3 UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM BID AMOUNTS Where in bid form, "Unit Price" or "Lump Sum Bid Amount" is set forth, it shall include furnishing by Contractor of all labor, tools, materials, machinery, appliances, plant and equipment appurtenant to and necessary for, the construction in every detail and the completion in a first class, workmanlike manner of all work to be done under these specifications. "Unit Price" or "Lump Sum Bid Amount" shall also include all permanent protection of overhead expense, bond, insurance, patent fees, royalties, risk due to the elements, delay, profit, injuries, damages, claims and all other items not specifically mentioned that may be required to construct fully each item of the work complete in place. 1.4 "PER EACH" BID ITEMS These items will be paid for individually as a complete, properly functioning element. These items will include incidentals and appurtenances required to pro vide each bid item. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 – EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01027 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Page 1 of 1 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01027 – APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Application for monthly progress payments are in accordance with the contract between the Owner and the Construction Manager. 1.2 DATE OF APPLICATIONS A. Submit application for payment between the first and fifth day of the month. Review draft of payment application with Owner's Representative prior to submittal of record application. 1.3 FORM A. Submit applications for payment on Application for Payment form identified in the Contract with the Owner. Provide five copies with each submittal. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Contract Price Breakdown is the basis for applications for payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01040 COORDINATION Page 1 of 1 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01040 – COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination with Owner, subcontractors, and between various trades and crafts. 1.2 SUB-CONTRACTORS AND VARIOUS TRADES A. Consult jointly with sub-contractors and various trades to establish schedules to the benefit of those involved. B. Provide whatever supervision and communication necessary to facilitate close adherence to schedules. C. Provide whatever supervision and communication necessary to facilitate close cooperation and coordination of sub -contractors and various trades one with the other. 1.3 OWNER AND OWNER PROVIDED FACILITIES Water Service: Coordinate work with installation of meters, which will be provided by Owner. Contractor is responsible f or Sanitary Sewer taps. Schedule work to prevent conflict and delays. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01200 – PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Meetings of principals involved in project. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule meeting and provide meeting place. B. Attendance: The following are expected to attend: 1. Owner's Representative. 2. A/E's Construction Administrator. 3. A/E's Consultant for Electrical, Civil and Structural Engineering. 4. Contractor's General Superintendent, Project Superintendent and Project Coordinator. 5. Major Subcontractor's including the following: a. Mechanical b. Plumbing c. Electrical d. Roofing e. Paving f. Concrete g. Utilities: water, sewer, electrical distribution h. Building i. Fencing C. Agenda Items: 1. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Tentative construction schedule. 3. Critical work sequencing. 4. Major equipment deliveries. 5. Designation of responsible personnel. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, proposal requests, submittals, color coordination, change orders, and applications for payment. 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 9. Use of Premises: Office, work, storage, staging areas; Owner's requirements. 10. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 11. Temporary utilities. 12. Safety and first-aid procedures. 13. Security procedures. 14. Housekeeping procedures. 15. Other business. D. Owner's Representative will preside over the meeting. 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule meeting and notify in writing those concerned, at least one week in advance of the meeting. B. Provide a convenient, comfortable meeting place. C. Contractor's Project superintendent or Project Manager shall preside over meeting. D. Attendance: The following are expected to attend: 1. Owner's Representative 2. Consultant's Construction Administrator 3. Consultant's Sub-Consultants unless notified otherwise 4. Contractor's General Superintendent, Project Superintendent and Project Coordinator. 5. Subcontractors having work in progress. 6. Subcontractors whose work will start within the next month. 7. Others as requested by Owner, Consultant, or Contractor. 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E. Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observation, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, and delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to construction schedules. 8. Progress schedules for succeeding period. 9. Schedule coordination. 10. Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule, on completion date, and effect on other contracts of project. 11. Other business. 1.4 MINUTES OF MEETINGS Contractor shall take notes at pre-construction and progress meetings and distribute them to those concerned in the form of minutes within 7 calendar days after meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS Page 1 of 1 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01300 – ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Within 10 days after receipt of Notification of Award by Owner, submit three copies of following: 1. List of Materials and Schedules of Values. 2. Project Schedule. B. With the Bid Proposal, submit a list of the Subcontractors selected for the project. 1.2 FORM A. Lists and schedules shall be tabulated in accordance with specification sections. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS A. Name, address, phone number, and locations of operations. 1.4 LIST OF MATERIALS A. Name of material or equipment-catalogue designation or model number. B. Manufacturer: Name and address. C. Supplier: Name and address. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Identify each line with proportion of contract sum shown as materials and labor. B. Itemize General Provision, Special Provision and Division 1 items, including bonds, insurance, field supervision and temporary facilities. C. Schedule of Values shall be the basis for Applications for Payment. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 – EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SUBMITTALS Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01340 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop drawings, product data and sample submittal requirements. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submittal procedures and requirements are specified in the General Conditions set forth by the Owner. Procedures will be finalized with Contractor at pre-construction conference. B. Owner will provide submittal forms which Contractor is to complete and enclose with each set of submittal data. C. Submittal data will indicate which specification section and paragraph applies to that data. D. No work shall be fabricated or any product shipped to project site prior to Owner's approval of submittal. E. Submittal data is required on all specified items including those furnished exactly as specified. F. Refer to individual specification sections for required submittal data. G. Contractor shall maintain a permanent file of all approved submittals on project site. H. Submittal data shall be provided in one hard cover 3 ring notebook for each set of data. 1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTAL A. Submittals shall be identified as follows: 1. Name of contractor, subcontractor, or material supplier originating submittal. 2. Name and location of project. 3. Index of items submitted. 4. Identification of each material or item of equipment. 5. Date of submittal. 6. Contractor's certification. 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SUBMITTALS Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.4 NUMBER OF SUBMITTALS A. For submittals requiring bond prints, a sepia or other reproducible along with 2 bond copies shall be submitted for approval. Reproducible with attached submittal review comments by A/E will be returned to Contractor whereby he may take whatever steps necessary to make proper distribution of reviewed drawings. Maximum sheet size 24 inches by 36 inches. B. Submit five sets of brochures or manufacturer's published data. 1.5 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. A/E will process submittals promptly and return as soon as possible. For lengthier and more complex submittals, allow minimum of 20 working days for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01350 PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01350 – PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Progress and Schedule Bar Chart consisting of time scaled figures to monitor progress of the work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies to A/E and to Owner within three weeks of receiving the Notice to Proceed. Owner and A/E will request revisions, if necessary, and return to Contractor with suggested revisions. B. Upon final approval by A/E and Owner, copies of the Project Schedule shall be distributed as follows: 1. 2 copies of each to Owner. 2. 2 copies of each to A/E. 3. 1 copy to principal subcontractors and vendors. 4. 1 copy to others affected by schedule. 5. Copies posted in Temporary Field Office. C. As revisions are made during construction, distribute up-to-date issues to the same entities and make postings accordingly. D. Under no circumstances will construction operations begin other than initial mobilization until the progress schedule, in its entirety, is approved. 1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE A. Activities shown on the schedule shall be as follows: 1. Each individual construction activity. 2. Submittal of shop drawings product data, and samples for approval. 3. Approval of submittals. 4. Delivery time for materials and equipment requiring long lead time. 01350 PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 5. Times anticipated for shutdown and tying-in of existing services. This does not serve as official request to Owner as specified in Section 01040, and each individual request for outage shall be submitted in writing two weeks prior to anticipated outage, as specified. B. Schedule Format: 1. Single sheet of paper not exceeding 24 inches by 36 inches. 2. Time scale at top and bottom of page with time units shown in calendar weeks. C. Each activity shall be represented by a bold horizontal line, as follows: 1. Each line clearly and briefly described. 2. Estimated duration. 3. Line or arrow shall be drawn to the length as dictated by the time scale to indicate the activity's duration. 4. Each activity shall be placed at its proper calendar location as determined by the time scale. 5. Float time shall be shown in its proper time scale for each non-critical activity. 6. Critical activities shall be illustrated or accented, thereby easily distinguished from non-critical activities. 7. Milestones or intermediate completion dates shall be clearly shown. 8. Final completion date on initial schedule shall coincide with time of completion agreed upon and indicated in the Contract Documents. D. The duration of each activity shall be shown in calendar days and shall include Saturdays, Sundays, holidays and anticipated days lost due to inclement weather. 1.4 MONTHLY UPDATED SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of Project Schedule, each to Owner and A/E, with monthly payment application, illustrating the following: 1. Markings to show actual completed work above or below estimated work. 2. Critical path activities marked to distinguish from non-critical activities. 1.5 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Revise and resubmit schedule for approval in event any of following occur: 01350 PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1. The previously approved schedule changes. 2. The approved schedule is extended in excess of 14 calendar days. 3. Issued change orders cause changes in the actual work which affect the duration or actual start or finish date of activities to the extent that the approved schedule is changed or extended in excess of 14 calendar days. B. Provide written description of each change to the schedule, including reason for the change and how it affects the schedule. C. Revisions to the schedule, including those generated by change orders, shall be made at no cost to Owner. 1.6 FLOAT A. Contract Time shall be the Time of Completion as indicated in the Contract, plus any time extensions granted after award of contract. B. Float shall be the Contract Time less the Duration of the Schedule for critical activities, or the amount of time non-critical activities can be delayed without causing the Contract Time to be exceeded. C. Owner will receive benefit of float. Contract Time Extensions will not be granted unless a change order or delay causes either of the following: 1. An increase in the duration of the critical activities. 2. The available float of a non-critical activity is consumed causing the activity to become critical and thereby altering the project schedule. D. Time extensions shall be limited to the duration of the critical activities less the Contract Time. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. 01350 PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 END OF SECTION 01440 TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01440 – TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Inspection, Testing, and Control: An independent testing laboratory (approved by the owner) selected and paid by the Contractor will perform the professional laboratory services described herein. B. Codes: Testing laboratory shall perform required inspections and tests in accordance with Building Code, Local Authorities, State Regulations and the specifications of ASTM and other respective technical societies. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED Testing services may include, but are not limited to the following: A. Field Density Tests B. Moisture Content of Existing Subgrade C. Gradation Analyses D. Concrete Test Cylinders E. Concrete Source Quality Control F. Concrete Field Quality Control G. Keeping Inspection and testing Logs of Specified Inspections and Tests. H. Submitting to Engineer, Contractor, and Owner, certificates, records and reports of inspections and tests. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR A. Testing services will be paid for by the contractor. B. Deliver to laboratory adequate quantities of representative sample of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. C. Advise laboratory sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow laboratory to complete any required check-tests and assign personnel for field inspection and testing as specified. Should cancellation or deployment of Testing 01440 TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Services be required after notification to laboratory has been given, Contractor shall be responsible for making such arrangements. D. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test samples on project site for the first 24 hours and also for subsequent field curing as required by ASTM Specifications C31. E. Furnish such nominal labor as required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at site. 1.4 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF LABORATORY PERSONNEL A. Laboratory personnel shall inspect and/or test materials, assemblies, specimens, and work performed including design mixes, methods and techniques as specified and report results to the Owner and Owner's Representative. B. Should it appear that the material furnished or work performed by the Contractor fails to meet requirements of Contract Documents, testing laboratory shall direct the attention of the Contractor and the Owner to such failure or infringement immediately. C. Testing laboratory personnel are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the Contract Documents, or to approve or to accept any portion of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Design Mixes 1. Concrete mixtures shall adhere to the specifications - Refer to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. At the beginning of the work, the batch plant shall submit proposed concrete mixes for review by the Owner's Representative, including the sieve analysis of fine and aggregate ASTM C-136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate - ASTM C-29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse aggregates ASTM 127 and 128. 01440 TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. Concrete shall not be mixed for placing until after laboratory reports reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength required. 01440 TESTING AND LABORATORY CONTROL Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Test Cylinders: At least one (1) test shall be made of each day's placement, for each type of concrete, for each fifty (50) cubic yards (or part thereof), on each different portion or section of the work. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory. Each test shall consist of three (3) specimens, one (1) of which shall be broken at seven (7) days and the other one (1) at twenty-eight (28) days and one held in reserve. C. Source Quality Control: An independent testing laboratory shall inspect and control concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks and control concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at beginning of each pour. D. Field Quality Control: At beginning of each concrete "pour" or from each mixer truck (at discretion of Owner), test for slump shall be performed in accordance with "Method of Slump Test for Consistency of Portland Cement" (ASTM C-143) unless waived by Owner's Representative. If slump is greater than that specified, concrete shall be rejected. E. The work represented by the items tested shall not be considered acceptable until the Owner has approved the test results. F. Should the final testing indicate that specifications have not been met, the Contractor will be responsible for performing work necessary to meet specifications. G. The testing laboratory should report any deviations from the specified directions for pouring of the concrete to the General Contractor and to the Owner immediately. Conditions at site shall be noted and recorded for each "pour". END OF SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01500 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL The Contractor will be responsible for the following facilities unless stated otherwise: 1.1 STORAGE SHEDS The Contractor may provide on the premises at convenient locations with respect to building construction areas, suitable watertight storage sheds for storage of materials, equipment, and tools which might be damaged by exposure to weather; maintain same in good condition. Remove when no longer needed or relocate from time to time where preliminary location might interfere with subsequent work. Location of storage sheds shall be approved by Owner. 1.2 POWER AND LIGHT A. Obtain and have installed temporary electrical power service line to point convenient for and available to trades, including mechanical and other subcontractors. Pay for cost of current used. B. Install temporary lighting to maintain illumination in areas where work is being performed. Where practical, place temporary lights in locations where permanent lighting fixtures are to be installed. C. Pay for power until Substantial Completion is awarded by Owner. 1.3 SANITARY FACILITIES Provide one or more toilet buildings for use of persons employed on job. Post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary, remove refuse deposited in or about buildings, and maintain premises in sanitary condition. 1.4 WATER Obtain temporary water from local utility authority. Pay for costs for temporary water connections and water usage fees until Substantial Completion is awarded by Owner. 1.5 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SAFETY Provide traffic control and safety during construction. Meet City requirements or public safety, barriers, and traffic control. Coordinate with Owner during necessary street control. 1.6 PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC A. Conduct work in manner to ensure least possible obstruction to public traffic and protect safety of public. Provide public safety and convenience. 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Locate materials placed on site, or materials excavated and construction materials or equipment used, to cause as little obstruction to public as possible. C. Owner reserves right to remedy any neglect on part of Contractor as regards to public convenience and safety which may come to its attention. Cost of such work done or material furnished by Owner shall be deducted from monies due or to become due to Contractor. 1.7 LIFTING AND HOISTING Supply hoists, lifts, cranes, and towers as required for handling of various materials. Installation of equipment shall meet applicable safety requirements. 1.8 WATCHMAN AND JANITOR A. Employ watchman at such time as deemed necessary to protect or attend work. Make other security arrangement required during progress of work. B. Provide person or persons for janitor work who shall attend to temporary toilet rooms and keep them clean and supplied and keep construction areas broomed and relatively clean. 1.9 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES When temporary facilities are no longer needed for proper conduct of work, completely remove from project and repair or replace material, equipment, or finished surface damaged. 1.10 PARKING All construction personnel parking shall be located in Storage Yard or areas authorized by Owner. Do not park vehicles or equipment under the dripline of existing trees. 1.11 STORAGE AND STOCKPILE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS: Except for topsoil, excavated materials not utilized in earthwork process for fill shall be disposed of at off-site location. 1.12 SCAFFOLDING Provide and install scaffolding, ramps, platforms, rails, guards, stairs, and ladders necessary for the performance of the work. All safety standards, ordinances, codes, and insurance requirements shall be met. All items shall be so constructed as to afford safety and protection to both craftsmen and their work. 1.13 DE-WATERING Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations or under or adjacent to any structures. Should such conditions develop, 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 water and other fluids shall be controlled and disposed of by means of temporary pumps, piping, drain lines, ditches, dams or other approved methods. 1.14 SHORING Temporary shoring required for installation of work shall be included. Assume responsibility for this work and make good damage caused by improper supports or failure of shoring in any respect. 1.15 FENCING As needed for security and public safety, provide fencing around staging area a minimum of 6 feet in height, with 2-inch galvanized posts spaced 10 feet on center, well-braced, and having 2-inch diamond mesh chain link fabric. Fence shall be complete with sliding or swinging gates with necessary hardware and padlock. Provide two keys for Owner's use. Remove fencing and fill post holes upon completion of work. Provide fencing with fire gates as necessary for emergency access. 1.16 BARRICADES Erect and maintain barricades to protect adjacent structures, paving, and lawns, from damage by construction vehicles and operations. Erect barricades where required to prevent injury to public. 1.17 FIRE PROTECTION Provide fire and emergency access during construction. Comply with requirements of local fire official for fire safety during progress of work. Provide fire protection plan which shall be approved by Fire Marshall prior to beginning work. 1.18 TRENCH SAFETY Provide shoring or safety slopes for trenches or excavations exceeding 5 feet in depth. Comply with requirements of Texas Trench Safety Law, Article 601B, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes, and City of Mansfield requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01605 WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE Page 1 of 1 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01605 – WARRANTIES AND MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Warranties (guarantees), maintenance, service. 1.2 WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES) A. Provide written warranty and guarantee of all work against defects in materials, equipment, or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. Also provide any additional warranties and guarantees of work items and components as specified in individual sections of these specifications. 1.3 SERVICE A. Furnish necessary service to each electrical and mechanical system, such as adjustment of controls, air distribution, and water balancing valves, mechanical repair of equipment, and other work requiring specialized training, for the one year period, concurrent with warranty period specified. B. This shall not include repair of damage due to fire (unless fire results from faulty material or workmanship on part of Contractor), storm, vandalism, or other factors entirely beyond control of Contracto r, nor shall it include routine service such as oiling motors, replacing lamps, or other work not requiring equipment and motors, cleaning filters, and replacing lamps. C. No additional compensation will be paid for work perform ed during one year warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WARRANTIES Product warranties and guarantees provided by subcontract ors, suppliers, and manufacturers for specific items such as building components, mechanical equipment, air conditioners, unit heaters, water heaters, and water coolers will be filled in by Contractor. Owner's name is City of Denton. Show model numbers, serial numbers, date installed or accepted as required to complete warranty/guarantee forms. END OF SECTION 01610 PRODUCT HANDLING Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01610 – PRODUCT HANDLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Transportation, handling, storage protection of materials and equipment PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION A. Instruct suppliers to package products in containers which will provide protection during shipment, handling, and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements, moisture, and physical damage. B. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. C. Delivery of Owner supplied structures shall be the responsibility of the contractor. D. Do not deliver products or materials prior to 60 days before scheduled beginning of installation for each respective product or material type. 3.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect until installed. B. Upon delivery of Owner supplied structures (pavilions and park entry signage) the contractor assumes all responsibilities for storage and protecting of these structures. C. Water-tight storage facilities of suitable size, with floors raised above the ground shall be provided for all types of materials liable to damage from exposure to the weather; other materials shall be stored on blocks of the ground. Materials shall be placed as to permit easy access for proper inspection and identification. All material shall be stored according to manufacturer's recommendations. Any material which has deteriorated, become damaged or otherwise unfit for use, shall not be used in work. Upon completion of all work, or when directed, remove storage facility construction from the site. During construction, open ends of all drains, piping conduit, and all openings in equipment shall be closed before leaving the work at any time as to prevent the entrance of all foreign matter. 01610 PRODUCT HANDLING Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.3 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT IN STORAGE A. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service instructions to accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package. B. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services; submit as a record document. END OF SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01630 – PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Procedures and requirements for substitution of materials, products, or equipment other than that specified. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any product and manufacturer named. C. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option unless substitution is approved as specified. Products of other manufacturers shall meet minimum performance criteria specified or quality of product description. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, followed by the words "No Substitution," there is no option. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit equal materials substitution requests to the Consultant no less than 10 days prior to the bid deadline. Submit equal material substitution requests on form provided in this section. If substitution requests are approved, they will be confirmed by Addendum issued not less than seven days prior to the bid date. B. Substitutions will only be considered after bid opening for following: 1. Substitution is required for compliance with subsequent interpretations of code or insurance requirements; 2. Specified product is unavailable through no fault of Contractor; 3. Manufacturer or fabricator refuses to certify or guarantee specified product as required. 4. Subsequent information reveals that specified product is unable to perform properly or to fit in the designated space; or 5. In A/E's sole judgment, substitution would be in Owner's best interest. 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Post-bid substitution requests will not be considered unless there are significant extenuating circumstances, such as unavailability of a product because of actions by the manufacturer. If post-bid substitutions are required, follow the requirements for pre-bid substitutions. D. Substitution will not be approved if implementation would require a substantial revision to construction documents. E. Requests for substitutions shall be considered only when Contractor submits the following in writing: 1. Statement by Contractor that proposed substitution is in full compliance with Contract Documents and applicable codes. 2. Complete technical data including applicable drawings, complete specifications, test data, samples and performance tests of the article proposed for substitution. 3. List of all trades affected by substitution. 4. Indication of resulting contract cost adjustment. F. Contractor shall be responsible for effects upon related work and additional costs generated by substitution approval. Furthermore, Contractor shall agree in writing to bear cost of A/E's time, at rate of 2.55 times the direct salary cost, for review of substitution requests, whether the substitution is approved or not. 1.4 EQUAL MATERIALS A. Burden of proof that proposed material substitution is equal to that specified is Contractor's responsibility. Owner shall be the final judge of a proposed substitutions ability to meet the construction document requirements. B. In evaluating equal materials, Owner may consider local representation and availability of parts, service, etc. When local services are available for specified materials, the lack of these services may be regarded as sufficient cause for disapproval of substitutions. C. Equipment Equals: Equipment specified is intended to establish standards of design, quality and capacities. Proposed substitutions shall be equal in such features as noise level, power requirements, metal gauges, vibration attenuation, finish, appearance, certification of recognized testing agencies and standard bureaus, allowable working pressures, physical size and arrangement so far as effects installation in the available space, factory applied insulation, electrical devices, capacity reduction facilities, access to internal parts, pressure losses, operating speeds, coil face areas, fan diameter, operating efficiencies, and all other features and capacities specified herein. 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.5 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION A. Submit three copies of request for each item proposed for substitution. B. Use Substitution Request Form as provided by construction manager. C. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. D. List similar projects using product, dates of installation, and names of Consultant and Owner. 1.6 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION A. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is comparable or superior in every respect to specified product. B. Coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete. C. Certify that cost data presented is complete and includes related cost generated by the substitution. D. Waive claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become apparent. 1.7 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SUBSTITUTIONS Shop drawings and data shall thoroughly document substitutions of mechanical and electrical equipment and Contractor shall be fully responsible for changes generated elsewhere by the substitution. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS, EQUAL MATERIALS, AND SUBSTITUTIONS Page 4 of 4 JEG WUXU2200 01630 - 4 Product Options, Equal Materials, 09/28/09 and Substitutions END OF SECTION 01705 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Page 1 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01705 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Closeout shall include general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner, and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion", and therefore may be either a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work which have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. That time variation shall be applicable to other provisions of this Section. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Owner will proceed with inspection. Following initial inspection, Owner will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise Contractor of work which shall be performed prior to issuance of certification; and repeat inspection when requested to assure that work has been substantially completed. 1.3 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. On or before the date of final inspection Contractor shall turn over to Owner following Contract Close-Out Materials, which he will have accumulated and retained during course of project: 1. All approved submittal data, two complete sets. 2. Written project warranty, and all other equipment and materials warranties/guarantees as signed by all appropriate suppliers or manufacturer's, one set. 3. Operating and maintenance instructions for all installed equipment and systems, to include a maintenance and spare parts list, two sets. 4. One set of "Record" drawings and specification showing conditions and dimensions of all construction indicated by original construction documents. Drawings shall show routing of underground outside utilities or conduits, with burial depth related to finish grade. Drawings shall also show the final grades. The final grading plan shall be performed and produced by a licensed land surveyor. 5. Materials will be reviewed by Owner for completion. Final Acceptance will not be approved until Contract Close-out materials are completed. 01705 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Page 2 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. As-built Information 1. Contractor shall submit all as-built drawings indicating all field changes to the plans. Field changes shall be clearly marked and dimensioned indicating the built condition of discipline or area of work. 2. The following information will be required from the contractor prior to final acceptance: Engineering Department requirements: a. Copies of Final Pay Requests for all public improvements from all Contractors and Subcontractors, both paving and utilities. b. Affadavits from all Contractors and Subcontractors that all bills, liens, subcontractors, suppliers, etc have been paid. c. Maintenance bonds as required. d. Two (2) sets of Bond Prints of the entire Preliminary As-Built Civil Construction Plans. e. One set of “As-recorded” Mylars of the entire Civil Construction Plans f. One CD-ROM containing AutoCAD files of Water/Sewer and Storm Sewer Plans and Profiles. g. One CD containing PDF format files of the entire Civil Construction Plans Parks Department requirements: a. Maintain one set of each of the following record documents; record any actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings 2. Project Manual 3. Addenda 4. Change orders and other Modifications to the Contract. b. Submit documents to Owner with claim for final Application for Payment as follows: 1. After the Owner has approved the as-built drawings (with revisions), provide a scanned multi-page PDF document saved to a CD using the following directory and subdirectory hierarchy: “Project Name” As-builts Drawings Specifications Bonds Submittals Site Furnishings Electrical 01705 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Page 3 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Playground equipment Structures Irrigation equipment Concrete mix Utilities Other, Etc. Owner/Maintenance Manuals Warranties and Guarantees Maintenance Manuals 3. Although various departments shall require different or sometimes duplicate documents, it is the contractor’s responsibility to provide each department with the required close-out documents, at no cost to the Owner. Final pay application shall be contingent on the contractor providing all documents to the satisfaction of the Owner. C. Instruction on use of new products 1. Contractor shall demonstrate operation and maintenance for all Products to Owner one (1) week prior to date of Substantial Completion. 2. Demonstrate operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintenance of equipment. 3. Insert any new data in Operation and Maintenance Manuals when need for additional data arises during instruction. D. Refer to individual Divisions 2 through 16 for specific work requirements. The requirements include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Submit Final Pay Voucher. 2. Complete work items on Substantial Completion punch lists, if any. 3. Deliver tools, spare parts, keys, extra stocks of materials and similar physical items to Owner. 4. Complete start-up testing of systems. Train and instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation and general maintenance requirements of all mechanical and electrical components. Discontinue and remove from project site temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, and similar items. 5. Complete final clean up requirement, including site dress up, touch-up painting, etc. 01705 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Page 4 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E. Upon receipt of Contractor's written notice that work has been completed, Owner will schedule inspection with Contractor and inspect work. After inspection, Owner will either approve Final Payment or prepare punch list for Contractor listing work items not completed and incorrect or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES Arrange to meet with Owner's personnel, at project site, to provide basic instructions needed for proper operation and maintenance of entire work. 3.2 CLEANING A. Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 16. General cleaning during progress of work is specified in General Conditions and as temporary service in "Temporary Facilities" Section of this Division. Provide final cleaning of work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning surface or unit of work to normal "clean" condition expected for first-class building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instruction for cleaning operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required; 1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision- obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surface finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable transparent materials. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, remove excess lubrication and other substances. 01705 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Page 5 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. 6. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean. 7. Vacuum clean carpeted surface and similar soft surfaces. 8. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water exposure. 9. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. 10. Clean project site, including landscape development areas, of litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petrochemical spill and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth even-textured surface. END OF SECTION 01710 CLEANING Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01710 – CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION Cleaning during period of construction and at completion of the work. 1.2 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS Conduct cleaning and disposal operation to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti-pollution laws. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The site and adjacent properties shall be kept free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and wind blown debris, resulting from construction operations. B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site daily and dispose at a legal disposal area away from the site. 3.2 DUST CONTROL Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces. 01710 CLEANING Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.3 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning B. See Section 01705 - Project Closeout. END OF SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 01720 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Maintain at the site one record copy of the following: A. Drawings - Prints of drawings shall be clearly marked Record Prints. B. Specifications C. Addenda D. Change Orders and Written Instructions E. Field Orders and Written Instructions F. Submittals 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Substitutions 5. Field Test Reports 3.2 STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used for construction. 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Label documents other than drawing Record Documents and file documents and samples in accordance with Section number listings in Table of Contents of these specifications. C. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by the Owner. 3.3 DRAWINGS Record actual construction of: A. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground or concealed utilities and apparatus referenced to permanent features visible at surface. B. Field changes or dimensions and detail. C. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. D. Details not on original drawings. 3.4 SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA Record in each section changes made by Addenda, Change Order, and Field Order. 3.5 SUBMITTALS Prior to final inspection, deliver Record Documents to Owner. 3.6 OWNER INSPECTION OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Inspection by Owner shall be a minimum of once monthly. Owner's verification that documents are current shall be a requirement for issuance of Certificate of Payment. END OF SECTION 02225 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES Page 1 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02225 – EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section governs all excavation required for the construction of water, sanitary sewer, storm drain, and miscellaneous utility lines and for the backfilling around completed utility and storm drain lines to the level of the existing or finished ground, all in conformity with the locations, lines and grades shown on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. This section also covers the pumping or bailing and drainage, and all sheeting and bracing of trench walls. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work and construction conforming to the City of Denton specifications and details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials for bedding will include sandy gravel and crushed rock. These bedding materials should be clean and homogenous and free of mud, silt, clay lumps or clods, vegetation and/or debris. The sandy gravel shall have: Passing 2 inch sieve 100% Passing 1 inch sieve 90% - 100% Passing 1/2 inch sieve 50% - 80% Passing No. 4 sieve 30% - 60% Passing No. 100 sieve 0% - 5% All material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6. B. Crushed rock shall be graded as follows: Passing 1 inch sieve 100% Passing 3/4 inch sieve 90% - 100% Passing 1/2 inch sieve 20% - 55% Passing 3/8 inch sieve 0% - 15% Passing No. 4 sieve 0% - 5% 02225 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES Page 2 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Materials for backfill above the bedding material shall consist of random materials from the excavation. The backfill should be free of any appreciable amount of gravel or stone particles larger than four inches, in any dimension, and should be free of mud, silt, clay lumps or clods, vegetation and/or debris. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION AND TRENCH PROTECTION A. The walls and faces of all excavations and excavated trench es more than 5-feet deep or with evident hazardous ground movement in which workers are exposed to danger from moving ground shall be guarded by a shoring system, sloping of the ground, or other equivalent means. The determination of the angle of repose and the design of the supporting system shall be based on careful evaluation of the depth of cut, material, changes in material, water content variations, and external loadings. The minimum requirements for determining the angle of repose and for the shoring of excavations or trenches shall be in accordance with Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching and Shoring, Section 1926.650 thru Section 1926.652, as amended and with appendices, of the Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Occupational Safety and Hea lth Administration, U. S. Department of Labor. B. Shoring shall be used when the location of the trench is in a restricted clearing area, or within close proximity to other utility lines or structures. Existing vegetation may not be damaged or removed to accomplish a required angle of repose. Shoring will have to be used in such cases. C. Trench side slopes must meet Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards. Sheeting, shoring a nd bracing will be required when side slope standards are not met. A pull box, meeting OSHA standards, will be acceptable. D. The Contractor will submit detailed plans and specifications for trench safety systems that meet OSHA standards when excavation will exceed a depth of 5- feet. These plans must be sealed by an Engineer registered by the State of Texas and submitted prior to formal execution of the contract. 3.2 TRENCHES A. Prior to installation of any on-site subsurface utilities (water, sanitary sewer, drainage culverts, electrical, etc.) all rough grading shall be complete in all areas and roads to within plus or minus 0.10 feet. B. Utilities shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical or a combination of vertical or sloped sides. Trenches shall be sheeted and braced to the extent necessary to maintain stability of excavation and provide full safety for workmen throughout the construction period. Adequacy of the sheeting and bracing shall 02225 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES Page 3 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 be the responsibility of the Contractor. Also, Department of Labor "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" dated April 17, 1971, shall be adhered to by this Contract at all times. 02225 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES Page 4 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. The pipe should be placed on a minimum bedding material thickness below the pipe and extend up the sides of the trench. Large clods of backfill material will be broken down into smaller particles before placement. The backfi ll should be placed in loose layers not exceeding 6 -inches in depth (loose measurement) and each layer will be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density. Moisture content of the backfill should be between the optimum moisture value and 5% above optimum. D. For pipe utilities and storm drain lines of all types, where the soil encountered at established grade is a quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material the following procedure shall be used unless other metho ds are called for on the plans: All unstable soil shall be removed to a depth of 2-feet below bottom of storm drain line for drain lines 2-feet or more in height and to a depth equal to the height of the line for storm drain lines less than 2-feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least 1-foot beyond the horizontal limits on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with sandy gravel material, consisting of hard durable particles or fragments of granular aggregates mixed or b lended with fine sand, clay, stone dust or other similar binding or filler materials to provide a uniform mixture with gradations of materials as shown in Paragraph 2.01. After placement, the sand gravel material shall be wetted if necessary and shall be compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable foundation for the storm drain and utility line. Jetting will not be permitted. E. Any rock adjacent to the excavation which has been loosened by excavation methods, shall be removed and replaced with approved compacted backfill material. 3.3 SHAPING OF TRENCH BOTTOM The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans or specified in these specifications. 3.4 DEWATERING TRENCH A. Pipelines shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the utility placing operation to insure a dry, firm bed on which to place the pipe and the trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until all piping is set. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping or by a well-point installation as conditions warrant. B. Backfill shall be placed as soon as practicable after laying, bedding and jointing of pipe. 02225 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES Page 5 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.5 REMOVING OLD STRUCTURES When old masonry structures or foundations are e ncountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 1 foot below the bottom of the trench. 3.6 PROTECTION OF UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that measures are taken to maintain the stability and otherwise protect existing structures and utilities required to remain in place. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of existing utility lines, other contractors' utility lines and underground telephone and radio communication cables. B. The Contractor shall inform utility owners and the City of Denton sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay and expense. The Contractor shall cooperate with all utility owners conc erned in effecting any utility adjustments necessary and shall not hold the Owner liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of conflicts. 3.7 SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS All materials from excavation operations not required or not suitable for backfilling shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off -site. 3.8 BACKFILL A. After the bedding has been prepared and the pipes installed, selected materials from excavation or borrow shall be placed along both sides of the pipe equally, in uniform layers not exceeding 6-inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted using enough water to facilitate compaction if required, and thoroughly compacted to the required density. Excess wetting or jetting will not be permitted. Material for backfill shall be free from stones of such size as to interfere with compaction and shall be free from large lumps which will not break down readily under compaction. The Owner shall have the right to reject any material containing more than 20% by weight of material retained on a 3-inch sieve, or material excavated in such a manner as to produce large lumps not easily broken down or which cannot be spread in loose layers. 02225 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES Page 6 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Filling and/or backfilling shall be continued in this manner to the elevation of the top of the pipe. Special care shall be taken to secure thorough compaction of the materials placed under the haunches of the pipe. All fill or backfill below the top of pipe shall be compacted in the manner prescribed above. The backfill above the pipe shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth. Successive layers shall be added and thoroughly compacted by hand o r pneumatic tampers or by mechanical compaction equipment approved by the Owner until the trench is completely filled and brought to the elevation of the existing ground or the top of the proposed subgrade, whichever is lower. Backfilling shall be done in such a manner as to avoid injurious top or side pressures on the pipe. C. Where trench excavation is in rock, shale or other incompressible material, excavate to at least 6-inches below the pipe and refill to grade with sand or gravel firmly compacted, then backfill as above following the installation of the pipe. D. All backfill below proposed finished grade shall be compacted in accordance with Section 02220 - Earthwork. E. Compaction control tests shall be made in accordance with Owner's Requirements. END OF SECTION 02270 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02270 – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials needed to complete the Work as shown on the Plans and specified herein. B. The work performed under this section shall comply with the plan requirements for this project and with the requirements and intent of the NPDES Storm Water Discharge Permit program to the extent that it applies to this project. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02220 - EARTHWORK B. Section 02930 – HYDRAULIC SEEDING 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of all governing authorities having jurisdiction. The Specifications and the Plans are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather to convey the intent to provide complete slope protection and erosion control for both the Owner's and adjacent property. B. Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction and maintained during the entire length of construction. On-site areas which are subject to severe erosion and off-site areas which are especially vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to be identified and receive additional erosion control measures as directed by the Owner. C. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted to minimize the size of the area to be exposed at any one time and to minimize the time of exposure. D. Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area shall be controlled to reduce erosion and sediment loss during the period of exposure. E. When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting from a land-disturbing activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving ditch or stream, the Contractor shall install measures to control both the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize accelerated erosion and increased sedimentation of the stream as directed by the Owner. F. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted so as to minimize off-site sedimentation damage. 02270 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning out and disposing of all sediment once the storage capacity of the drainage feature or structure receiving the sediment is reduced by one-half. The Contractor shall also be responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all sediment at the time of completion of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Silt Fence Fabric: 1. Mirafi 100X or approved equal. 2. Minimum bursting strength: 300 psi. 3. Edges treated to prevent unraveling. 4. Furnished with o-rings or clips to facilitate attachment to woven wire fabric. B. Wire Fencing: Steel wire fencing (hog wire) with minimum 14 gauge wire and a maximum 14 gauge wire and a maximum opening of 6 inches. C. Posts: 1. Steel, T-section minimum 4 feet 6 inches long, minimum of 1.3 pounds per foot without anchor plate. 2. Anchor plate attached before coating. 3. Fabricate with lugs or other approved means to prevent vertical movement from the wire fencing. D. Tie Wire: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A112. E. Temporary cover for graded areas shall be undamaged, air dry threshed straw free from weed seeds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE: 02270 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Erosion control measures must be implemented prior to the commencement of any soil disturbing activity. B. Stabilize fill and grade of areas to receive soil erosion and sediment control in accordance with Section 02220, “EARTHWORK”. Maintain positive drainage to sediment and erosion control devices during and after grading operations. 3.2 SILT FENCE: A. Install steel posts on a minimum of 4-foot centers. Minimum embedment of 6”. B. Minimum height of the silt fence to be 2 feet with a 6-inch clearance between the top of the silt fence and the top of the posts. C. Install the steel posts on a slight angle towards the anticipated runoff surface. D. Trench in the toe of the silt fence so that the down slope face of the trench is flat and perpendicular to the line of flow. E. Minimum trench depth: 6 inches. F. Trench width: 6 inches. G. Attach wire fence (hog wire) to the posts. H. Attach the silt fence fabric to the wire fence (hog wire) and secure with a minimum of two wire ties per post. I. Backfill over the silt fence fabric in the trench. J. When build up of soil, silt, or any other material behind the silt fence reaches a height of 6 inches or when the silt fence is no longer functioning efficiently, remove all accumulated material and repair the silt fence as needed. 3.3 DUST CONTROL A. Dust control of the Contractor's performance of the Work shall be performed by the Contractor by applying water. B. Dust control shall be provided in the amounts and locations as ordered by the Owner's Representative. 3.4 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE: A. Protect erosion and sediment control devices from damage. Repair and replace dikes, silt fences and other measures when damaged by construction, natural and other physical causes. All soil erosion and sediment control devices shall be 02270 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor and shall function as originally intended. B. Periodically (at least once every 7 days and after each rainfall event) inspect and maintain erosion and sediment control structures, until final stabilization of disturbed ground areas is achieved. C. All stock piled soil shall be surrounded by a silt fence to properly control sediment runoff. D. Inspection services provided by the Owner's Representatives do not relieve the Contractor's responsibility for inspection and maintenance of the erosion control measures. E. The Contractor is responsible for modifying or providing additional erosion control devices to control erosion from his operations on the site. This may become necessary due to disturbance of additional areas or phasing of the Contractor's operations. 3.5 STAGING AREAS: At such time when the specific location of the staging areas are determined, silt fences, diversions, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all side slope and down slope boundaries of the staging area and shall be provided by the Contractor. The erosion control plan for each staging area shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and devices shall be in place prior to occupation of the staging areas. All relative material and labor to construct and maintain the staging area erosion control plans shall be subsidiary to the other items of work. 3.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan as provided by Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION 02308 COMPOST Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02308 COMPOST PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 A. B. Furnish and place compost on all areas to receive sod within limits of Soccer the Soccer fields and the Central area to a depth of 1.5 inches. Incorporate compost into topsoil to a depth of 6". RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 A. B. Section 02310 - Laser Grading Section 02925 - Sodding SUBMITTALS A. Test Results and Compost Technical Data Sheets. B. Certification that compost is STA certified compost. C. Sample in quart bags. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPOST A. Azalea Soil as produced by Living Earth or approved equal. B. Contact: 972-869-4332 C. Manufacturer shall test product on a prescribed basis using STA Program approved labs, for chemical, physical, and biological properties in accordance with the U.S. Composting Council Seal of Testing Assurance. D. Properties of compost shall be suitable for turf and plant growth. 02308 COMPOST Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Apply topsoil to proper elevation to allow for compost installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Place compost and spread evenly. B. Thoroughly incorporate compost into soil to a minimum depth of 6" using suitable equipment. C. Fine grade and allow ground to settle. Regrade as required. END OF SECTION 02310 LASER GRADING Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02310 LASER GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Final grading of subgrade and surface grades utilizing laser controlled equipment for athletic fields and courts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 - Earthwork B. Section 02305 - Topsoil C. Section 02925 - Sodding 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Submit subcontractor qualifications and equipment information demonstrating the successful completion of at least five similar projects utilizing specialized laser controlled construction equipment. B.Required project experience shall involve fine grading of athletic fields. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION3.1 A. B. Verify site conditions. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B.Protect benchmarks, existing structures and improvements from excavating equipment. 02310 LASER GRADING Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Prepare soil by removing rocks, clods and foreign matter. 3.3 FINISHING AND LASER GRADING A.Establish required subgrades and surface grades using specialized construction equipment with an automatic blade/box control system using an external laser grade reference. B.Final laser graded surface shall be smooth and uniform and shall conform to the required lines, grades and cross sections. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Verify compliance of finish grading of final field surfaces by conducting a survey of points based on a grid not less than 40 feet square. Include other key points such as at bases pitching rubber and field corners. Submit copy of as-built survey. B.If survey indicates Work does not meet specified requirements, correct Work, and resurvey at no cost to Owner. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Soccer Fields Finish Surface - laser grade topsoil areas to finish grade. END OF SECTION 02510 Water Distribution Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02510 – WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 – General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings for water line, including domestic water line. 2. Valves and fire hydrants. 1.2 UNIT PRICE – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Basis of Measurement: By the linear foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes hand trimming excavation, pipe and fittings, bedding, concrete thrust blocks, pipe restraints, backfill, connection to building service piping and to existing municipal utility water source. B. Valves: 1. Basis of Measurement: By the unit. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes valve, fittings and accessories, and installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Waterworks Association (AWWA) “Standards”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. B. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 02510 Water Distribution Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with City of Denton specifications and details. B. Valves: Manufacturer’s name and pressure rating marked on valve body. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Shall be approved by City of Denton. B. Pipe: 1. AWWA C900 PVC, blue in color, Class 200 (DR14) for 8” diameter and smaller, Class 150 (DR18) for larger than 8” diameter. 2. AWWA C150 D.I., w/ polyethylene encasement (AWWA C105). C. Valves: Mueller, M&H, or Waterous – 300 psi test, w/ polyethylene encasement (AWWA C509). D. Fittings: US Pipe, American or approved equal, Class 250 D.I., polyethylene encasement (AWWA C105), w/ Mega-Lugs, or approved equal, and concrete thrust blocking. All bolts to be “Cor-Ten” or approved equal. E. Tapping Sleeves & Valve: Full body D.I. F. Water Service: Type K copper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that municipal utility water main size, location and invert are as indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 02510 Water Distribution Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with City of Denton specifications and details. B. Set valves and hydrants on solid bearing. C. PVC pipe shall have Class F1 embedment. D.I. pipe shall have Class F3 embedment. 3.4 DISINFECT ION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with City of Denton specifications. 3.5 TESTING A. All waterlines shall be visual and hydrostatically tested in accordance with City of Denton specifications. B. All trenches shall be compaction tested in accordance with City of Denton specifications. 3.6 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide water service per City of Denton requirements. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed per City of Denton requirements. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 02512 CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02512 – CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section governs the construction of exterior brush finish concrete paving, walks, and curb and gutter, complete, and as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork B. Section 03200 – Reinforcing Steel C. Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 02220 - Earthwork 1.3 REFERENCES - See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE - See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.5 TESTS - See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR BRUSH FINISH CONCRETE A. Portland Cement: Type IA, ASTM C175. (Air Entrained at 4% to 6%) B. Aggregates: See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days and shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 03310 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. D. Admixtures Provide admixtures produced by nationally recognized manufacturers. Do not use admixtures which have not been auth orized in writing by the Owner. 02512 CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E. Mix Design Provide Mix Design as approved by the City of Denton and a demonstrated record of performance. Submit Mix Design for approval with product submittals. F. Expansion joint material shall be 1/2-inch thick bituminous impregnated fiber, ASTM D1751, manufactured for use as expansion joint material, u nless otherwise noted on the Drawings. G. Reinforcing shall be deformed billet steel reinforcing bars conforming to Section 03200 – Reinforcing Steel. H. Curing Compound Provide a liquid-type membrane forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309. Use Type 1, clear with fugitive dye, for exterior surface, products offered by: Horncure 30D; A. C. Horn/WR. Grade Clear - Bond; Guardian Chemical Co. LR 151; Protex Ind., Inc. or approved equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL See Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete except as amended herein. 3.2 SLOPES Provide grade stakes not more than 25-feet apart for all pavement construction. Check tops of forms for grade before placing concrete. Introduce short vertical curves in walks as shown and at points where change in walk grade exceeds 3%. Slope pavement in the direction of drainage as indicated on the Drawings. Make slight adjus tments in slopes at intersections with existing pavement as necessary or directed by the Owner to match finish grade with existing conditions. 3.3 DIMENSIONS Concrete pavement shall be of one-course construction and of the thickness and widths shown on the drawings. 02512 CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.4 FINISHES A. Vibrate or tamp and screed the concrete true to grade and section, bring sufficient mortar to the surface for finishing, and give a wood or carpet -float finish. Round all edges, including those along expansion joints and grooves, (unless grooves are saw cut) to a 1/4-inch radius. B. Brush Finish Concrete Provide a light brush finish to parking lot, drives, curb and gutter, and all areas so designated on the drawings. Brush strokes shall be at 90 º to the long axis of the area receiving the finish. C. Architectural Finishes Provide architectural finishes as indicated in Drawings. See Section 03366 – Colored and Stamped Concrete Paving. 3.5 JOINTING A. Contractor to submit pavement jointing plan for approval prior to construction. B. Expansion Joints Provide 1/2-inch transverse expansion joints, with premolded filler at pavement intersections and where pavement abuts other fixed structures. Provide expansion joints at 48-ft. intervals in curb and gutter and in walks, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Expansion joints shall be placed vertically and shall extend the full depth thereof; the expansion joint filler shall extend to within 1/4-inch of the surface. C. Control Joint (Contraction Joints, Grooves) Between expansion joints, hand tool grooves or cut control joints 1/8 to 1/4 -inch wide and at least 1-1/2-inch deep, or T/5, whichever is greater. Place at intervals of 12-ft. on center, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. C. Joint Filler and Joint Sealing Joint filler and joint sealant shall comply with Items 2.2.9 and 2.2.10 of Standard Specifications for Public Construction, North Central Texas, latest edition. Color of Joint Filler to be approved by Owner’s Representative. 02512 CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.6 CONCRETE CURING A. General Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. Continue curing for at least 120 cumulative hours during which the concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 ºF. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period. B. Miscellaneous Concrete Walks a nd Paving Provide membrane curing by applying the specified membrane forming and curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as the water film has disappeared. Apply uniformly in a 2 coat continuous operation in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial applications. Maintain the continuity of the coating and repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period. 3.7 PROTECTION Remove no forms for at least 8 hours after initial set. Protect new concrete from pedestrian and automotive traffic for a period of 3 days after pouring. END OF SECTION 02515 CONCRETE WALKS Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02515 – CONCRETE WALKS PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Provisions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section covers the labor, materials, equipment and services needed for construction of concrete sidewalks (including handicap ramps), complete as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORM WORK B. SECTION 03200 - REINFORCING STEEL C. SECTION 03310 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. SECTION 02220 - EARTHWORK E. SECTION 02512 - CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING F. SECTION 03366 – COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE PAVING 1.3 SUBMITTALS Construct 4 ft. by 4 ft. test panels of each finish for examination and approval by the Owner. Do not begin work until Owner and Landscape Architect has approved test panel. Construct as many test panels as necessary to create finishes which achieve Owner's approval. Pavement which does not match the appropriate approved test panel, in the Owner's judgment, will be rejected and shall be removed immediately, at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR BRUSH FINISH CONCRETE A. Portland Cement: Type IA, ASTM C175. (Air Entrained at 4% to 6%) B. Aggregates: See Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 02515 CONCRETE WALKS Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3600 psi at 28 days and shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. D. Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced by nationally recognized manufacturers. Do not use admixtures which have not been authorized in writing by the Owner. E. Slump: 4 inch maximum, 4 inch minimum, measured at point of deposit. F. Mix Design: Provide Mix Design which has a demonstrated record of performance. Submit Mix Design for approval with product submittals. 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion Joint 1. Expansion Joint filler shall be 3/4" redwood with removable wood zip strip manufactured for use as expansion joint material. 2. Joint sealant shall be Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, self leveling, two component urethane, as manufactured by Sonneborn Corp. Submit joint sealant colors to Landscape Architect for approval prior to construction. B. Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing shall be deformed billet steel reinforcing bars conforming to Section 03200 – Reinforcing Steel. C. Curing Compound Provide a liquid-type membrane forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309. Use Type 1, clear with fugitive dye, for exterior surface: Products offered by: Horncure 30D; A. C. Horn/W.R. Grace Clear - Bond; Guardian Chemical Co. LR 151; Protex Ind., Inc. or approved equal D. Key Way for Construction Joints 1. Vulco Screed Joint, Type 1, with No. 8150 vinyl screed cap, as manufactured by Vulcan Metal Products, Inc., Birmingham, Alabama; Available from Lofland Co. (817) 838-6811. PART 3 - EXECUTION 02515 CONCRETE WALKS Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. 1 GENERAL See Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, except as amended herein. 3.2 SLOPES Provide grade stakes not more than 25 feet apart for all walk construction. Check tops of forms for grade before placing concrete. Introduce short vertical curves in walks as shown and at points where change in walk grade exceeds 3%. Provide 1/4-inch per foot crown or cross slope in the direction of drainage as indicated on the Drawings. Pitch walks to adjacent drainage routes and make slight adjustments in slopes at walk intersections as necessary or directed to provide proper drainage. 3.3 DIMENSIONS Concrete walks shall be of one-course construction and of the thickness and widths shown on the Drawings. 3.4 FINISHES A. Vibrate or tamp and screed the concrete true to grade and section, bring sufficient mortar to the surface for finishing, and give a wood or carpet-float finish. Round all edges, including those along expansion joints and grooves, to a 1/4 inch radius. B. All walks shall have a medium brush finish, unless noted otherwise on drawings. C. Architectural Finishes: As indicated on Drawings. See Section 03366 Colored and Stamped Concrete Paving. 3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS Provide 3/4 inch transverse expansion joints, with redwood filler as indicated on drawings and at walk intersections and where walks abut other fixed structures. At walk intersections, the required expansion joints shall be located at the end of each fillet. Expansion joints shall be at right angles to the walk and extend the full depth thereof. 3.6 CONTROL JOINT (CONTRACTION JOINTS, GROOVES) Between expansion joints, cut control joints 1/8 to 1/4 inch wide and at least one inch deep, or T/5, whichever is greater. Spacing to be equal to the sidewalk width unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 02515 CONCRETE WALKS Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.7 JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALANT Joint filler and joint sealant shall comply with Items 2.2.9 and 2.2.10 of Standard Specifications for Public Construction, North Central Texas, latest edition. Color of Joint Filler to be approved by Owner’s Representative. 3.7 CONCRETE CURING Concrete walks shall be cured in accordance with Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete of these Specifications. 3.8 PROTECTION Remove no forms for at least 8 hours after initial set. Protect concrete walks from pedestrian and automotive traffic for a period of 3 days after pouring. END OF SECTION 02580 PAVEMENT MARKING Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02580 – PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION Paint striping of existing paving as indicated and detailed on the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS Paint for pavement marking shall conform to Federal Specification TT-P-115E, Paint, Traffic, Highway, color to be approved Landscape Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 METHODS OF APPLICATION A. Equipment All machines, tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be approved by the Owner's representative and shall be maintained in satisfactory operating condition. 1. Paint Application The equipment for applying paint to pavements shall be self-propelled or mobile drawn pneumatic spraying machine with suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the specified results. The machine shall be capable of applying the stripe widths indicated, shall have a speed during application not less than 5 miles per hour and shall be capable of applying the paint at the coverage rate specified in paragraph APPLICATION, at an even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges. Equipment used for marking pavements shall be capable of placing the prescribed number of lines at a single pass as solid lines, intermittent lines or a combination of solid and intermittent lines using a maximum of three different colors of paint as specified. The paint applicator shall have paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity and suitable gages to apply paint in accordance with the requirements specified. The tanks shall be equipped with suitable air-driven mechanical agitators. The spray mechanism shall be equipped with quick-action valves conveniently located, and shall include necessary pressure regulators and 02580 PAVEMENT MARKING Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 gages in full view and reach of the operator. Paint strainers shall be installed in the paint supply lines to insure freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the spray guns. Pneumatic spray guns shall be provided for hand application of paint in areas where the mobile paint applicator cannot be used. 2. Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses and nozzles of proper size and capacity as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. The compressor shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150 cubic feet of air per minute at a pressure not less than 90 pounds per square inch at the nozzle for each nozzle used. B. Surface Penetration New concrete pavement surfaces shall be allowed to cure for a period of not less than ten days, and asphalt surfaces for thirty days before application of marking materials. All surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned before application of the paint. Dust. dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be removed by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water or a combination of these methods as required. Rubber deposits, surface laitance, and other coatings adhering to the pavement shall be completely removed with scrapers, wire brushes, sandblasting, approved chemicals, or mechanical abrasion as directed. Where oil or grease is present on pavements to be marked, the affected areas shall be scrubbed with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser and rinsed thoroughly after each application. After cleaning, the oil soaked areas shall be sealed with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. C. Application 1. Rate of Application: Paint shall be applied evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet per gallon. 2. Paint shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, and only when the air and pavement temperatures are above 40ºF and less than 95ºF. The paint temperature shall be maintained within these same limits. Paint shall be applied pneumatically with approved equipment and at the rate of coverage specified herein. The Contractor shall provide guidelines and templates as necessary to control paint application. 02580 PAVEMENT MARKING Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and so there will be no pickup, displacements, or discoloration by tires or traffic. If there is a deficiency in drying of the markings, painting operations shall be discontinued until the cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected. If discoloration of the paint occurs due to bleeding of bituminous materials, the paint should be applied in two coats. A light coat of paint should first be applied at a coverage of about 35 to 40 percent of the specified coverage. After drying, a second coat should be applied to complete the specified coverage. END OF SECTION 02830 - 1 CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02830 1 CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 3 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 4 A. Furnish and install chain link fence and gates for soccer fields, baseball outfields, 5 dugouts and backstops. 6 1.2 SUBMITTALS 7 A. Shop drawings on backstops, fencing, and gates. 8 B. Material certifications and product data. 9 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 10 A. Fencing components shall conform to Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute 11 (CLFMI) Product Manual (Standard Guide for Metallic Coated Chain Link Fence and 12 Fabric) and applicable ASTM standards. 13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 14 2.1 FENCING 15 A. The entire chainlink fencing system including fabric, line, terminal posts and corner 16 posts, rails, steel and iron parts, and braces shall be hot dipped galvanized-after weaving. 17 2.2 PIPE 18 A. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1083 Specification for Pipe, Steel, 19 Hot Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 20 B. Pipe shall conform to following size and weight requirements and in accordance with 21 ASTM F 1083 for Schedule 40 pipe. 22 23 Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) Outside Diameter (inches) Wall Thickness (Inches) Weight (lbs./ft) 1-1/4 1.660 0.140 2.27 2 2.375 0.154 3.65 2-1/2 2.875 0.203 5.80 3 3.500 0.216 7.58 3-1/2 4.000 0.226 9.12 4 4.500 0.237 10.80 6 6.625 0.280 18.99 24 Note: The dimensionless designator NPS (minimal pipe size) has been substituted in 25 this specification for such traditional terms as nominal diameter, size and minimal 26 size. 27 28 C. Pipe shall be coated inside and outside by the hot-dip process, with the weight of the 29 zinc coating not less than 1.8 oz/sf (of the surface being coated). 30 02830 - 2 CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.3 FABRIC 1 A. All chain link fabric shall be No. 6 or 9 gauge as indicated on the drawings, 2-inch 2 mesh, coated steel chain link wire which shall stand a minimum tensile strength of 90,000 3 psi based upon cross sectional area of wire. All fencing shall have knuckled selvage. 4 B. Fencing shall be No. 9 gauge fabric. 5 C. Wire Coating: Galvanized coating shall be a minimum of 2 ounces per square foot of 6 wire surface conforming to ASTM A392 Class 2, Hot Dip Process after weaving. 7 D. Fabric Test: Submit a manufacturer's certified test result that zinc coating material is a 8 minimum of 2 ounces per square foot of wire. 9 2.4 TOP RAIL 10 A. Fencing outside diameter per plans, with outside sleeve type couplings at least 7 inches 11 long, one coupling in every 5 to have spring to take up expansion and contraction of rail. 12 Fabric tied to top rail every 24 inches with No. 9 gauge aluminum tie wires. Reference 13 NPS chart 2.2 B 14 2.5 BOTTOM AND MIDDLE RAIL 15 A. Bottom and middle rails for fencing shall conform to requirements for top rail. 16 B. Fencing – 4 ft. height: bottom rail shall conform to requirements for top rail 17 C. Fencing – 6 ft. height: bottom rail shall conform to requirements for top rail. 18 D. Fencing – 16 ft. height: provide middle and bottom rails per detail, to conform to 19 requirements for top rail. 20 2.6 LINE POSTS 21 A. All line posts shall conform to the following specifications and conditions as shown on 22 the drawings. 23 B. Fencing shall have Schedule 40, galvanized line posts of the sizes indicated on the 24 drawings. 25 C. Spacing of line posts shall not exceed 10 ft. on center. 26 D. Line posts to be equipped with No. 9 gauge aluminum wire ties on 14-inch centers. 27 2.7 TERMINAL POSTS 28 A. End, corner and pull posts shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. End, corner and pull 29 posts for fencing shall be the sizes indicated on the drawings. Posts to be equipped with 30 1/4-inch by 3/4-inch tension bar, #11 gauge by 1-inch wide tension bands and 3/8-inch 31 diameter carriage bolts and nuts; bands on approximately 14-inch centers. Posts to be 32 equipped with hot dip galvanized malleable cast iron or pressed steel cap of 33 manufacturer's design. 34 2.8 BRACES 35 A. 3/8-inch galvanized rod trusses from line post back to the terminal post complete with 36 truss tightener. 37 02830 - 3 CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.9 SWING GATE FRAME 1 A. Round tubular members, welded at all corners. Welded joints shall be coated in 2 accordance with Practice ASTM A 780, employing a zinc-rich paint. 3 2.10 GATE FABRIC 4 A. Same type as used in fence construction. 5 B. Securely attach to frame at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. 6 2.11 GATE HINGES 7 A. Structural, capable of supporting the gate leaf and allow the gate to open and close 8 without binding. Coatings to match the fence post coating specification. 9 B. Permit the gate to swing a full 180 degrees (outward from playing fields). 10 2.12 SINGLE GATE LATCH 11 A. Capable of retaining the gate in a closed position and include provision for a padlock. 12 Coating to match the fence post coating specification. 13 2.13 BACKSTOP 14 A. N/A 15 2.14 CONCRETE POST FOOTINGS AND EDGING 16 A. All concrete used shall be 3,000 psi at 28 days using 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard 17 of mix with a maximum of 7 gallons of water per sack. Concrete work shall conform to 18 Section 03300. 19 2.15 TOLERANCE 20 A. Standard mill tolerance on all framework members and chain link fabric will apply. 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION 22 3.1 INSTALLATION 23 A. Install fence by skilled and experienced fence erectors and on lines and grades as shown 24 on Drawings. All posts shall be set plumb, and as indicated on Drawings. Top rails shall 25 run with finish grade with no discernable humps, valleys, or bends. 26 3.2 COORDINATION 27 A. Coordinate work as to location of posts and timing of post placement. Post footings 28 shall be installed to allow for placement of concrete grade beams, mowing strips, and 29 other surfaces. Locate top of post footings 4 inches below finish grade in lawn areas. 30 3.3 WELDING 31 A. All welds shall be flush and free of sharp edges, spurs, welding flux, etc., and shall 32 conform to AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction." All welds shall be 33 coated with cold ZRC galvanizing compound. 34 B. Gate frames shall be welded. 35 02830 - 4 CHAIN LINK FENCING & BACKSTOPS Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.4 FENCE FRAMING INSTALLATION 1 A. Install chain link fence is accordance with ASTM F 567 and manufacturer’s 2 instructions. 3 B. Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical 4 direction of 30 degrees or more. 5 C. Bracing: Install horizontal pipe brace at mid-height for fences 6 feet and over, on each 6 side of terminal posts. Firmly attach with fittings. Install diagonal truss rods at these 7 points. Adjust truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb. 8 D. Tension Wire: Provide tension wire at bottom of fabric (where bottom rail is not 9 provided). Install tension wire before stretching fabric and attach to each post with ties. 10 Secure tension wire to fabric with 12-1/2 gauge hog rings 24” o.c. 11 E. Fasteners: Install nuts on side of fence opposite fabric side for added security. 12 3.5 FABRIC ORIENTATION 13 A. Place fabric on inside of fields, except as shown on Drawings. 14 B. Leave approximately 2” between finish grade and bottom selvage. 15 END OF SECTION 16 02930 HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM Page 1 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02930 - HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies a hydraulically-applied, 100% biodegradable, High Performance-Flexible Growth Medium (HP-FGM) that is manufactured in the United States and is composed of 100% recycled thermally refined (within a pressure vessel) wood fibers, crimped interlocking man-made biodegradable fibers, mineral activators, naturally derived crosslinked biopolymers and water absorbents. The HP- FGM is photo-sanitized, free from plastic netting, requires no curing period and upon application forms an intimate bond with the soil surface to create a continuous, porous, absorbent and flexible erosion resistant blanket that allows for rapid germination and accelerated plant growth. B. Related Sections: Other Specification Sections, which directly relate to the work of this Section include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Section 02300 – Earthwork 2. Section 02930 – Hydraulic Seeding 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. Include required substrate preparation, list of materials and application rate. B. Certifications: Manufacturer shall submit a letter of certification that the product meets or exceeds all technical and packaging requirements. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in UV and weather-resistant factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. PROFILE Products LLC 750 Lake Cook Road – Suite 440 Buffalo Grove, IL 60089 800-366-1180 (Fax 847-215-0577) www.profileproducts.com 02930 HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM Page 2 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.2 MATERIALS A. Seed Mix: Seed mix descriptions, application rates, and acceptable manufacturers are listed in Section 02930 - Hydraulic Seeding. B. The HP-FGM shall be Flexterra® HP-FGM and conform to the following property values when uniformly applied at a rate of 3500 pounds per acre (3900 kilograms/hectare) under laboratory conditions. Property Test Method Req. Value (English)Req. Value (SI) Physical Mass Per Unit Area ASTM D65661 12 oz/yd2 minimum 407 g/m2 minimum Thickness ASTM D65251 0.22 inch minimum 5.6 mm. minimum Wet Bond Strength ASTM D68181 9 lb/ft 131 N/m Ground Cover ASTM D65671 99% minimum 99% minimum Water Holding Capacity ASTM D7367 1700% minimum 1700% minimum Material Color Observed Green Green Performance Cover Factor2 Large Scale Testing4 0.01 maximum 0.01 maximum % Effectiveness3 Large Scale Testing4 99 % minimum 99 % minimum Cure time Observed 0 - 2 hours 0 - 2 hours Vegetation Establishment ASTM D73221 800 % minimum 800 % minimum Yield5 Calculated 2.6 minimum 2245 minimum Kinetic Energy Absorption Potential6 Calculated 2.0 minimum 734 minimum Environmental Functional Longevity7 ASTM D5338 Up to 18 months Up to 18 months Ecotoxicity EPA 2021.0 96-hr LC50 > 100%96-hr LC50 > 100% Effluent Turbidity Large Scale Testing4 100 NTU maximum 100 NTU maximum Biodegradability ASTM D5338 100% minimum 100% minimum 1. ASTM test methods developed for Rolled Erosion Control Products and have been modified to accommodate Hydraulically-Applied Erosion Control Products. 2. Cover Factor is calculated as soil loss ratio of treated surface versus an untreated control surface. 3. % Effectiveness = One minus Cover Factor multiplied by 100%. 4. Large scale testing conducted at Utah Water Research Laboratory. For specific testing information please contact a Profile technical service representative at 866-325-6262. 5. Yield = (Mass per Unit Area)*(Thickness)*(Ground Cover Percentage). 6. Kinetic Energy Absorption Potential = (Wet Bond Strength)*(Thickness) 7. Functional Longevity is the estimated time period, based upon ASTM D5338 testing and field observations, that a material can be anticipated to provide erosion control and agronomic benefits as influenced by composition, as well as site-specific conditions, including; but not limited to – temperature, moisture, light conditions, soils, biological activity, vegetative establishment and other environmental factors. 02930 HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM Page 3 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.3 COMPOSITION A. All components of the HP-FGM shall be pre-packaged by the Manufacturer to assure both material performance and compliance with the following values. No chemical additives with the exception of fertilizer, soil pH modifiers, extended-term dyes and biostimulant materials should be added to this product. 1. Thermally Processed (within a pressure vessel) Wood Fiber – 80% + 3% Heated to a temperature greater than 380 degrees Fahrenheit (193 degrees Celsius) for 5 minutes at a pressure greater than 50 psi (345 kPa) Crosslinked Biopolymers and Water Absorbents – 10% + 1% Crimped, Man-made Biodegradable Interlocking Fibers – 5% + 1% Micro-Pore Granules – 5% + 1% 2.4 PACKAGING A. Bags: Net Weight – 50 lb, UV and weather-resistant plastic film Pallets: Weather-proof, stretch-wrapped with UV resistant pallet cover Pallet Quantity: 40 bags/pallet or 1 ton/pallet PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE AND SEEDBED PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and conditions where materials will be applied. Apply product to geotechnically stable slopes that have been designed and constructed to divert runoff away from the face of the slope. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions are established. B. Depending upon project sequencing and intended application, prepare seedbed in compliance with other specifications under Section 1.01 B 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Use approved hydro-spraying machines with fan-type nozzle (50-degree tip). To achieve optimum soil surface coverage, apply HP-FGM from opposing directions to soil surface. Rough surfaces (rocky terrain, cat tracks and ripped soils) may require higher application rates to achieve 100% cover. Slope interruption devices or water diversion techniques are recommended when slope lengths exceed 100 feet (30 m). Maximum slope length is for product applications on a 3H:1V slope. For application on steeper slopes, slope interruption lengths may need to be decreased based on actual site conditions. Not recommended for channels or areas with concentrated water flow. This product may be applied on saturated soils and does not require a curing period to be effective. No chemical additives with the exception of fertilizer, liming and biostimulant materials should be added to this product. 02930 HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM Page 4 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. For Erosion Control and Revegetation: To ensure proper application rates, measure and stake area. For maximum performance, apply HP-FGM in a two- step process*: 1.Step One: Apply fertilizer with specified prescriptive agronomic formulations and 50% of seed with a small amount of HP-FGM for visual metering. 2.Step Two: Mix balance of seed and apply HP-FGM at a rate of 50 lb per 125 gallons (23 kg/475 liters) of water over freshly seeded surfaces. Confirm loading rates with equipment manufacturer. Do not leave seeded surfaces unprotected, especially if precipitation is imminent. *Depending upon site conditions HP-FGM may be applied in a one-step process where all components may be mixed together in single tank loads. Consult with Manufacturer for further details. Best results and more rapid curing are achieved at temperatures exceeding 60°F (15°C). Curing times may be accelerated in high temperature, low humidity conditions with product applied on dry soils. Over-application of product may inhibit germination and plant growth. C. Mixing: A mechanically agitated hydraulic-application machine is strongly recommended: 1.Fill 1/3 of mechanically agitated hydroseeder with water. Turn pump on for 15 seconds and purge and pre-wet lines. Turn pump off. 2.Turn agitator on and load low density materials first (i.e. seed). 3.Continue slowly filling tank with water while loading fiber matrix into tank. 4.Consult application and loading charts to determine number of bags to be added for desired area and application rate. Mix at a rate of 50 lb of HP- FGM per 125 gallons (23 kg/475 liters). Contact Equipment manufacturer to confirm optimum mixing rates. 5.All HP-FGM should be completely loaded before water level reaches 75% of the top of tank. 6.Top off with water and mix until all fiber is fully broken apart and hydrated (minimum of 10 minutes — increase mixing time when applying in cold conditions). This is very important to fully activate the bonding additives and to obtain proper viscosity. 7.Add fertilizer 8.Shut off recirculation valve to minimize potential for air entrainment within the slurry. 9.Slow down agitator and start applying with a 50-degree fan tip nozzle. 10.Spray in opposing directions for maximum soil coverage. 02930 HYDRAULICALLY-APPLIED SEEDING HIGH PERFORMANCE-FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM Page 5 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D. Application Rates: These application rates are for standard conditions. Designers may wish to reduce rates to encourage faster vegetation establishment or may need to increase application rates on rough surfaces. Slope Gradient / Condition English SI < 4H to 1V 2500 lb/ac 2800 kg/ha > 4H to 1V and < 3H to 1V 3000 lb/ac 3400 kg/ha > 3H to 1V and < 2H to 1V 3500 lb/ac 3900 kg/ha > 2H to 1V and < 1H to 1V 4000 lb/ac 4500 kg/ha > 1H to 1V 4500 lb/ac 5100 kg/ha Below ECB or TRM 1500 lb/ac 1700 kg/ha As infill for TRM* 3500 lb/ac 3900 kg/ha *Use only approved and tested TRMs to create the GreenArmor™ System 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After application, thoroughly flush the tank, pumps and hoses to remove all material. Wash all material from the exterior of the machine and remove any slurry spills. Once dry, material will be more difficult to remove. B. Clean spills promptly. Advise owner of methods for protection of treated areas. Do not allow treated areas to be trafficked or subjected to grazing. D ENGLISH SI END SECTION 02930 02938 TURF AND GRASSES Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 02938 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: This work includes all labor, materials and equipment for soil preparation, fertilization, planting and other requirements regarding turfgrass sodding shown on drawings. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Section 02300, Earthwork. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For exotic plant materials: American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature, Second Edition, 1942. B. For native materials 1. Manual of the Vascular Plants of Texas by Correll and Johnston 2. Check List of Vascular Plants of Texas by Hatch 3. Flora of North Central Texas by Shinners and Moller C. Texas Seed Law & Regulations – latest edition. D. ASTM – American Standard Testing Material 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples, certificates and specifications of sod, fertilizer, compost, soil amendments or other materials may be requested by the Project Manager. B. All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this work shall be subject to verification by the Project Manager. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Sod: Harvesting and planting operations shall be coordinated with not more than forty eight hours elapsing between the harvesting and planting. In times of extreme heat (over 95 degrees Fahrenheit) period of time between harvesting and planting to be no more than 24 hours. Verification of harvesting time will be required. B. Fertilizer 1. Unopened bags labeled with the analysis. 2. Conform to Texas Fertilizer Law. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. The contractor who plants the sod is responsible for supervision of his crew, while planting the sod and maintaining the sod until the project is accepted by the Owner. 02938 TURF AND GRASSES Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOD A. The sod shall be of the type shown on the drawings and shall consist of stolons, leaf blades, rhizomes and roots with a healthy, virile system of dense, thickly matted roots throughout the soil of the sod for a thickness not less than one inch. Sod shall be alive, healthy and vigorous and shall be free of insects, disease, stones and undesirable foreign materials and grasses. Sod shall have been produced on growing beds of clay or clay-loam topsoil. The sod shall not be harvested or planted when its moisture condition is so excessively wet or dry that its survival will be affected. If sod is stacked, it shall be kept moist and shall be stacked roots-to-roots and grass-to- grass. B. The sod shall be cut in strips four feet wide, or as called for on plan, to be laid parallel with the contours. 2.2 FERTILIZER A. All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or containers clearly labeled showing the analysis. B. All fertilizer shall be in acceptable condition for distribution and shall be applied uniformly over the planted area two weeks after sodding. C. All fertilizer shall have an analysis of 3-1-2 or as designated on the plans. The fertilizer rate shall be 45 pounds of nitrogen per acre. 2.3 WATER A. The water shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be clean and free of industrial wastes or other substances harmful to the germination of the seed or to the growth of the vegetation. The amount of water will vary according to the weather variables. Generally, the sod should be soaked one time per day for three weeks or until established. Soaking is mandatory after spreading the fertilizer. 2.4 COMPOST All compost material is to be totally organic and decomposed for at least nine months. All compost is to be clean and free of fungus, disease, live plants, seed, excessive cotton lint and any harmful chemicals. Raw organics are not acceptable. A. Dyno Dirt as produced by City of Denton using yard trimmings and biosolids or approved equal. B. Contact: Gayla Wright, City of Denton, 940-349-8290 (office) or 940-390-9352 (mobile). C. Sample and Specification Submittal: Submit a producer's specification and a quart sample of the compost proposed for the Project Manager's approval. 2.5 TURF TOP DRESSING All turf top dressing is to be totally organic and decomposed for at least nine months. All turf top dressing is to be clean and free of fungus, disease, live plants, seed, excessive cotton lint and any harmful chemicals. 02938 TURF AND GRASSES Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Amend with top soil with a top dressing suited for need as determined by Landscape Architect from review of soil test data: Use either "Enriched Top Soil", "Dairy Manure Top Dressing", "Professional Top Dressing" or “PH Balanced Top Dressing" as produced by Soil Building Systems, Inc., of Dallas, (866) 764-5727, or an approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All turfing operations are to be executed across the slope, parallel to finished grade contours. 3.2 SOIL PREPARATION A. Scarify subgrade to a depth of four inches (4”) before depositing the required topsoil. B. Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the topsoil, destroy existing vegetation and prepare an acceptable sod bed. All areas shall be tilled with a heavy duty disc or a chisel-type breaking plow; chisels set not more than ten inches apart. Initial tillage shall be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage, and then followed by a disc harrow. Depth of tillage shall be five inches. A heavy duty rototiller may be used for areas to be planted with sod. C. Cleaning: Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials, rubbish, weeds and stones larger than one inch in diameter. D. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be topdressed with one-half inch compost and then shall be leveled; fine graded, and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts, depressions, humps and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before planting. 3.3 PLANTING A. Prior to laying the sod, the planting bed shall be raked smooth to true grade and moistened to a depth of four inches, but not to the extent causing puddling. B. Remove and dispose of stones 1/2 inch or larger, sticks, roots, other debris and grass stubble exposed during this operation. C. Do not vary final grades more than 0.1 feet from finish elevations. D. Receive approval of fine grading from Architect prior to grass planting. E. The sod shall be laid smoothly, tightly butted edge to edge, and with staggered joints. The sod shall be pressed firmly into the sod bed by mechanical roller so as to eliminate all air pockets, provide a true and even surface, and insure knitting without displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. F. Following compaction, compost shall be used to fill all cracks between sods. Excess compost shall be worked into the grass with suitable equipment and shall be well watered. The quantity of compost shall be such that it will cause no smothering or burning of the grass. 02938 TURF AND GRASSES Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.4 FERTILIZING A. First Application (Twenty-one days after planting): 1. Distribute 10-10-10 fertilizer uniformly at rate of 15 pounds per 1,000 square feet and rake into seed bed prior to sodding. B. Second Application: 1. Repeat fertilization with 20-5-10 commercial fertilizer after first cutting at rate of 15 pounds per 1,000 square feet. C. Water: Immediately water in fertilizer after each application. 3.5 PERFORMANCE A. Establish a dense lawn of permanent grasses, free from lumps and depressions. B. Re-grass any area failing to show uniform cover. Such replacement shall continue until a dense lawn is established. Scattered bare or dead spots will not be allowed. C. Mow and edge lawn a minimum of three times, each time after lawn has reached a height of 2-1/2 inches. Mow to a height of 2 inches returning clippings to lawn. D. Keep lawn areas weeded removing broadleaf and grassy weeds as required. 3.6 GRADE MAINTENANCE AND EROSION DAMAGE A. Maintain original grades of lawn areas after commencement of planting and during maintenance period. B. Provide surface repair to ruts, ridges, tracks. Replant areas as required for final acceptance. 3.7 ACCEPTANCE A. The work will be accepted when a dense, undamaged stand of grass, free of weeds, is achieved, as approved by Landscape Architect/Owner. 3.8 CLEAN UP A. Keep premises neat and orderly including organization of storage areas. Remove trash and debris resulting from lawn preparation from site daily as work progresses. Leave paved areas in a broom clean condition by sweeping or hosing. END OF SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03100 – CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1, Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope. Furnish all material, labor, tools, equipment and related items required to provide forms for cast-in-place concrete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Reinforcing Steel - Section 03200 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03310 3. Colored and Stamped Concrete Paving – Section 03366 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following publications of the American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition shall apply to the extent applicable in each reference thereto: ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. B. Design Criteria. 1. Design formwork for loads and lateral pressures outlined in ACI 347, wind loads as specified by controlling local building code, and such other loads to which the form may be subjected. Comply with the requirements of State and Federal safety standards. 2. Details of formwork shall comply with ACI 347. 3. Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces, unless indicated on the Drawings. C. Tolerances. 1. Construct formwork to insure that the concrete surfaces will comply with tolerances set forth in ACI 301. 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Plywood used for forms shall be Exterior-Type APA Class I as graded by the American Plywood Association. B. Steel forms shall be free of dents and other defects which would make them susceptible to leakage or disfigurement of the finished concrete surface. C. Form oil shall be a non-staining paraffin-base oil having a specific gravity of between 0.8 and 0.9. D. Release agent used shall be non-staining. E. Form accessories to be partially or wholly embedded in the concrete, such as ties and hangers, shall be a commercially manufactured type. Non-fabricated wire is not acceptable. The portion remaining within the concrete shall leave no metal within 1" of the surface when the concrete is exposed to view. Spreader cones on the ties shall not exceed 7/8" diameter. Design form ties to prevent seepage of water along the tie. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Forms shall be tight to prevent leakage of grout or cement paste. B. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts. Take up all settlement during concrete placing operations. Brace forms against lateral deflections. C. All curvilinear formwork will be curved smoothly to avoid segmental tangents over curved edges. 3.2 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Plywood and other wood surfaces not subject to shrinkage shall be sealed against absorption of moisture from the concrete by either: 1. A field applied form oil or sealer, or 2. A factory applied non-absorptive liner. 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. When forms are coated to prevent bond with concrete, it shall be done prior to erecting forms. Do not allow excess coating material to stand in puddles in the forms or allowed to come in contact with the surfaces to which fresh concrete is to be bonded. 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Clean form surfaces before use and re-use. D. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to concrete surfaces. 3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. The shores and supports shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength, unless otherwise permitted. B. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, cure the exposed concrete by one of the methods specified in Section 03300. C. Remove form ties as soon as possible after form removal, not to exceed 2 working days. 3.4 REMOVAL STRENGTH A. When formwork removal is based on the concrete reaching its specified 28 day strength, the concrete shall be presumed to have reached this strength when either of the following conditions is met: 1. When test cylinders, field cured under the most unfavorable conditions prevailing for any portion of the concrete represented, have reached the required strength. Except for the field curing and age at test, the cylinders shall be molded and tested as specified in Section 03300. 2. When the concrete has been cured as specified in Section 03300, for the same length of time as the age at test of laboratory-cured cylinders which have reached the required strength. The length of time the concrete has been cured in the field shall be determined by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which time the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees and the concrete has been damp or sealed from evaporation and loss of moisture. END OF SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03100-A - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install form materials, water stops, and form accessories: including: 1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 2. Openings for other work. 3. Form accessories. 4. Form stripping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Framework. C. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring, and bracing to conform to design and code requirements, so that resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines, and dimensions. Formwork shall be sufficient to carry the wet weight of concrete and a minimum of 20 psf construction live load. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design, construct, and erect formwork in accordance with ACI 347 and 301. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of components to formwork. B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from A/E before proceeding. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Facing Materials: 1. Unexposed Finish Concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound concrete. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Exposed Finish Concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain free final appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and as follows: a. Plywood: PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade, mill-oiled and edge-sealed. b. Lumber: Southern Pine special, No. 2 grade, with stamp grade clearly visible. c. Steel: Minimum 16 gauge sheet, well matched and tight fitting. d. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete. 2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Void Forms: Trapezoidal, wax impregnated cardboard cartons; biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set; manufactured by Saveway Carton Forms or equal. 2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Snap off; 3/4-inch break back dimension. B. Form Release Agent: Material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Corners: Chamfered wood or plastic strips; maximum possible lengths. D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Section 04200. E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gauge thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. F. Nails, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings. 3.2 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on Drawings. F. Provide chamfer strips on exposed edges unless drawings note otherwise. G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing. 3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. D. Position recessed reglets for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in Section 04300. E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. F. Install water stops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints watertight. G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.5 FORM CLEANING A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de- icing salts or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.6 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.8 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Remove formwork progressively so no unbalanced loads are imposed on structure. C. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. D. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION 03100-S CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03100-S CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to install formwork and shoring for cast-in-place concrete, and installation into formwork of items furnished by others, such as anchor bolts, setting plates, bearing plates, anchorages, inserts, frames, nosings and other items to be embedded in concrete. B. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400 2. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. It is Contractor's responsibility to design and engineer formwork. B. Reference Standards: 1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. U.S. Product Standard for Softwood Plywood, Construction and Industrial PS-1. C. Allowable Tolerances: Except when close coordination and fitting of various trades' work precludes allowance of tolerance, maximum total permissible deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions shall be as stated below. See and maintain forms in such manner as to ensure completed work within specified tolerance limits. 1. Variation from plumb: a. In lines and surfaces of arises: In any 10 ft of length .....................1/4 in. Maximum for the entire length .........1 in. b. For exposed conspicuous lines: In any 20 ft of length .................... 1/4 in. Maximum for the entire length ......1/2 in. 2. Variation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor and wall openings.....+/-1/4 in. 3. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of beams in thickness of slabs: Minus................................................. 1/4 in. 03100-S CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Plus .................................................... 1/2 in. 4. Variation in steps................................ 1/4 in. 5. Variation in location of anchor bolts unless provided with sleeves or other means of adjustment..........................1/4 in. D. Max. deflection of form facing materials at concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of span between structural members. 1.4 A. Shop Drawings: Diagram of proposed construction joints not indicated on drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forms: Wood, metal or other approved material that will not adversely affect surface of concrete and will provide or facilitate obtaining specified surface finish. 1. Wood: a. Unexposed Surfaces: 1. No.2 Common or Better Southern Yellow Pine lumber, sufficient thickness to sustain loads to be imposed, dressed to uniform smooth contact surfaces, readily removable, or: 2. Commercial Standard Douglas-Fir, moisture resistant, concrete form plywood, not less than 5 ply, at least 3/4" thick, one side smooth. b. Exposed Surfaces: Non-absortive overlay plywood such as medium or high density overlay, Finn-Form or equal. B. Void box forms shall be wax-impregnated cardboard cartons, equal to those manufactured by SureVoid Products Inc.or approved equal. Cover ribs and tops shall be made of corrugated fiberboard capable of sustaining a load of six hundred (600) pounds per square foot, (as evidenced by recorded independent testing laboratory tests). All contact surfaces of void box forms shall be coated with an approved moisture resistant compound, sized as indicated. C. Form Accessories: 1. Form ties: Bolt rods or patented devices having a minimum tensile strength of 3,000 pounds when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in length and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would leave a hole larger than 1" in diameter. Ties shall be of such construction that, when forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within 1" of finished surface. 2. Form Release Agent: Non-Staining, wax barrier type, Symons Corp., "Magic Cote" or equal. 3. Construction Joint Form: Burke Concrete Products "Keyed Kold Joint" or equal. 03100-S CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Formwork Construction: 1. Construct forms tight to prevent loss of mortar. Use chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges on permanently exposed surfaces. 2. Camber formwork to compensate for deflections in formwork prior to concrete attaining design strength. 3. Adjust shores and struts to take up settlement caused by concrete placement. 4. Provide temporary openings in formwork to allow cleaning and observation. 5. Construct forms for beams and girders so that sides may be removed without disturbing bottom of form or its support. 6. Clean contact and screed surfaces of hardened concrete and foreign materials prior to assembly. B. Form Coatings: 1. Apply specified form release agent; follow manufacturer's direction. 2. Do not allow agent to puddle in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed. 3. Do not coat forms with material that will stain or disfigure exposed concrete surfaces; do not use forms coated with such material. C. Form Accessories: 1. Form Ties: Coat ties that are to be pulled from walls with cup grease or other approved material to facilitate removal. D. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, and as acceptable to the Structural Engineer. 2. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in construction joints in walls and slabs; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. 4. Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. E. Installation of Embedded Items: 1. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. 03100-S CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 END OF SECTION 03100 - S 03200 REINFORCING STEEL Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03200 – REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all concrete reinforcement as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork B. Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI 315) - Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures B. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Standard Practice 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. B. Submit mill test certificates of supplied reinforcement indicating physical and chemical analysis. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel Bars: Domestic deformed type, ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Galvanized Reinforcing Steel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. Wood, brick, and other devices will not be acceptable. 03200 REINFORCING STEEL Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the specified codes and standards, approved shop drawings and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, grease and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately form bar reinforcement to dimensions indicated. Bend stirrup and tie bars around a pin of diameter not less than two times bar diameter. Bend other bars around a pin of diameter not less than six times bar diameter. Bend bars cold. Do not straighten or rebend in a manner that will injure material. After fabrication bundle and tag with identifying metal tags securely wired in place. D. Accurately position and secure metal reinforcement against displacement with annealed iron wire ties, suitable clips at intersections, metal supports, chairs, and hangers. E. Avoid splices of bar reinforcement at points of maximum stress. All splices shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 12, ACI 318-83, but shall in no case be less than 36 bar diameters unless otherwise noted on plans. Stagger splices of adjacent bars and provide corner bars corresponding in size and number to adjacent bars. END OF SECTION 03200-A CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03200-A - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install reinforcing steel and required supports for cast-in-place concrete; include: 1. Reinforcing steel bars or fabricated steel bar for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports, and spacers for supporting reinforcement. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. D. CRSI - Manual of Practice. E. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. F. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Indicate sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, stirrup spacing, supporting, and spacing devices. B. Furnish one complete set of final shop drawings to the testing laboratory for its use in reinforcing placement inspection. C. Manufacturers Literature: Submit for review, manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the proprietary splicing method used, to show compliance with these specifications. D. Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and chemical analysis. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, and Documents 63 and 65. B. Conform to ACI 301 or 315. 03200-A CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.5 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide reinforcement for field sample specified in Sections 03100 and 03300. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver reinforcement in bundles properly tagged showing quantity, grade, and suitable identification marks to allow checking, sorting, and placing. B. Storage: Store reinforcement off ground; cover; keep clean. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 or 60 ksi yield grade billet-steel deformed bars, uncoated finish. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 18 gage annealed type or Acceptable patented system. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Standard CRSI, galvanized; sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. 1. In exposed concrete (including painted) use plastic supports, hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet, or stainless steel. 2. Do not use standard supports in contract with form surfaces for concrete that is to be sandblasted, tooled, or retarded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Reinforcing is to be installed only from Placement Drawings which have been reviewed by A/E. B. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings. C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section 03300. D. Tolerances: 1. Maintain surface clearance dimensions shown, plus or minus 1/4 inch. 2. Secure reinforcing with accessories and tie wire to prevent displacement before and during concreting. 3. Concrete will not be poured if bars are not properly and securely placed with adequate supports. E. Dowels: Secure in position prior to pouring concrete. 03200-A CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 F. Interferences: Give notice whenever pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other construction interferes with placement; obtain method of procedure to resolve interference. 03200-A CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.2 SPLICES A. Lap splice all bars up to 11 in accordance with standard detailing practice unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Butt splice all 14 and 18 bars. 3.3 REPAIR A. Remove and replace damaged bars if practicable. B. Partially embedded bars that become damaged are to be restored to full capacity as follows: 1. Bent Bars - Straighten by cold bending or with minimum heat (short of a red glow). 2. Cracked or Broken Bars - Weld in new material equivalent to 100% of base bar in accordance with AWS recommendations. END OF SECTION 03200-S CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03200-S CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to fabricate and place reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete, including bars, welded wire fabric, ties and bar supports. B. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400 2. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 3. ASTM A615, Specification for Deformed Billet Steel Bars for Concrete. 4. ASTM A185, Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Manual of Standard Practice. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Fabricating: a. Sheared length: Plus or minus 1" b. Stirrups and ties: Plus or minus 1/2". c. Members more than 8" but not over 2'-0" deep: Plus or minus 1/2". d. Members more than 2'-0" deep: Plus or minus 1". e. Crosswise of members: Space evenly within 2" of stated separation. f. Lengthwise of members: Plus or minus 2". 2. Maximum bar relocation to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or other embedded item: 1 bar diameter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 03200-S CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Shop Drawings: Include complete bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and laps, and rods, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing and accessories. 1. Show diagrammatic elevations of walls at scale large enough to clearly show position and erection marks of marginal bars, around openings, dowels, splices, etc., for these bars. 2. Show complete layout plan for each layer of reinforcing of structural slabs and beams showing number, arrangement, spacing, location, marking, orientation, etc., of reinforcement required for layer being described. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size, length and mark. B. Unload reinforcing carefully to prevent damage. Store above ground in dry, well drained area; protect from mud, dirt and corrosion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, deformed billet steel bars, domestic manufacture, Grades 40 and/or 60 as indicated on structural drawings. B. Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcing: ASTM A185, domestic manufacture, steel wire spot welded at intersections and of size indicated. C. Metal Accessories: Include spacers, chairs, bolsters, ties and other devices necessary for properly placing, spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place, conforming to requirements to CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Metal accessories shall be galvanized where legs will be exposed in finished concrete surfaces. D. Tie Wire: FS QQ-W-461, black enameled steel, 16 ga. min. 2.2 FABRICATION A. In accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Before placing in work, thoroughly clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, dirt, oil and other coating which might tend to reduce bonding. 03200-S CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Reinspect reinforcing left protruding for future bonding, or following delay in work, and reclean if necessary. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Bar Placement: In accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318 and CRSI "Manual for Standard Practice". 1. Bending: Bend bars cold; do not heat reinforcing or bend by makeshift methods. Discard bent, kinked or otherwise damaged bars. 2. Splices: In accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Wire Fabric Placement: 1. Install in longest practicable length. 2. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. 3. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous lap. 4. Keep wire in proper position during concrete placement. 5. All wire fabric shall be delivered in flat sheets, not rolled. END OF SECTION 03200 - S 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03300-A - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for structural building frame, slabs on fill or grade, and other concrete components associated with the building; include: 1. Floors and slabs on fill on vapor retarder and elevated structural slabs on metal deck. 2. Floor toppings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. C. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. D. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. E. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. F. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. G. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. H. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. I. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Structural Bituminous Types). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit for review, manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each item of proprietary material used, showing compliance with these specifications. B. Design Mixes: Submit for review, design with support material and mix design of the test results and manufacturer's data. C. Placing Schedule: Submit concrete placement plans and schedule; include location and details of construction joints and waterstops. D. Certification: Certification that tensile splitting strength meets or exceeds specified requirements for reinforced concrete. E. Refer to Sections 03100 and 03200 for additional submittal requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Quality assurance for all cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 03, Concrete Testing and Inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MIX DESIGN A. Employ technical agency familiar with local construction conditions and materials to design concrete mixes. The technical agency shall be other than that retained by the Owner for quality control testing. B. Prior to the formulation of design mixes, the Contractor shall review with the technical agency responsible for their preparation, requirements relative to slump, seasonal variation of admixtures and anticipated job use conditions. C. Separate design mixes are required for each anticipated and/or actual change in type of mix materials including admixtures, change in proportion of basic materials, change in slump limits and change in pumped concrete requirements. D. Mix designs are to be formulated with ample lead time (6 weeks) to allow testing and verification of the design as hereinafter specified so that mixes can be reviewed by A/E prior to job use. E. Mix designs reviewed by A/E are to be in file in the Contractor's field office prior to pouring concrete. F. Requirements of Mix Designer: 1. List design mixes required, stating where each applies. 2. Design the concrete mixes subject to the controls specified under Paragraph 2.6, Proportioning, including adjustments for seasonality. 3. Verify the adequacy of the design mix for compressive strength in accordance with ACI 301, Method 1 or Method 2 as hereinafter modified: a) Method 1: Compression test cylinders shall be made and tested in accordance with appropriate ASTM procedures to substantiate an average compressive strength as specified in Paragraph 2.6, Proportioning. b) Method 2: Appropriate field test data for concrete made with the same ingredients may be used. Thirty (30) or more consecutive strength test results of mixes with the same materials and proportions used in similar construction and climatic conditions within the past year shall be used to indicated performance in strength shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.6, Proportioning. 4. Adjust mix designs that prove unsatisfactory in use, subject to A/E's review. Concrete that does not consistently exhibit the specified control characteristics will be considered unsatisfactory. G. Submit for A/E's Review 1. List of mixes. 2. Mix proportions. 3. Proposed adjustments for seasonality. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 3 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 4. Test results and/or mill certificates showing that the mix proportions and materials comply with the performance characteristics specified. 5. Manufacturer's data, or independent test results if required by A/E, showing that the lightweight concrete complies with the specification regarding shrinkage, split cylinder strength, and modulus of elasticity. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150; modified as follows: 1. Alkali content; maximum 0.6 percent or certify that no alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed cement-aggregate combinations (ASTM C227). 2. Type I unless noted. 3. Type II where noted. 4. Type III at Contractor's option to Type I - subject to A/E's review. B. Aggregate: ASTM C33 (modified grading) for normal weight concrete and ASTM C 330 for structural lightweight concrete. Native stone. Artificial or natural sand. For concrete strengths greater than or equal to 5,000 psi use sharp angular crushed stone. C. Mixing Water: Drinkable, tasteless, and odorless. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining: ASTM C260. B. Water Reducing (Plasticizing): ASTM C494 Type A. C. Water Reducing (Retarding): ASTM C494 Type D. D. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or G. E. Water Reducing (Accelerating): ASTM C494 Type E. F. Calcium Chloride: Strictly prohibited. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder: 10-mil thick clear polyethylene film. Type recommended for below grade application. B. Grout 1. Bearing Plates: Non-shrink per CRD C588, non-metallic for exposed grout, "Masterflow 713" (Master builders), "Euco N.S." (The Euclid Chemical Co.), "Five Star Grout" (U.S. Grout Corp.) or "Sono Grout" (Sonneborn-Contech.) 2. Structural Repair: As specified. 3. Drypack: Zero slump, cement-sand mix, proportion determined by trial to produce 7000 psi at 28 days. C. Joint Filler: Bitumine impregnated fiber type, 1/2-inch thick; ASTM D1751. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 4 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.5 PROPORTIONING A. Proportion the materials to produce job-use concrete of the type and strength indicated, subject to the following controls. B. Strength and Durability: 1. Structural Concrete: a) Water reducing (plasticizer) admixture required. b) Trial Mix: Average compressive strength shall be determined by ACI 301, Method 1 with a minimum of 1200 psi greater than the specified f'c or by Method 2 where the average strength exceeds the specified strength f'c by at least: 1) 400 psi if standard deviation is less than 300 psi. 2) 550 psi if standard deviation is less than 300 psi to 400 psi. 3) 770 psi if standard deviation is less than 400 psi to 500 psi. 4) 900 psi if standard deviation is less than 500 psi to 600 psi. 5) 1,200 psi if standard deviation is greater than 600 psi. c) Minimum Cement Content 1) 3,000 psi Concrete - 5 bags/cubic yard. 2) 4,000 psi Concrete - 6 bags/cubic yard. d) For pumped concrete, increase minimum cement content as required to maintain equivalent water/cement ratios to those required for all strengths of non-pumped concrete. 2. Exterior Exposed Concrete: a) Air entrainment and water reducing admixtures as required. b) Minimum cement - 6 bag/cubic yard. c) Maximum water - 5 1/2 gallon bag. C. Aggregates 1. ASTM C33. 2. Maximum Size 467 for general use. a) Size 57 for columns, beams, and slabs. b) Size 7 or Size 67 for tight pours. c) Minimum 15 percent passing No. 50 sieve. d) Minimum 3 percent passing No. 10 sieve. e) Fineness Modulus, Sand: Minimum 2.5, maximum 3. D. Consistency: Plastic and workable with cohesiveness sufficient to prevent segregation with maximum slump as hereinafter specified. E. Admixtures: 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 5 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1. Water Reducing (Plasticizing): Follow the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Air entraining: Limit air content as follows: a) Exposed normal weight concrete - minimum 5 percent, maximum 7 percent. b) Lightweight concrete - minimum 4 percent, maximum 6 percent. 3. Accelerators: Only as accepted by A/E. 4. Retarders: Only as accepted by A/E. 5. Splitting Tensile Strength (fct): Minimum as follows for given strength (f'c): a) 3,000 psi, fct = 370 psi. b) 4,000 psi, fct = 425 psi. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum E = 2,400,000 psi (secant modulus at 0.3 f'c). 7. Drying Shrinkage: Maximum .06 percent at age 1 year or .035 percent at 28 days ASTM. 8. Shrinkage Compensated Cement: May be used to control drying shrinkage acceptable to A/E. 9. Natural Sand: (ASTM C33) is to be substituted for lightweight fines. F. Shrinkage Compensated Concrete: In accordance with cement product recommendations to produce the following characteristics: 1. Drying Shrinkage: Maximum 0.005 percent at 100 days. 2. Expansion: Maximum 0.1 percent at 7 days. 3. Water reducing retarding admixtures required. G. Pumped Concrete: 1. Aggregates: a) Maximum Size: One-third the maximum opening in either the pump or the pipeline, whichever is smaller. b) Grading: As close as possible to the middle of the ASTM C33 or C330 grading range. c) Fine Aggregate Fineness Modulus (FM): 2.40 to 3.00 with 15 to 20 percent passing the No. 50 sieve and 5 to 10 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. d) Daily Variation in FM: 0.20 from the value used in selecting proportions. 2. Admixtures a) Air Content: Minimum 3 percent, maximum 5 percent. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 6 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 b) Pumping Aids: As required to produce a pumpable mix with sufficient strength. c) Accelerators: Not to be used with pumped concrete. 2.6 MIXING CONCRETE A. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete by a mechanical batch type mixing plant with adequate facilities for accurate measurement and control of each material entering mixer and for changing proportions to conform to varying conditions of work. Provide for adequate inspection at all times. Obtain approval for plant and its location. 1. Batching Unit: Provide with the following: a) Weighing Unit: For each type material to show scale load at convenient stages of weighing operation. When directed, check weighing units in A/E's presence; when required, adjust before further use. b) Water Mechanism: Tight, with valves interlocked so that discharge valves cannot be opened before filling valve is fully closed; fit with graduated gauge. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 7 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Mixing Unit a) Mixing Speed: Do not charge mixers over rated capacity or operate above rated speed. Excessive mixing, requiring addition of water to preserve required consistency is not permitted. Discharge entire batch before recharging. b) Mixing Time: Measure from instant water is introduced into drum containing solids. Introduce all mixing water before one-fourth of mixing time has elapsed; mixing time 1 1/2 minutes or until mass is uniform and homogeneous. Capacity of mixer to be such that it will handle one or more full sack batches. B. Ready Mixed Concrete: ASTM C94 Alternative No. 1 for controlled mixes. C. Concrete will be considered unacceptable if it undergoes initial set or if not deposited within 90 minutes of the time the water is introduced. D. Adding water to unworkable concrete at delivery end is not permitted unless: 1. A/E accepts procedure, observes additions of water and the resulting water/cement ratio does not exceed the mix design proportions. 2. Workability without exceeding maximum slump may be attained with the site-addition of a high-range water-reducing admixture. E. Admixtures introduced at the site are to be added separately, in solution form, and with additional mixing time at the rate of 30 seconds/cubic yard or a minimum of 1 1/2 minutes. F. Slump 1. 4 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch for normal weight at point of deposit. 2. 4 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch for normal weight pumped concrete at the point of deposit, 5 inch maximum at the pump. 3. Maximum slump for concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture shall be 8 inches after addition to concrete with 2 to 4 inch slump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels, and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 8 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on fill. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal. Do not disturb or damage vapor retarder while placing concrete. Repair damaged vapor retarder. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify A/E minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. C. Wet all exposed subgrade, masonry filler units, precast concrete, previously poured concrete, and uncoated wood forms immediately prior to pouring (except during freezing temperatures). D. Do not pour concrete in freestanding water, over ice, or on frozen sub-grade. E. 24 hours time must elapse between adjacent slab and wall pours. Columns and walls must reach an initial set (minimum 3 hour curing) before framing supported thereon is poured. F. Deposit concrete within 5 feet of its final position in uniform layers not exceeding 18 inches deep with no more than 30 minutes time lapse between layers. G. Free fall, except in walls and columns, not to exceed 5 feet. Free fall in walls and columns not to exceed 5 feet unless with the addition of a high-range water- reducing admixture. Free fall in walls and columns not to exceed 15 feet. H. Guide the flow of concrete in walls and columns for vertical drop between the reinforcing. I. Consolidate the concrete to maximum density using internal vibration (use external vibration only as a supplement). Work the concrete around and under reinforcing and into corners. J. Mechanical Vibrators: Minimum frequency - 7,000 rpm. Insert and withdraw vertically drawing out entrapped air and excess water. K. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete pavement. L. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: Item Coverage (inches Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3 Slabs on Fill 2 M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. N. Place floor slabs on fill in lanes indicated on Drawings. O. Construction Joints: Locate construction joints as detailed or to limit the size of pour units as follows: Slabs-On-Ground: Maximum 15 feet. P. Saw cut control joints at an optimum time after finishing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cutting one-fourth into depth of slab thickness. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 9 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Q. Separate exterior slabs on fill from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/8 inch of finished slab surface. R. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify A/E upon discovery. 3.4 FINISHING A. Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed with sack rubbed finish. B. Finish concrete surfaces to be stained smooth. C. Provide Class A tolerances to floor slabs according to ACI 301. D. Finish floors to light broom finish. E. Pitch to drains 1/4 inch per foot nominal. 3.5 PATCHING A. Notify A/E immediately upon removal of forms. B. Patch imperfections with an approved repair concrete. 3.6 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Concrete that does not satisfy the performance requirements of this specification is to be removed and replaced if repair cannot be accomplished to A/E's satisfaction. B. Structural Repair: The long term strength, elasticity, and continuity characteristics of the entire structural element and/or frame must be accounted for if repair is attempted. 1. Use expansive cements, and epoxy type bonding agents to produce repair materials with strength, elasticity, and durability characteristics compatible with the parent material being repaired. 2. Submit a procedural outline of proposed repair work including a description of materials, preparations, shoring, and protection for A/E's review. 3. A/E will review repair procedures before they are attempted. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. On areas indicated to receive stain finish, protect with ¼” masonite boards over burlap pads. Ensure that protection materials will not adversely affect the curing 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 10 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 of the concrete. Maintain protection throughout construction until application of stain materials. After stain is applied and cured, replace protection boards as required for the remainder of construction. 3.9 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION A. ACI 306; the methods of protection used for cold weather concreting are to be reviewed with A/E. Sufficient protection material is to be on the job site in advance of the time when mean daily temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F. Provide strong and secure weather protection around the building for at least one story above and one story below the floor being concreted to prevent infiltration of wind. Submit to A/E for review details and materials of the temperatures in the range between 50 degrees F and: 1. Heated Concrete Temperature: a) Maximum 100 degrees F in mixer. b) Maximum 90 degrees F leaving mixer. 2. Accelerators: a) Review with A/E. b) Calcium Chloride: Shall not be used. 3. Concrete made with hydrothermally or vacuum-saturated lightweight aggregate shall be allowed to air dry for two weeks after the initial curing period. During the initial curing period, as well as the drying period, the concrete temperature shall be maintained above 50 degrees F. 3.10 HOT WEATHER PROTECTION A. ACI 305; when air temperature or form temperature exceeds 100 degrees F control concreting as follows: 1. Cool concrete to a maximum 70 degrees F leaving the mixer. 2. 50 lbs. ice = 6 gallons mixing water (maximum per cubic yard). 3. Adjust concrete mix to retard set with retarding admixture or Type II cement. 3.11 CURING A. Retain moisture and maintain reasonably constant temperature in freshly poured concrete for the duration of the curing period. B. Curing Period Duration: Starting at time of deposit: Concrete with Type I Cement, five days. C. Concrete Surface Curing Temperature 1. Minimum 50 degrees F, maximum 90 degrees F. 2. Rate of Change: Maximum plus or minus 5 degrees F per hour. D. Moisture Retention: By any of the following, except as otherwise specified. 1. Moist Cure: Roll-out waterproof covering (equivalent to ASTM C171) or use burlap, frequently wetted (except during freezing temperatures). 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 11 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Chemical Curing Agents: Curing compound conforming to FS IT-C-800A, 30 percent solids minimum and/or ASTM C309. 3.12 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Sampling: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete, and additional tests if concrete consistency changes. 2. Air content: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete. One test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 3. Air content: One test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 4. Concrete temperature: a) Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. b) Test each time a set of compression test specimens are made. 5. Compression test specimen: ASTM C 31. One set of four standard cylinders for each compressive strength test. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. One set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cubic yards. 1. Test one additional set of cylinders for each 75 cubic yards over and above the first 25 cubic yards of each class of concrete placed in any one day. 2. Test one specimen at 7 days, two at 28 days, and retain one from each set for later testing, if required. 3. When frequency of testing would otherwise provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. 4. When strength of field-cured specimens is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result fails below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. Test Results: Laboratory shall report test results in writing to A/E and contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Compressive strength test reports shall contain the minimum following data: a) Project identification name and number. b) Name of concrete testing service. 03300-A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 12 of 12 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 c) Date of concrete placement. d) Concrete type and class. e) Location of concrete batch in structure. f) Design compressive strength at 28 days. g) Concrete mix proportions and materials. h) Compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-days tests and 28-day tests. 2. Nondestructive testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 3. Additional tests: The testing service shall make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by A/E. a) Testing service may conduct tests of cored cylinders, complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. b) Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. END OF SECTION 03300-S CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03300-S – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to provide cast-in-place concrete consisting of portland cement, fine and coarse aggregate, water and selected admixtures; combined, mixed, transported, placed, finished and cured as herein specified. B. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400 2. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ASTM C33, Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate. 3. ASTM C94, Standard Specifications for Ready-Mix Concrete. 4. ASTM C150, Standard Specifications for Portland Cement. 5. ASTM C260, Standard Specifications for Air-Entraining. Admixtures for Concrete. 6. ASTM C494, Standard Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. B. Concrete Mix Design: Contractor shall employ and pay cost of a recognized independent Testing Laboratory to perform the following services: 1. Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 301. 2. For each concrete mix type proposed, make trial mix using aggregate proposed. 3. Determination of required average strength above specified strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301. 4. Make advance tests of trial mixes with proposed materials. Mold and cure in accordance with ASTM C31; test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C-39. Do not place concrete on project until laboratory reports and breaks of confirmation cylinders indicate that proposed mixes will develop required strengths. 5. Submit proposed mix designs to Architect for review min. 14 days prior to placing concrete. Show: a. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and water. b. Combined aggregate gradation. 03300-S CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 c. Aggregate specific gravities and gradations. d. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump and air content. e. Type of cement and aggregates. f. Type of dosage of admixtures. g. Type, color and dosage of integral coloring compounds, where applicable. h. Special requirements for pumping. i. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. j. Any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product. 6. Mix designs based on record of past performance in accordance with ACI 301, method 2, may be submitted in lieu of mix designs required above, provided all necessary information is included. 7. Check mix designs and revise if necessary wherever changes are made in aggregates or in surface water content of aggregate or workability of concrete. Slump shall be minimum to produce workable mix. Laboratory shall prescribe maximum quantity of water. C. Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's pouring or each fifty (50) cu. yards, whichever comes first, on each different portion or section of the work. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31, and test in accordance with ASTM C39. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory. Footings, walls, and floor systems constitute different sections. Each test shall consist of five (5) specimens: two (2) to be tested at twenty-eight (28) days, two (2) to be tested at seven days, and one held in reserve. Determine temperature and air content for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C231. D. Field Quality Control: 1. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C143. 2. Monitor addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck. 3. Certify delivery tickets indicating class of concrete, amount of water added during initial batching, and time initial batching occurred. 4. Monitor work being performed in accordance with ACI (American Concrete Institute) recommendations as a standard of quality. E. Source Quality Control: Periodically inspect and control concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at intervals as agreed to by Architect and laboratory personnel. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready-mixed in accordance with ASTM C94. Mix concrete min. 70 revolutions of transit mix drum at mixing speed. Min. 40 revolutions shall be at production plant. 03300-S CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 3 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Schedule delivery so that continuity of any pour will not be interrupted for over 15 minutes. C. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Requirements: 1. Hot Weather Concreting: a. Follow ACI 301. b. Provide retarding type admixture conforming to ASTM C494-Type A or D in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Cold Weather Concreting: a. Follow ACI 301. b. When ambient temperature at site is below 40 degrees F, or is expected to fall to that temperature within ensuing 24 hours, heat water and/or aggregates prior to adding to mix so that temperature of concrete will be between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F at time of placement. c. Maintain temperature of deposited concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for min. 7 days after placing. 3. Temperature Changes: Maintain changes in concrete temperature as uniform as possible, but in no case exceed change of 5 degrees per hour or 25 degrees in any 25 hour period. 4. Admixture intended to accelerate hardening of concrete or produce higher than normal strength at early periods will not be permitted unless specified or prior approval is obtained from Architect. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Concrete Mix Design. B. Delivery Tickets: Furnish duplicate delivery tickets for each load of ready-mix concrete delivered to site, in accordance with ASTM C94. Show batch weights on each ticket. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I. Type III may be used for cold weather concreting when approved by Architect. B. Aggregate: 1. Fine: ASTM C-33, clean hard, durable, uncoated, natural non-staining sand free from silt, loam or clay. 2. Coarse: ASTM C-33, hard, durable, uncoated, crushed stone, gradation in accordance with size No.57, unless otherwise approved in mix design. Max. aggregate size in accordance with ACI 318. 03300-S CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 4 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Water: Clean and free from oil, acid and injurious amounts of vegetable matter, alkalies and other impurities. D. Admixtures: 1. Water-reducing or water-reducing/set-retarding; ASTM C494. 2. Air entraining agent: ASTM C260. E. Curing Materials: 1. Waterproof Paper: FS UU-P-265a. 2. Polyethylene Sheeting: Minimum 0.004" thick, free from defects, uniform in appearance, white. 3. Curing Compounds: L&M "CURE" by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or approved equal, for interior concrete slab surfaces. Curing compound must be compatible with floor hardener and sealer. F. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1752, Type 1, non-asphaltic. G. Non-shrinking Cement Grout: U.S. GrouT Corp. "Five Star Grout" or equal. H. Non-Slip Stair Nosing: Equal to Wooster No. 101 "Alumograt" of required length. 2.2 MIXES A. Strength: Concrete is classified and specified by ultimate compressive strength (f'c) at age 28 days. B. Proportions: Proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to attain required plasticity and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Do not make changes in proportions without Architect's approval. C. Design concrete to yield the following characteristics: Min.28 day Min. Max. Slump Compressive Cement Cement Dry Limits Type Strength Type Content Density Min. Max. I 3000 psi Portland 5* NA 3" 5" II 4000 psi Portland. 6* NA 3" 5" * bags per cu. yd. D. Concrete Uses: Refer to structural drawings for type usage. E. Concrete permanently exposed to weather: Contain air-entraining admixture to produce 5% +/- 1% air by volume of concrete. F. Maximum Fly Ash content shall not exceed 20% by weight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 03300-S CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 5 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.1 PREPARATION A. Notify Architect and Testing Laboratory at least 24 hours prior to when each concrete operation is to begin. B. Allow various trades ample time to install anchor bolts, sleeves, conduit and inserts necessary for proper execution of their work. Accurately position in form. Do not cut reinforcing steel to facilitate installation of inserts or accessories. C. If power screeds are to be used, recess sleeves and cap in manner to prevent water and cement from entering, but so that they may be located after finishing. Otherwise, extend sleeves 1" above finish floor. D. Remove impounded water from forms and excavations before concrete is deposited. Close temporary drains by grouting or by other satisfactory means. Close openings left in forms for cleaning and inspection, after forms have been cleaned out, inspected and approved. E. Remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete before concrete is deposited. Before beginning placement, remove hardened concrete and foreign substances from inner surface of mixing and conveying equipment. F. Provide runways, pumps, conveyors, etc. to convey concrete to point of deposit in order not to disturb forms or reinforcement or segregate concrete. Do not allow conveying equipment directly over reinforcement. G. Do not allow concrete to free-fall over 5'-0"; provide tremies, chutes or other approved means of conveyance when drop exceeds this amount. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Placing: Place concrete in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and as modified herein. Direct concrete rapidly from mixer to forms and deposit as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. Do not place partially hardened, contaminated or re-tempered concrete. B. Consolidation: Place concrete with aid of mechanical vibrating equipment unless otherwise approved by Architect. Apply vibration at point of deposit and in area of freshly placed concrete. Vibrate enough to accomplish thorough compaction and complete embedment or reinforcement and fixtures. Supplement vibration by hand-spading in corners and angles of forms to prevent honey-combing. C. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on concrete that has set, roughen and clean surface of set concrete of laitance, foreign matter and loose particles. Wet surface of set concrete just prior to placing new concrete D. Protection and Curing: 1. Protect concrete from frost damage and moisture loss. 2. Provide artificial heat to maintain temperature of concrete above minimum required herein for duration of curing period. 03300-S CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 6 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. Keep forms sufficiently wet to prevent cracking of concrete or loosening of form joints. 4. Cure surfaces of exposed concrete by means of curing compound or sheeting method, as applicable. E. Patching Formed Surfaces of Exposed Concrete: 1. After forms have been removed, inspect concrete surfaces and patch pour joints, voids, stone pockets, other defective areas and tie holes before concrete is thoroughly dry. Chip away defective areas to depth of not less than 1" with edges perpendicular to surface. Wet areas to be patched and spaced at least 6" wide entirely surrounding it, to prevent absorption of water from patching mortar. Do not patch concrete in freezing weather. 2. Apply chemical bonding agent to surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, followed immediately by patching mortar. Make patch of same proportions as used for concrete except omit coarse aggregate. Add only enough water consistent with requirements for handling and placing. 3. Thoroughly compact mortar into place and screed off; leave patch slightly higher than surrounding surface. Leave undisturbed for one to two hours to permit initial shrinkage before final finishing. Finish patch to match texture and color of adjoining surface. Completely fill tie holes left by withdrawal of rods and holes left by removal of end of ties. For holes passing entirely through wall, force mortar through with plunger type grease gun. Cure all patches. F. Finishing Formed Surfaces: 1. As - Formed Finish. a. Provide at surfaces not exposed to view in completed work. b. Remove fins by stoning, otherwise leave texture imparted by forms. 2. Rubbed Finish: a. Provide at exterior vertical surfaces exposed to view in completed work. b. After removal of forms, patching and repairing, and while concrete is still green, spread slurry consisting of 1 part portland cement and 1-1/1 part damp, loose sand by volume, over pre-dampened surface. Apply using burlap pads or sponge rubber floats. Remove surplus materials, then rub with clean burlap. Water for completed surfaces for 7 days min. G. Flatwork: 1. Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips accurately to produce designed elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Align concrete surface to contours of screed strips using strike- off templates or compacting type screeds. When formwork is cambered, set screeds to like camber to maintain proper concrete thickness. 2. Floated Finish: Provide at slab surfaces to precede other finishes. Begin floating after concrete has been struck off, consolidated and leveled, 03300-S CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 7 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 surface water has disappeared and surface is sufficiently hardened to support power driven float. Finish surface with impact type power driven float or hand float. Test surface with 10'-0" straightedge placed at min. 2 different angles; correct irregularities exceeding 1/4". Refloat repaired areas. END OF SECTION 03300 - S 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03310 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and Placing Cast-in-place concrete including finishing and curing. B. Furnishing concrete for drilled piers. C. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including preformed joint filler. D. Grouting anchor bolts and under base plates. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03100- Concrete Formwork 1.3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 33 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) (ASTM D 994). B. ACI 214 - Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. C. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. D. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. E. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. G. ACI 311 - Guide for Concrete Inspection. H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. I. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates. J. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. K. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. L. ASTM C 260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. M. ASTM C 494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 N. ASTM D 1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures, and floor hardener/sealer, waterstop, curing compounds, grout. B. Samples: Submit two, 4-inch long samples of expansion/contraction joint and construction joint material (joint filler). C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. D. Concrete Mix Design: 1. Submit two copies of laboratory mix design proposed in accordance with ACI 301, Method 1, or one copy of each of 30 consecutive test results and mix designs used from record of past performance in accordance with ACI 301, Method 2 to the engineer and the testing laboratory. a. Determine or certify proportions of ingredients for mix by independent testing laboratory in accordance with Chapter 4, ACI 318 to provide characteristics listed on Drawings for each class of concrete. b. Determine required average strength for above specified strength in accordance with ACI 318; evaluate compressive strength results of field concrete in accordance with ACI 214. c. Include following information in concrete mix design: (1) Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, and water. (2) Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump and air content. (3) Type of cement and sieve analysis of coarse and fine aggregates. (4) Type and dosage of admixtures. (5) Special requirements for pumping (6) Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. (7) Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product, specified. 2. Batch Delivery Tickets: Submit sample tickets indicating information to be supplied. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 3 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. D. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. E. Conform to ACI 306 when concreting during cold weather. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal or Type III - High Early Strength from single source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, maximum size as indicated in the Concrete Notes shown on the drawings. 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260. B. Water Reducing: ASTM C 494 Type A. C. Use set-controlling admixtures only when accepted by the A/E. Set controlling admixture, Type C - accelerating, Type D - water reducing and retarding, Type E - water reducing and accelerating admixture as reviewed by the independent testing laboratory and the A/E. D. Super Plasticizing: Use PSI Super super plasticizer (high-range water-reducer) as manufactured by Gifford-Hill and Company, Inc., conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 494, Type F/G in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 4 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E. The manufacturer is acceptable contingent upon the products’ compliance with the specification. F. Calcium chloride is prohibited. Do not use admixture containing more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. Submit written certification of maximum chloride ion content with mix design. G. Water: Use City water. H. Fly Ash, Slag, and Pozzolans: Prohibited. Obtain Architect/Engineer Representative’s approval to use other admixtures. I. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. B. Vapor Barrier: 1. Ten mils thick polyethylene sheeting, clear color, resistant to decay in accordance with ASTM E154. 2. Vapor Barrier Joint Tape: 3M, No. 890 glass filament acetate tape. 2.4 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Non-shrink grout for grouting under base plates. 1. Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi. 2.5 EPOXY GROUT A. Epoxy grout for grouting anchor bolts. 1. Three components consisting of 100 percent solids epoxy resins, special hardeners and specially graded aggregates. 2. Product: Sure-grip Epoxy Grout (J-54), Dayton Superior Corp, Oregon, IL, (800)745-3700. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 5 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.6 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint (Sealant) Filler; Re: Joints and sealants in Division 7. B. Preformed Joint Filler: 1/2-inch, performed joint filler, ASTM D1751, asphalt impregnated fiberboard nonextruding type or 1/2-inch thick, preformed neoprene, ASTM D1752, Type I. Ensure compatibility with joint filler/sealant. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Form Coating: For all exposed concrete, use non-staining form coating as manufactured by: 1. “Non-Crete,” The Non-Crete Company, Omaha, Nebraska. 2. “Formcel,” Lambert Corporation, Houston, Texas. B. Curing Materials: 1. Use resin base liquid concrete curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, with fugitive dye to provide uniformity of color, application and providing 95 percent or more retention of the mixing water for seven days or more. Compound shall be compatible with any materials (paint, resilient flooring, etc.) which will be applied to the concrete surfaces. Do not cure with this compound any surfaces intended to receive clear hardener or penetrating sealer. 2. Dissipating curing compound shall be liquid membrane-forming compound, complying with ASTM C 309, which provides an initial cure for concrete, then begins to chemically break down and wear off the surface within two to four weeks. Use “Kurez DR,” as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal. Use of this product shall be limited to floors receiving penetrating sealer or cementitious topping. 3. Curing and sealing compound shall be an acrylic sealer equal to “Sealtight CS-309" as manufactured by W. R. Meadows, Incorporated, or “Sealco 309" as manufactured by the Gifford Hill Company. Use of this product shall be limited exclusively to permanently exposed concrete surfaces not specified to receive a penetrating sealer or liquid hardener. Comply with ASTM C 309. C. Finishing Materials: 1. Floor hardener shall be a penetrating liquid, for subsequent (not integral) application and shall be “Lapidolith,” as manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products, or Ashford Formula or approved equal. See schedule for location of floor hardener. No combination curing and hardener material will be considered in lieu of hardener material specified. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 6 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Cement floor leveling compound for interior applications shall be SikaSet Underlayment, by Sika Corporation, or approved equal. Cement floor leveling compound for exterior applications shall be SikaTop 122, by Sika Corporation, or approved equal. 3. Retarder shall be “E.A.C. Super Tuf-coat 66,” as manufactured by Preco Chemical Corporation. Color shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.8 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94. B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Owner. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. C. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Owner. D. Add 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior. E. Use silica fume for submerged concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform with ACI 304 and the following. B. Convey concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practical and by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. C. Deposit as nearly as practical in its final position. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 7 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D. Provide chutes so that the concrete slides in the chute and does not flow. E. Where a vertical drop greater than 5 feet is necessary, place concrete through tremies or similar devices to prevent segregation. F. Place concrete before the initial set has occurred, and in no event after it has contained its water content for more than 1-1/2 hours. G. Unless otherwise specified, place all concrete upon clean, damp surfaces, free from water, or upon property consolidated fills, but never upon soft mud, dry porous earth, or frozen ground. H. Compact the concrete and work it in an approved manner into all corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement in a manner to prevent segregation of the coarse aggregate. I. Construct forms for the lifts of vertical walls to make all parts of the walls easily accessible for the placement, spading and consolidation of the concrete as specified. J. Deposit concrete in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid re-handling and to maintain, until the completion of the unit, a plastic surface approximately horizontal. Under no circumstances shall concrete that is partially hardened be deposited in the work. Deposit concrete continuously and as rapidly a practical until the unit of operation is completed. K. Consolidate all concrete by vibration so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Conform with ACI 309 and the following. L. Mechanical vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 7,000 vibrations per minute and shall be operated by competent workmen. Over-vibrating and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert vibrators and withdraw at many points, from 18 inches to 30 inches apart for a 5 to 15 second duration. Permit the vibrators to sink as deep while running as their own weight will readily take them. M. Keep three spare emergency vibrators on the job site during all concrete placing operations. N. Furnish vibrators of the internal type; apply directly to the concrete and not through the forms, except in sections too thin to permit the insertion of the internal type, in which case form vibrators may be employed, with the approval of the A/E. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 8 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 O. Carry all top surfaces slightly above the forms and strike off by board finish when settlement has taken place, forcing out all excess water. P. After the concrete has taken its initial set, prevent impact or loads on forms or on the ends of projecting reinforcement. Q. Add concrete to compensate for the settlement produced by vibration, and to bring the surface to the elevation required. R. Bonding: In placing fresh concrete to set concrete, remove all loose and foreign materials from work already in place. Slush set concrete surface with bonding agent and scrub with wire brooms and leave moist when the new concrete is place in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Ensure complete bonding of the new concrete to the set concrete. S. Place and consolidate all concrete in vertical members in place not less than 4 hours before concrete in the horizontal or the vertical members resting thereon is placed. T. Make the operation of placing concrete continuous between vertical construction joints. Make the vertical construction joints at approximately the center of a panel or beam with vertical bulkheads to the full depth. Place the scheduled or detailed reinforcement continuously through the joints. 3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING A. General: 1. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 302 AND ACI 304. 2. Uniformly spread, screed, and float concrete. Do not use grate tampers or mesh rollers. Do not spread concrete by vibration. 3. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor level at walls and pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings. 4. Ensure floor surfaces are depressed sufficiently to accommodate finish materials. B. As-Cast Finished: 1. Rough Form Finish: a. Provide surfaces true to line and plane with no specific requirements for selected facing materials. b. Patch tie holes and defects and rub down fins exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) in height with wooden blocks. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 9 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 c. Otherwise, leave surfaces with the texture imparted by the forms. 2. Smooth Form Finish: a. Produce smooth, hard, uniform finish in the same manner as rough form finish. b. Remove all fins and patch all tie holes and defects. 3. Smooth Rubbed Finish: a. Complete all patching immediately after forms have been removed. Complete rubbing within one day after from removal. b. Wet surfaces and rub grout with Carborundum brick, cement from the rubbing process or similar abrasive until a uniform a texture and color is achieved. C. Slab Finishes 1. Scratched Finish: a. After the concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, roughen the surface with stiff brushes or rakes before final set. b. Ensure that finish is true to plane within 1/4 inch in 3 feet as determined by a 3 foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 2. Floated Finish: a. After the concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated, and leveled, do not work the concrete further until ready for floating. b. Floating is to begin when the water sheen has disappeared, and when the mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit the proper operation of a power-driven float. c. Then consolidate the surface with power-driven floats. d. Hand float with wood or corkfaced floats used in locations inaccessible to the power-driven machine. e. Recheck trueness of surface at this stage with a 10 foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. f. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots during the initial floating operation. g. Refloat the slab immediately to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. h. Ensure that finish is true to plane within 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 10 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. Troweled Finish: a. After the concrete has received a power float finish as specified above, finish the surface initially with power trowels, and finally with hand trowels. b. After power floating, provide a power trowel finish to produce a smooth surface free of defects other than minor trowel marks. c. Perform additional trowelings by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. d. Perform the final troweling when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. e. Consolidate the surface thoroughly by hand troweling operations. f. Make certain that the finished surface is free of any trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. g. On surfaces intended to receive floor coverings, remove by grinding any defects on sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering. h. Finish slabs maintaining surface flatness and levelness tolerance, overall value FF 30/FL 20, and minimum local value FF 25/FL 15. 4. Broom Finish: a. Perform floating as specified above. b. After excess water has been removed, provide a transverse scored texture produced by drawing a broom across the surface. D. Schedule of Finishes for Formed Surfaces 1. As Cast Rough Form Finish: All concrete surfaces not exposed to view. 2. As Cast Smooth Form Finish: All concrete surfaces not exposed to view after application of finish material. 3. Smooth Rubbed Finish: All interior and exterior concrete surfaces exposed to view. E. Schedule of Finishes for Slab Surfaces 1. Scratched Finish: Slabs and surfaces to receive bonded concrete toppings. 2. Floated Finish: Surface scheduled to receive roofing or waterproofing membranes and bonded cementitious setting beds. 3. Troweled Finish: Floor surfaces scheduled as exposed, or to receive floor covering. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 11 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 4. Broom Finish: Exterior horizontal surfaces. 5. Steel Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Floors to receive “thin-set” (“dry- set”) floor tile. 6. Liquid Hardener: Permanently exposed concrete floors. 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from moisture loss, premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury for at least 7 days. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 12 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Conform to ACI 308. C. Prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period. D. Accomplish curing by one of the following methods. 1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling. 2. Absorptive mats or fabrics (burlap) kept continuously wet. 3. Use curing compounds as specified. Do not use compounds on any surface which will receive additional concrete or where concrete hardeners or terrazzo floors are scheduled to be installed. Remove the compound film from all exposed surfaces at the end of the curing period. 4. Use non-staining waterproof paper or polyethylene sheeting as specified. Lap joints 12 inches and weight in place. 3.6 PLACING GROUT A. Place grout in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.7 PATCHING A. Allow Owner’s Representative to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Owner’s Representative upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections as directed and in accordance with ACI 301. 3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Owner’s Representative. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Owner’s Representative for each individual area. 3.9 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Perform the following inspections and tests: 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 13 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with ACI 301. 2. Review proposed mix design of each class of concrete to verify conformance with the contract documents. 3. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. 4. Sampling and Testing Concrete: Concrete used shall be sampled and tested by testing laboratory using techniques certified by ACI to determine acceptability as required by ACI 318 and to demonstrate conformance with specified properties as follows: a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172. b. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. c. Air Content: ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength specimens. d. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; test concrete hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below, and when 80 degrees F and above; and when each set of compression test specimens is made. e. Compressive Strength Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of three standard cylinders for each 75 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each concrete type placed on any one day, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens. f. Compressive Strength Test: ASTM C 39; one specimen tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one retained in reserve for later testing if required. When frequency of testing will provide less than five strength tests for given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 5. Evaluation and Acceptance a. If the measured slump, or air content of air entrained concrete falls outside the specified limits, a check test shall be made immediately on another portion of the same sample. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be considered to have failed to meet the requirements of the specifications, and shall not be used in concrete operations in the structure. b. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength test results are equal to, or exceed specified strength and no individual 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 14 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 test result (average of two cylinders) is below specified strength by more than 500 psi. c. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of the “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings” ACI 301, Chapter 18, have been met. 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 15 of 15 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 d. In any case where the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders, as shown by the tests for any portion of the structure, falls below the minimum ultimate compressive strength herein before specified, the Contractor shall provide improved curing conditions of temperature and moisture and/or purpose adjustments to the mix design to secure the required strength. Also, if the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders should follow the core test procedure set forth in ACI 301, Chapter 17 in locations approved by the Architect. At least three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 psi below indicate, in the opinion of the Architects, that the strength of the structure is inadequate, such replacement, load testing, or strengthening, as may be ordered by the Architect, shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 6. Concrete Test Reports: a. Quality Assurance: ACI 311. b. Complete and distribute report immediately after inspections and tests are complete. c. If the report indicates non-conformance with the contract documents, then a probable cause and a recommendation for corrective action shall be included. d. Comply with ACI 311, “Guide for Concrete Inspection.” e. If the testing laboratory observes a trend of decreasing quality of the concrete due to weather conditions or other cause, then the testing laboratory shall notify the A/E and provide a proactive corrective action recommendation before concrete falls below specified requirement. f. The testing laboratory shall control the addition of water to the concrete at the jobsite and the length of time the concrete is allowed to remain in the truck before placement. The inspector shall compare the mixture with the significant deviation to the A/E, Contractor and concrete supplier. Corresponding adjustments shall be made before the concrete is discharged, or the load shall be rejected and not placed. g. The testing laboratory shall certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or poured), amount of water added and the time at which the cement and aggregate was discharged into the truck, and the time at which the concrete was discharged from the truck. END OF SECTION 03366 INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE Page 1 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 03366 – INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. Section Includes: 1. Integral colored concrete. 2. Stamped / Imprinted concrete. 3. Sealers and coatings. C. Related Sections 1. Section 02750-A – Integrally Colored and Stamped Concrete (Architecture) 2. Section 02512 – Concrete Vehicular Paving 3. Section 02515 – Concrete Walks 4. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 5. Section 03100 – Concrete Formwork 6. Section 03200 – Reinforcing Steel 7. Section 07900-A – Joint Sealants 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 302 IR "Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction." 3. ACI 303.1 "Standard Specification for Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete." 4. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing of Concrete." 5. ACI 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting." 6. ACI 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting." B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C309 "Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete." 2. ASTM C494 "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." 3. ASTM C979 "Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete." C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. AASHTO M194 "Chemical Admixtures." 03366 INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE Page 2 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit specified manufacturer’s complete technical data sheets for all products to be used, including installation instructions. These data shall include, but are not limited to: 1. Colored admixture 2. Powder antiquing release agent 3. Imprinting / texturing tools, 4. Curing compound B. Color: Contractor to submit color charts showing a full range of available colors for approval of colors selected for mockups. C. Design Mixes: Contractor to submit mixes for each type of colored concrete. D. Qualification Data: For firms indicated in “Quality Assurance”, including list of completed projects. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain each specified material from the same source and maintain a high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout the Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of specified integral color, stamp, and sealer shall have a minimum 10 years experience in the production of the specified products. C. Installer Qualifications: Contractor must have a minimum 3 years experience in integral colored concrete and stamping/imprinting applications and successfully completed not less than 6 projects comparable in scale and complexity. 1. Statement of Contractor Qualifications a. Submit list of at least 6 completed projects including project name, project address and owner contact information. D. Regulatory Requirements 1. Products shall comply with the United States Clean Air Act for maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content as specified in PART 2 of this section. E. Mockups and Field Samples: Prepare field sample at project site for Owner’s review and approval. Contractor shall provide three (3) mockups per paving type as described in Drawings to demonstrate a range of colors for selection by Landscape Architect. 1. Samples shall be constructed on site and shall be 4’x4’ minimum and 4” thick. Owner shall approve location of mock ups prior to construction. 03366 INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE Page 3 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. For accurate color, the quantity of concrete mixed to produce the sample should not be less than 3 cubic yards (or not less than 1/3 the capacity of the mixing drum on the redi-mix truck) and should always be in full cubic yard increments. Excess material shall be discarded off site, according to local regulations. 3. Construct sample-using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control, construction, and expansion joints in sample panels. 4. Sample shall be poured, stamped, and sealed by the individual workers who will actually be performing the work for the project. 5. Obtain written approval of the sample from project Landscape Architect before start of work. The approved sample provides visual standard for work of this Section. 6. Retain samples of cements, sands, aggregates, and color additives used in mockup for comparison with materials used in remaining work. 7. Retain approved samples through completion of the work for use as a quality standard for finished work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with legible manufacturer’s identification and information. B. Store specified products in dry conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.6 JOB SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Maintain an ambient temperature of between 50 F and 90 F during application and at least 48 hours after application. Schedule placement of concrete to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are applied. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow, or frost is in the forecast within 24- hours. B. Protection: Precautions shall be taken to avoid damage or contamination of any surfaces near the work zone. Protect completed work from moisture, freezing or contamination. C. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. Mix times shall meet manufacturer’s written recommendations. 1.7 PRE-JOB CONFERENCE 03366 INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE Page 4 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. One week prior to the placement of colored concrete, a meeting will be held to discuss the project and application of materials. B. The Landscape Architect, General Contractor, Sub-Contractor and a Manufacturer’s Representative will be present to review mockups. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY www.scofield.com (800) 800-9900 Local Representative: Jim Orella (972) 839-3730 jim.orella@scofield.com B. Or approved equivalent. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Colored Admixture for Integrally Colored Concrete: 1. CHROMIX Admixture by L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY a. Colors shall be selected by Landscape Architect from mock-ups as described in 1.3E, this section. b. Admixture shall be a colored, water-reducing admixture containing no calcium chloride with coloring agents that are lime proof and UV resistant. c. Colored admixture shall conform to ACI 303.1, ASTM C979, ASTM C494, and AASHTO M194. B. Stamping / Imprinting Tool: 1. LITHOTEX Pavecrafters imprinting tools by L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY a. Pattern: Fractured Earth b. Size: 52x52 C. Release Agent: 1. LITHOCROME Release Agent by L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY a. Color: Clear or Antique Color shall be selected by Landscape Architect. b. The product shall be recommended by pattern tool manufacturer and compatible with integral color additives. 03366 INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE Page 5 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D. Curing and Sealing Compound: 1. Cureseal-S Matte; L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY: Curing and sealing compound shall comply with ASTM C309 and be of same manufacturer as colored admixture, for use with integrally colored concrete. 2. The Landscape Architect will approve the colors based on the constructed mockup. E. Substitutions: The use of any products other than those specified will be considered providing that the contractor requests its use in writing within seven (7) days prior to prior to bid date. This request shall be accompanied by: 1. A certificate of compliance from the material manufacturer stating that the proposed products meet or exceed the requirements for this specification. 2. Documented proof that the proposed material has a ten (10) year proven record of performance for staining concrete substrates, confirmed by at least five (5) local projects that the Landscape Architect could examine. 2.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Do not add calcium chloride to mix as it causes mottling and surface discoloration. B. Supplemental admixtures shall not be used unless approved by manufacturer and Landscape Architect. C. Do not add water to mix in the field. D. Add colored admixture to the mix according to manufacturer’s written instructions in premeasured bags, not by weight of cement content. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which work will be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install concrete according to requirements of Section 03310 Cast-in-Place Concrete. 03366 INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE Page 6 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. The area to receive integrally colored concrete shall have the sub-grade prepared as required as for any concrete slab or grade. C. The formwork shall be installed in accordance with the drawings. The slab thickness shall be consistent with that of ordinary slabs under the same conditions and as shown on drawings. D. Provide reinforcement as specified. E. Control joints and/or expansion joints shall be provided in accordance with the drawings and the guidelines established by the American Concrete Institute. As with any concrete slab, Bomanite colored concrete usually contains construction joints, control joints and expansion joints. The Contractor shall advise and work with the Landscape Architect to determine the best location for these joints to minimize the visibility of the joints and to minimize unsightly cracking. F. The expansion joint filler color is to be approved by Landscape Architect. G. The concrete shall be placed and screeded to the finished grade, and floated to a uniform surface using standard finishing techniques. H. After the initial curing period, the surface of the slab shall be sealed. I. Surfaces shall be finished uniformly with the following finish as shown on Drawings: 1. Rock Salt: [Float,] [trowel,] [and] [broom] concrete. Then sprinkle salt on concrete and press into surface leaving only tops of salt grains exposed. After 24 hours, wash salt away with water and brush. Allow surface and impressions to dry before applying curing compound. 2. Stamped/Imprinted: Apply pattern according to tool manufacturer's instructions. Touch-up pattern and finish edges with hand tools as necessary. 3.3 CURING A. Integrally Colored Concrete: Apply curing and sealing compound for integrally colored concrete according to manufacturer's instructions using manufacturer's recommended application techniques. Apply curing and sealing compound at consistent time for each pour to maintain close color consistency. B. Curing compound shall be same color as the colored concrete and supplied by same manufacturer of the colored admixture. C. Precautions shall be taken in hot weather to prevent plastic cracking resulting from excessively rapid drying at surface as described in CIP 5 Plastic Shrinkage Cracking published by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. D. Do not cover concrete with plastic sheeting. 3.4 PROTECTION 03366 INTEGRALLY COLORED AND STAMPED CONCRETE Page 7 of 7 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Protect surface treated with sealing compound until dry. B. Remove no forms for at least 8 hours after initial set. Protect work from pedestrian and automotive traffic for a period of 3 days after pouring. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are similar to variations in color and appearance of uncolored concrete, are acceptable. Final acceptance of colored concrete is at Owner’s sole discretion. END OF SECTION 04100 MASONRY MORTAR Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 SECTION 04100 - MASONRY MORTAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Furnish and install mortar for unit masonry materials. 1.2 REFERENCES ASTM C 91 - Masonry Cement. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. ASTM C 207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. ASTM C 476 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Samples: For color selection and approval by landscape architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Use same source or brand of masonry mortar materials for the duration of the Project. 1.5 MATERIAL STORAGE Store mortar materials in a dry place, off the ground, under cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Use Type III high-early strength for laying masonry in cold weather. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, with 12 percent maximum air content by volume. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type N. Aggregates: ASTM C 144. Water: Clean, free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic materials. 04100 MASONRY MORTAR Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 Mortar Color: As selected by A/E. Provide separate colors for stone and brick. 2.2 MORTAR MIXES Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents. The use of calcium chloride in mortar is not permitted. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Meeting the requirements of ASTM C 270. Masonry Cement: One part masonry cement to three parts sand, proportioned by volume. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MIXING Mixing mortar with sufficient water for minimum of three minutes in a drum type batch mixer. Mix mortar thoroughly and only in such quantity as is needed for immediate use. Use mortar within two hours after mixing. Discard mortar not used within specified time. Clean mixer after four or five batches have been mixed. Add water to lime at least 24 hours before mixing it with other materials. Mortars that have stiffened within time interval stated above because of evaporation of moisture may be retempered to restore workability by adding water. Do not retemper mortar that has reached initial set. In cold weather, heat sand or water sufficiently to maintain temperature of mortar above 50 degrees F as follows: Heat sand or mixing water: 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F. Heat sand and mixing water: 32 degrees F to 20 degrees F. 3.2 MEASURING MATERIALS Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 04100-A - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Mortar and grout for masonry. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Include design mix, indicate the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. B.Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. C.Reports for Information: 1.Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. 2.Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019. D.Manufacturer's Certificate for Information: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 45 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B.Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. B.Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C.Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D.Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. E.Grouts Fine Aggregate: Sand. F.Water: Clean and potable. 2.2 MORTAR MIXES A.Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M or S using the Property specification. B.Mortar for Engineered Masonry: ATM C270 Type M or S using the property specification. 2.3 MORTAR MIXING A.Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. B.Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C.Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D.If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. E.Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 45 degrees F. 2.4 GROUT MIXES A.Bond Beams, Lintels and Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine and course grout. 2.5 GROUT MIXING A.Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. B.Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.6 MIX TESTS A.Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270. B.Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength, and slump. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.2 PREPARATION A.Plug clean-out holes with concrete masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C270. Install grout in accordance with ASTM C476. B.Work grout into masonry and cavities to eliminate voids. C.Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding. D.Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. B.Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. 3.5 SCHEDULES A.Concrete Masonry Unit: 1.Type M or S mortar. 2.Color to be selected by Architect. END OF SECTION 04230 STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Page 1 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 04230 – STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section includes furnishing all materials, equipment and services as required in conjunction with or properly incidental to construction of all masonry as described and/or as shown on the Drawings. C. Comply with Drawings and General Requirements and referenced documents. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete masonry unit manufacturer shall certify that masonry units furnished meet or exceed requirements of this Specification. B. The Work in this Section, unless noted on the Drawings, or herein specified shall be governed by the latest edition of the following codes or specifications: 1. ACI 531 "Building Code Requirements for Concrete Masonry Structures". 2. ASTM C145 "Standard Specification for Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units". 3. ASTM C270 "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing dimensions necessary for fabrication and placement of reinforcement and accessories. B. Do not make shop drawings using reproductions of Contract Drawings. C. Submit in writing any requests for modification to Drawings or Specifications. Submitting shop drawings for review does not constitute "in writing" unless it is brought to the attention of the Architect that specific changes are being suggested. 1.04 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Deliver materials to job site in undamaged condition. B. Store concrete masonry units on raised platforms. Cover and protect units from inclement weather. C. Store mortar and grout materials in manner to prevent intrusion of moisture and contaminants. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Masonry construction shall be in compliance with "Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction", adopted February 1975 by International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council and as specified herein. B. Lay no concrete masonry unit when air temperature is below 40F unless materials are protected from weather and laid up in shelter. In such instances, maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. C. In temperatures exceeding 100F, do not lay out mortar beds ahead of placing units. Use a very light fog spray, not sufficient to penetrate masonry, on vertical surface of masonry to aid in mortar curing during the first 24 hours after placing units. 04230 STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Page 2 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Block 1. Hollow load-bearing units: a. ASTM C90, Grade N general purpose, Type I moisture-controlled. Units shall have a compressive strength of 2,000 psi on net area. b. Nominal face dimensions: 8" high x 16" long. c. Provide standard and fire rated units. d. Provide colors as noted on plans. 2. Provide normal weight aggregate units. 3. Masonry Units shall be manufactured by Feather Lite Building Products, P.O. Box 1029, Austin, Texas 78767, 512-472-2424. 4. Special Shapes: a. 8" and 12" smooth and split face block hollow core units. B. Flashing: 1. 20-mil minimum thickness elastomeric impermeable sheet material. 2. Resistant to corrosive effects of masonry mortar. 3. Acceptable product: Nervastral HD, Rubber and Plastics Compound Co., Inc. C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Continuous open-web welded wire trusses, 9 ga. side rods and diagonal ties, galvanized finish, welded at 16" intervals to continuous side rods forming truss design. 2. Prefabricated corner and "tee" intersecting units. 3. Size for single width construction. 4. Acceptable products: Dur-0-Wall, Dur-0-Wall Company; Blok-Trus, AA Wire Products Company; Trus-Mesh, Hohmann and Barnard. D. Reinforcing Rods: ASTM A615, Grade 60. E. Weeps: PVC plastic tubes or sash cord. F. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type I or Type III, non-staining. 2. Use of masonry cement will not be permitted. G. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. H. Mortar Aggregates: 1. ASTM C144, free of clay or organic matter. 2. Gradation: Sieve Size: Percent Passing: No. 4 100 No. 8 95 to 100 No. 16 60 to 100 No. 30 35 to 70 No. 50 15 to 35 No. 100 2 to 15 No. 200 10 to 2 I. Portland Cement Grout Aggregates: ASTM C33, pea gravel uniformly graded from 3/8" to 1/2". J. Water: Clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic matter. K. Cleaning Agents: 1. Combination of surface acting acids and wetting agent for general purpose cleaning of new masonry surfaces. 04230 STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Page 3 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Acceptable Product: Sure-Klean No. 600 Detergent, Pro/So/Co., Inc. 2.02 MIXES A. Mortar Proportions: 1. Non-load-bearing walls: ASTM C270, Type N, 750 psi at 28 days (1:1:6) 2. Load-bearing walls: ASTM C270, Type S, 1800 psi at 28 days (1:1/2:4-1/2) B. Portland Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand, pea gravel and water proportioned to produce 2,500 psi at 28 days with 9 1/2" slump when placed. C. Control batching procedure to ensure proper proportions by measuring materials by volume. Measurement by shovel will not be permitted. D. Mix mortar in accordance with requirements of BIA M 1 and grout in accordance with ASTM C476. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect foundation to assure surfaces to support masonry are to proper grade and elevation and free from dirt or other deleterious matter. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Lay only dry units, free of paint, oil, efflorescence or foreign matter. 2. Remove laitance, loose aggregate or anything that prevents bonding to foundation. B. Reinforcement: Before being placed, remove loose coatings from reinforcement. C. Use masonry saws to cut masonry units. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Plumb: a. Vertical lines and surfaces of columns and walls: (1) 1/4" in 10'-0" (2) 3/8" in 20'-0" maximum (3) 1/2" in maximum b. External corners or control joints: (1) 1/4" in 20'-0" (2) 1/2" in 40'-0" maximum. 2. Maximum Variation from Level or Grades for Exposed Lintels, Sill, Parapets or Horizontal Grooves: a. 1/4" on any bay or 20'-0" b. 1/2" in 40'-0" 3. Maximum Variation from Plan Location of Linear Building Line or Related Portions of Columns, Walls and Partitions: a. 1/2" in any bay or 20'-0" b. 3/4" in 40'-0" 4. Maximum Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions of Columns and Thickness of Walls: - 1/4"; + 1/2" B. Pattern Bond: Running bond with vertical joints located at centerline of masonry units in alternate courses unless noted otherwise on architectural drawings. 04230 STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Page 4 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. General: 1. Set units plumb, true to lien and with level courses accurately spaced within allowable tolerances. 2. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM allowables. 3. Adjust masonry unit to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 4. Where adjustment must be made or if units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove units, clean joints and units of mortar and relay with fresh mortar. 5. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they are set in position. 6. Adjust shelf angles to keep masonry level and at proper elevation. 7. Provide pressure relieving joints by placing continuous 1/8" foam pad under shelf angle. D. Mortar Beds: 1. Hollow Units: a. Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. b. Provide full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells and webs where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. E. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints: 1. Construct uniform joints, 3/8" nominal thickness. 2. Shove vertical joints tight. 3. Tool concave joints in exposed surfaces when thumb-print hard with round joints slightly larger than width of joint. 4. Flush cut all joints not exposed. 5. Fill horizontal joints between top of non-load bearing masonry partitions and underside of beams or slabs with flexible material. F. Control Joints: 1. Keep clean of mortar and debris. 2. Install where indicated and at following locations: a. Changes in thickness, height and direction. b. Within 8'-0" of corners or offsets. c. At control or expansion joints in structure. d. At each side of openings greater than 24" wide. e. Place control joints at foundation walls, shelf angles, setbacks and materials expanding at different ratios. 3. Concrete Masonry units: a. Space joints at 30'-0" o.c. maximum in uninterrupted walls. b. Provide continuous vertical control joints through bond beams except at lintels above openings. c. Offset control joints to ends of lintels. G. Collar Joints: 1. Keep cavity in cavity walls clean. 2. Remove all protruding mortar fins in cavity to be grouted. H. Joining of Work: 1. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry construction, remove loose units and mortar and clean exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry. 2. If necessary to stop off horizontal run of masonry, rack back one-half block length in each course. 3. Do not use toothing to join new masonry to set or partially set masonry. I. Reinforcing and Ties: 1. Bars: a. Reinforce each jamb of wall openings with one bar vertical. b. Place reinforcing bars in hollow cores vertically where indicated. 04230 STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Page 5 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: a. Fully embed joint truss type reinforcement in each alternate bed joint 16" o.c. b. Extend joint reinforcement entire length of bed joint. c. Place reinforcing in course immediately above opening extending at least 16" past each side of opening. d. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at ends. e. Bend or weld at offsets or special conditions. J. Bond Beams: 1. Provide CMU bond beams at top of CMU walls and lintels above openings. 2. Reinforce bond beams with minimum of two bars and grout. 3. Discontinue bond beams at expansion and control joints. K. Flashing: 1. General: a. Clean surface to receive flashing and remove projections which might puncture or damage flashing material. b. Seal joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. c. Seal top of flashing to ensure moisture cannot infiltrate behind flashing. d. Continue flashing around corners. Ensure membrane material is not interrupted in horizontal plane at corners. 2. Wall base, opening sills and heads: a. Place flashing on mortar bed and cover with mortar. b. Start 1/2" from outside face of wall and turn up in cavity 8" minimum. c. Lap joints 4" minimum. d. Place flashing under and behind sills. e. Place flashing over steel lintels. f. Extend flashing beyond opening jamb lines. L. Weep Holes: 1. Provide weep holes in head joints in first course immediately above flashing by either leaving head joint free and clean of mortar, or placing and leaving sash cord or plastic weeps in joint. 2. 24" o.c. maximum spacing. 3. Keep weep holes and area above flashing free of mortar waste. M. Built-In Work: 1. At completion of conventional masonry unit work, fill holes in joints and tool. 2. Cut out and re-point defective joints. 3. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean initially with stiff brushes and water. Remove efflorescence in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. When cleaning agent is required, apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 square feet. 1. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is reviewed. 2. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent and immediately rinse with clear water. 3. Do small sections at a time, working from top to bottom. 4. Protect sash, metal lintels and other corrosive parts when masonry is cleaned with acid solution. C. Leave area and surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, drippings and broken masonry. 04230 STRUCTURAL REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Page 6 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 END OF SECTION 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM Page 1 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 04300 - UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units B. Brick C. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A 641 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. D. ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Concrete Units: Submit two full size concrete masonry units to show texture, finishes, and dimensions. B.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530, ACI 530.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable Building Code requirements for masonry construction. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the masonry work with openings and chases for heating, plumbing, and electrical ducts, pipes, and conduits built into masonry walls. Provide for installation of bolts, toggles, flashing, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips, wall plugs, and frames. 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM Page 2 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A.Manufacturers 1. Featherlite 2. Texas Industries 3. Builders Concrete Products B.Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C 90, Type I - Moisture Controlled normal weight; standard and split face. C. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 4, 6, 8, & 12 inches by 16 inches. Provide special units for: 1. Inside and outside corners of other than 90 degrees. 2. Any reveal work where holes or backside strikings will be exposed. 3. Provide 1" bull nose units for all external corners in interior spaces. D. Color: To be selected by the architect. 2.2 BRICK UNITS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Acme Brick Company 2. Approved equal B. BRICK UNITS 1. Face Brick: Modular. 2. Size and Shape: 3-5/8-inch by 2-1/4-inch by 7-5/8-inches. Provide solid units where configuration would show holes. 3. Color: To be selected by the architect. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Joint Reinforcement: 1. Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 641, 3/16-inch side rods with cross ties. 2. Manufacturers a) AA Wire Products Company. b) Dur-O-Wal, Inc. c) Heckman Building Products. 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM Page 3 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 d) Hohman and Barnard, Inc. e)Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America B. Veneer Anchor Straps with Adjustable Wire Ties: 1. Manufacturers: a) Wire Bond b) AA Wire Products Company. c) Dur-O-Wal, Inc. d) Heckman Building Products, "Model 315D" and "Model 316". e) Hohman and Barnard, Inc. f) Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 2. Corrugated metal 1-1/4-inch by 9-inch size by 22 gauge thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153 B2 steel finish with 3/16-inch diameter wire ties, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153 B2 steel finish. 2.4 LINTELS AND BEAMS A. Steel Lintels: Build steel lintels into masonry where required for openings in the brick veneer. B. Bond Beams: Provide bond beams in masonry walls where shown on Drawings. Bond beams shall be continuous where possible. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C.Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.3 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM Page 4 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B.Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C.Align brick coursing with CMU coursing. D.Brick: 1. Bond: Running and as shown on drawings. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Tooled, Concave. E. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Block Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Tooled, Concave. 3.4 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required. 3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Continuously reinforce mortar joints 16 inches on center vertically in solid masonry walls meeting cavity walls. B. Provide ties at 8 inches on center where masonry walls intersect. Install ties in masonry veneer walls 16 inches on center vertically. 3.6 LINTELS A. Install lintels over openings. B. Extend steel lintel angles or plates minimum 8-inches into adjacent masonry. 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM Page 5 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.7 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. 3.8 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4-inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16-inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet and 1/2-inch in 20 feet or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch per story noncumulative; 1/2-inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet and 1/4-inch in 10 feet; 1/2-inch in 30 feet. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4-inch. 3.9 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.10 PARGING A. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging. B.In cavity walls, solidly parge inner wythe masonry. In solid masonry walls, vertical longitudinal joints between face brick and cement masonry shall be completely filled by parging either face of backing or back of facing. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test all masonry work. B. Inspect and test parging work. 3.12 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM Page 6 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.13 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 04300-A - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Concrete masonry units B.Glass block C.Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories 1.2 REFERENCES A.ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B.ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C.ASTM A 641 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. D.ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Samples: CMU: Submit block samples to show texture, finishes, and dimensions. B.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530, ACI 530.1. B.Maintain one copy of each document on site. C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Conform to applicable Building Code requirements for masonry construction. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.7 COORDINATION A.Coordinate the masonry work with openings and chases for heating, plumbing, and electrical ducts, pipes, and conduits built into masonry walls. Provide for installation of bolts, toggles, flashing, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips, wall plugs, and frames. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A.Manufacturers 1.Featherlite 2.Texas Industries 3.Builders Concrete Products B.Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C 90, Type I - Moisture Controlled normal weight; standard and split face. C.Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 4, 6, 8, & 10 inches by 16 inches. Provide special units for: 1.Inside and outside corners of other than 90 degrees. 2.Any reveal work where holes or backside strikings will be exposed. 3.Provide 1" bull nose units for all external corners in interior spaces. 4.Provide burnished or split face in height as indicated in architectural drawings D.Color: To be selected by the architect. 2.2 GLASS BLOCK A.Manufacturers 1.Pittsburgh Corning 2.Approved equal B.Hollow Glass Units: 1.Nominal Size: 8 x 8 x 4 inches. 2.Color: Clear glass. 3.Pattern and Design: “Decora” LX C.Accessories 1.Panel Reinforcing: Two parallel rods with cross rods welded and galvanized after fabrication. 2.Panel Anchors: Steel strips, punched with elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. 3.Asphalt Emulsion: Water based asphalt emulsion. 4.Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A.Joint Reinforcement: 1.Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 641, 3/16-inch side rods with cross ties. 2.Manufacturers a)AA Wire Products Company. b)Dur-O-Wal, Inc. c)Heckman Building Products. d)Hohman and Barnard, Inc. e)Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 2.4 BEAMS A.Bond Beams: Provide bond beams in masonry walls where shown on Drawings. Bond beams shall be continuous where possible. Reinforce as shown. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B.Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C.Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B.Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.3 COURSING A.Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B.Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C.Concrete Masonry Units: 1.Bond: Running and as shown on drawings. 2.Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3.Mortar Joints: Tooled, Concave. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.4 PLACING AND BONDING A.Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B.Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C.Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D.Remove excess mortar as work progresses. E.Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F.Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G.Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required. 3.5 BUILT-IN WORK A.As work progresses, install items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. B.Install built-in items plumb and level. 3.6 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4-inch. B.Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16-inch. C.Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet and 1/2-inch in 20 feet or more. D.Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch per story noncumulative; 1/2-inch in two stories or more. E.Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet and 1/4-inch in 10 feet; 1/2-inch in 30 feet. F.Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet. G.Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4-inch. 3.7 CUTTING AND FITTING A.Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B.Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect and test all masonry work. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.9 CLEANING A.Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B.Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C.Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D.Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities. END OF SECTION 04720-A CAST STONE MASONRY Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 04720-A CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide cast stone fabrications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Standard: Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute or has on file and follows a written quality-control plan that includes all elements of the Cast Stone Institute's "Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection." C. Testing: Independent testing laboratory. D. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. 1. Full-size typical unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cast Stone Applications: 1. Manufacturers: CanyonRock; Owens Corning Cultured Stone, LLC; StoneCraft Offered by Tapco; Worthington Millwork, LLC; or approved equal. 2. Application: Window sills. 3. Application: Lintels. 4. Application: Coping. 5. Application: Wall panels. 6. Application: Column covers. 7. Concrete Materials: a. Portland cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. b. Fine Aggregate for Facing Mixes: ASTM C 33 and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. c. Coarse Aggregate: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; 04720-A CAST STONE MASONRY Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. d. Pigments: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments, color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 8. Concrete Admixtures: a. Chloride Content: Containing less than 0.1 percent chloride ions. b. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. c. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 9. Reinforcement: a. Steel Bars: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615; galvanized or epoxy- coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material. b. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775. c. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767. 10. Embedded Anchors and Inserts: a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240, Type 304. b. Steel: ASTM A 36 and hot-dip galvanized: ASTM A 123. 11. Mortar and Grout: a. Mortar Mix: ASTM C 270, Type S, for reinforced masonry, masonry below grade and masonry in contact with earth and ASTM C 270, Type N, for above-grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls and for interior loadbearing and nonloadbearing partitions. b. Mortar Materials: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II. c. Mortar Aggregate: Natural color, ASTM C 144. d. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. e. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. f. Color: Colored pigmented mortar where exposed at building exterior and natural color elsewhere. 12. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Variation in Cross Section: Do not exceed 1/8 inch. b. Variation in Length: Do not exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch. c. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch. d. Location of Grooves or Anchorages: Not greater that 1/8 inch on formed surfaces or 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Installation Tolerance: 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet for plumb and level. C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): 1/16 inch. D. Replace damaged units. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 05120-A STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 05120-A - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide structural steel for building construction including sub-framing units which are part of the general framing system. Include related anchors, fasteners, and connectors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Submit for approval test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Standards: AISC, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, and applicable regulations. C. Testing: Independent testing laboratory D. Erection Tolerances: AISC standards PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Materials: 1. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 572, Grade 50. 2. Structural Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36, Grade 36. 3. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S. 5. Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35. 6. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D1.1, Type B 7. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, non-headed type. 8. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 9. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490, as applicable. B. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM A 959. 2. Electrodes for Welding: AWS Code. 3. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 13, compatible with topcoats. 4. Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand. 5. Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed ferrous aggregate grouting compound. 6. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed nonmetallic grouting compound, CE CRD-C621. 05120-A STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with AISC codes and specifications, and with AWS "Structural Welding Code". B. Employ a registered engineer to check elevations and plumb and level tolerances; certify that installed work is within AISC Standards. Owner may engage testing/inspection agency to inspect welded and bolted connections. C. Architecturally exposed steel: Fabricate with special care using materials carefully selected for best appearance. Store materials off ground and keep clean. Cut, fit and assemble work with surfaces smooth, square and with complete contact at joints. Set all cambers up. Weld all work continuously; grind smooth and flush to make seams not visible after priming. Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP6; apply prime coat within 24 hours after cleaning. D. Touch-up field welds and abraded areas with shop primer. END OF SECTION 05120-S STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 1 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 05120-S STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Work Included: This section covers furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services in connection with the furnishings, fabrication and erection of all structural steel work complete including: 1. Steel columns 2. Steel beams and purlins 3. Shelf angles 4. Bolts 5. Angle frames and openings 6. Leveling plates and anchor plates not cast in concrete or masonry. 7. Shop painting B. Include all supplementary parts and members necessary to complete the structural steel frame, regardless of whether all such parts are definitely shown or specified, and furnish all such bolts, gussets, plates, etc., as may be required for the proper assembly of all items. Workmanship shall be of the best quality known to the trade, and all work shall be carefully assembled, fabricated and erected true to the lines, elevations and designs shown on the Drawings. C. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Quality Requirements: Section 01410 2. Embedded metal assemblies: Section 03300 3. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500 4. Painting: Section 09912 5. Grouting structural steel: Section 03300 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - June 1, 1989, with commentary. 2. Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges - September 1, 1986 with commentary. B. American National Standards Institute (NASI)/American Welding Society (AWS): 1. ANSI/AWS D1.1-81 Structural Welding Code C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36 Structural Steel (For areas not exposed to the weather) 05120-S STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 2 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. ASTM A 325 High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. Provide Type III bolts for areas exposed to the weather. 3. ASTM A 500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 4. ASTM A 501 for hot-formed welded structural tubing. 5. ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes and Plates exposed to the weather. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for fabrication and erection omissions and errors and for conformance with the drawings and specifications relative to the various details. 2. Architect's review will cover member sizes, methods of connections and general arrangements but not dimensions or quantities. The strength of the connections shall be the responsibility of the Structural Steel Fabricator, unless otherwise shown on sections and details. 3. Shop drawings shall indicate shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, thread fasteners and welds. A sealed letter from a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Texas shall be submitted by the Fabricator certifying that the shop drawings, including the design of all connections, have been produced under his direct supervision. Shop drawings submitted without the Fabricators PE letter will not be reviewed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Bolts and other anchorage devices to be embedded in concrete and masonry shall be delivered to the site before the start of concrete and masonry work. Furnish setting drawings and templates for the installation of anchor bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: 1. ASTM A 36, plates and bars for steel not exposed to the weather. 2. ASTM A 992, wide flange members for steel not exposed to the weather. 3. ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) for all shapes and plates exposed to the weather. B. Structural tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, cold-formed welded steel structural tubing. Use ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) steel for steel exposed to the weather. C. Pipe columns: ASTM A 501, hot-formed welded steel structural tubing. Use ASTM A 588 (Cor-Ten B) steel for steel exposed to the weather. D. High-strength threaded fasteners: ASTM A 325, Bearing Type bolts, nuts and 05120-S STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 3 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 plain hardened washers for connections not exposed to the weather. Use ASTM A 325, Bearing Bolts, Type III for connections of all members made out of Cor- Ten B steel. Unless otherwise noted the minimum bolt diameter shall be 3/4". E. Stud anchors: Headed stud anchors with a smooth shank, or carbon steel with a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, and as manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Div. or KSM Welding Systems Div. F. Shop Paint: Fed. Spec. TT-P-86G. Provide fabricator’s standard rust inhibitive metal primer with solids content not less than 55% by weight. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate structural steel in accordance with referenced specifications. 1. Drawings indicate the design, sections and weight of members. Make no substitutes except with the written permission of the Architect. Dimensions scaled from the drawings shall not be used for fabrication. Contractor shall, when necessary, measure and determine actual dimensions at the building. All existing building dimensions that might offset the fabrication of steel members shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. 2. Workmanship shall conform to the best practice in structural steel shops. Materials shall be clean and straight. Shop kinks will not be permitted. B. Connections shall conform to the standard specifications of the American Institute of Steel Construction. All bolted connections shall be friction type. C. Punching: Shop-punch steel members for bolts and hanger rods needed to support wood nailers and other items. D. Marking: Components of high strength steel required to have a yield stress greater than 36 kips/sq. in. shall be clearly marked with the ASTM designation over any shop coat prior to shipment from the fabricator's plant. E. Shop Painting: 1. Cor-Ten B steel and steel to be encased in concrete or sprayed with fireproofing and steel surface to be welded shall not be painted. Clean this steelwork of oil and grease with solvent cleaner and remove dirt and other foreign matter by sweeping with brushes or with compressed air. 2. Steelwork to be primed shall be given one coat shop paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Clean this steelwork of loose mill scale, rust, weld, slag, dirt and other foreign matter. Clean welds of spatter, smoke and iron oxide film. Remove oil and grease with solvent cleaner. 3. Apply shop paint to dry surfaces thoroughly and evenly by brush, spray, roller coating or dipping at the election of the fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION 05120-S STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 4 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Erection of structural metal shall comply with the requirements of referenced codes and standards. 1. The use of a cutting torch for field connection of fabricating errors will be permitted only with the approval of the Architect. For each fabrication error the Contractor shall submit a drawing of existing conditions and the proposed correction for the Architect's review. 2. Set column base plates to correct elevations and support temporarily on shims until the columns have been plumbed and grouted. 3. Make field connections by electric arc welding or with friction type high strength bolts. B. Make high strength bolted connections in conformance with "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts" as approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints, August 14, 1980. 1. Prior to installation, clean bolts, nuts and washers, if required. Dirt and noticeable rust on bolts, nuts and washers will not be allowed. 2. Where long slotted holes are used, provide plate washers or bars in conformance with Article 3, paragraph (a) 3. of the above mentioned specification. C. Erect steel framing true and plumb and brace temporarily where necessary to handle all loads to which the structure may be subjected. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as required for safety, and finally shall be removed by the Contractor as part of his equipment. Securely connect all work to take care of dead load, wind and erection stresses. D. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, field connections and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same materials as used shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, equal to that of the original shop coat. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following testing and inspection: (Prior to placement of steel deck). 1. Check temporary bracing of steel frame. 2. Check location and condition of anchor bolts. 3. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame. 4. Visually inspect common bolts. 5. Inspection of high-strength bolting: (a) Visually inspect connections. (b) Check tightness of at least 33% of connections. (c) Check at least two bolts of each girder to column connection. 6. Visually inspect field and shop welds. 7. Ultrasonic or X-ray testing of full penetration welds when requested by the Architect or Structural Engineer. 8. Re-inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor. 9. Verify that no members are damaged. 10. Certify that materials and installation are according to Contract 05120-S STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 5 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Documents and industry standards. B. Correction: The fabricator or erector shall correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspection and test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with the specified requirements. Perform all additional tests required to reconfirm non-compliance of the original work and to show compliance of corrected work. C. Verify that all welders employed during erection of structural steel are certified for type of base materials and positions encountered. Certification testing to be performed at Contractors expense. END OF SECTION 05120 - S 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 05500 – MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1, Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide miscellaneous metal work as detailed and as specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Drawings shall indicate each item being furnished including materials, quantities, sizes, shapes, size and types of anchors, locations finish types and installation details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Structural Steel: ASTM A-36. B. Cast and Miscellaneous Loose Steel: ASTM A-36 (A-27). C. Bolts: ASTM A-307, Grade A. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53 black seamless pipe, Grade B, Schedule 40, free of pits and abrasions. E. Aluminum Extruded: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5. F. Primer: Tnemec Series 60 Hi-Build Epoxy Line 5.0 mils thick dry minimum coat. G. Surface Paint: Tnemec Series 73 Endurashield III, 2 coats at a min. of 4.0 mils thick per coat dry. H. Setting Grout: Pro-Loc, non-shrink, setting grout. I. Stainless Steel Bolts: Conform to ASTM F-593-91. 2.2 ITEMS OF WORK - FABRICATED A. Miscellaneous Steel and Aluminum Shapes: Channels, wide flange shapes, angles, plates, pipe, tubing, connections and bolts where shown and detailed on Drawings. 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Shop fabricate sections in maximum lengths possible for final installation in the field. 2.3 FINISHES A. Shop Paint: Miscellaneous ferrous metal items, except those indicated to be galvanized or those with a factory finish, shall be solvent cleaned (SSPC SP1) and hand tool cleaned (SP2-63) and then given one coat of Specified Primer in shop before delivery to job site. B. Galvanized Finish: Zinc-coating conforming to ASTM A123 and ASTM A-385. C. Decorative Shop Finishes: Decorative metal shall be solvent cleaned (SSPC SP1) and then commercial blast cleaned (SP6-63) to completely remove mill scale, rust and other foreign deposits and to provide a uniform satin finish to exposed surfaces. Coat surfaces with the specified primer to minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. D. Anodizing: 1. Finish exposed surfaces in accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual. 2. Aluminum: NAAMM AMP 501, (Clear anodized natural finish). 3. Mill Finish: AAMIO, as fabricated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Work shall be made and erected square, plumb, straight and true, accurate fitted, and with tight joints and intersections. Work shall be adequately reinforced and anchored in place. Welding shall conform to best modern practice to be of adequate strength and durability, with jointing made tight, flush and in true plane with base metals, clean and smooth. Form exterior joints to exclude water. Welded connections in exposed members shall be ground smooth and polished. Install stock manufactured items in accordance with manufacturers directions. Leave items plumb, level and securely fastened. 3.2 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS Where aluminum surfaces will contact steel, other incompatible metals, masonry, stone or concrete, keep the aluminum surfaces from direct contact with such dissimilar material by painting the incompatible metal with prime coat of zinc chrome primer followed by one or two coats of aluminum metal paint or other suitable protective coating excluding those containing lead pigmentation. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 SECTION 05500-A - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide the following metal fabrications: 1.Rough hardware. 2.Loose bearing and leveling plates. 3.Shelf and relieving angles. 4.Miscellaneous framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles. 5.Miscellaneous steel trim. 6.Edgings. 7.Metal fabrications where noted on the Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Ferrous Materials: 1.Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2.Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786. 3.Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or A 501. 4.Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611 or A 570. 5.Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 or A 569. 6.Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 and G90. 7.Steel Pipe, Black Finish: ASTM A 53. 8.Steel Pipe, Galvanized Finish: ASTM A 53. 9.Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. 10.Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510. 11.Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 12.Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 13.Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type. 14.Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS specifications. 15.Zinc-Coating: Hot-dip galvanized coating for materials in exterior assemblies or exterior walls. B.Stainless Steel Materials: 1.Bar Stock: ASTM A 276, Type 302 or 304. 2.Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304. C.Aluminum Materials: 1.Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221 aluminum alloy. 2.Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632 aluminum alloy. 3.Rivets: ASTM B 316, aluminum alloy. 4.Sheet for Expanded Aluminum Grating: ASTM B 209. 5.Fasteners: ASTM A 153. 6.Finish: Mill finish. 7.Finish: Clear anodized. D.Fasteners: 1.Bolts and Nuts: Hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 2.Lag Bolts: Square head, FS FF-B-561. 3.Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 4.Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. 5.Plain Washers: Round carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 6.Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325. 7.Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588. 8.Lock Washers: Spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 9.Zinc-Coating: Fasteners in exterior assemblies or exterior walls. E.Auxiliary Materials: 1.Nonshrink Metallic Grout: CE CRD-C621. 2.Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: CE CRD-C621. 3.Interior Anchoring Cement: Hydraulic expansion cement. 4.Exterior/Interior Anchoring Cement: Erosion-resistant hydraulic expansion cement. 5.Shop Primer: Alkyd primer, FS TT-P-645, compatible with topcoats. 6.Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC - Paint 20. 7.Bituminous Paint: Asphalt mastic, SSPC - Paint 12. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job; allow for cutting and fitting if field measurement not practical. B.Form work true to line with sharp angles and edges. Weld continuously, grind flush and make smooth on exposed surfaces. C.Install work plumb and level with hairline joints and ground flush welds. D.Touch-up damaged coatings with shop primer and galvanize repair paint or paint as specified. E.Paint items scheduled in accordance with painting section. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 06110-A - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Structural floor, wall, and roof framing. 2.Wall and roof sheathing. 3.Curbs, cants, and blocking. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-place Concrete. 2.Section 06 17 53 – Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 1.2 REFERENCES A.American Forest & Paper Association B.American Wood Council C.ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. D.APA (American Plywood Association). E.AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process F.NFPA (National Forest Products Association). G.SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mill and Producers Mark: Each piece of lumber and plywood shall be gradestamped indicating type, grade, mill, and grading agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee. Mark shall appear on unfinished surface, or ends of pieces with finished surfaces. B.Pressure Preservative Treated Material: Accredited agency quality mark on each piece of wood indicating treatment. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A.Keep materials dry during delivery. Store materials 6 inches minimum above ground surface. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation between stacks. B.Cover stored materials until ready for use for protection from moisture. Place and anchor covering in a manner which will assure good ventilation under the covering. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A.Refer to framing drawings for specific member design B.Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA and SPIB. C.Beam Framing: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, No. 2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. D.Joist Framing: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, No. 2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. E.Rafter Framing: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, No. 2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content. F.Studding: Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Larch species, grading per sheet S1.1, 19 percent maximum moisture content. 2.2 PLYWOOD MATERIALS A.Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, 23/32” Span Rating 40/20; Exposure Durability 1; unsanded B.Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, 7/16” Span Rating 24/0; Exposure Durability 1; unsanded. C.Floor and Flat Roof Plywood Underlayment: APA Rated Underlayment, 23/32” Span Rating 48/24; Exposure Durability 1; sanded. 2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A.Treat lumber and plywood where indicated and as specified. Comply with applicable AWPA U1 Standards and quality control and inspection requirements. B.Fasteners and anchoring devices to be used with wood treated with waterbourne preservatives shall be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel if the wood will be exposed to moisture. C.Complete fabrication of items to be treated to the greatest extent possible prior to treatment. Where items must be cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of the same chemical used for treatment or other solution recommended by AWPA Standards for the treatment. D.Inspect wood after treating and drying. Discard warped or twisted items. E.Wood Treatment: Compatible with galvanized metal connector plates, unless other compatible protective finish for connector plates is approved by the Director for use with approved treatment. 1.Preservative Treatment: Category UC3A for Exterior Construction above Ground; coated and exposed to rapid water runoff. 2.Preservative Treatment: Category UC3B for Exterior Construction above Ground; uncoated and exposed to poor water runoff. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.Nailers, blocking, cants, shim stock, and similar members used in conjunction with roofing (including related flashings, trim and vapor barrier), coping, and waterproofing. 4.Nailers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with exterior masonry and concrete (including interior wythe of exterior walls), and all sills for framing. 5.Wood items indicated or scheduled on the Drawings to be preservative treated. F.Wood Treatment: Compatible with galvanized metal connector plates, unless other compatible protective finish for connector plates is approved by the Director for use with approved treatment. 1.Preservative Treatment: Category UC4A for Ground Contact or Freshwater; Non-critical components. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners: Hot dipped or electro galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B.Structural Framing Connectors and Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions, manufactured by Simpson. C.Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry, expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete, bolts or ballistic fasteners for anchorages to steel. D.Spacer panel clips: Install mid-span of each sheet. E.Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed F.Drywall Screws: Bugle head, steel, power driven type, length 3 times thickness of sheathing. G.Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate and supporting structure on which rough carpentry is to be installed for defects that will adversely affect the execution and quality of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected 3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL A.Do not use units of material with defects which impair the quality of the Work and units which are too small to fabricate the Work with minimum joints or with optimum joint arrangement. B.Install Work accurately to required lines and levels with members plumb and true, accurately cut and fitted and securely fastened. Closely fit rough carpentry to other associated construction. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 C.Securely attach carpentry Work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by the referenced standards. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate through members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. Set nail heads in exposed Work which is to be painted or stained and fill resulting holes. D.Treated Wood: Apply heavy brush coat of treatment material to field cut surfaces. (Not required for pressure treated wood materials) 3.3 WOOD FRAMING A.Install framing members of nominal sizes indicated or of units built-up to dimensions indicated, on spacings shown. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the recommendations of the AFPA “Manual for Wood Frame Construction”. Construct required openings for installation of related work. Do not splice structural members between supports. B.Anchor and nail members as indicated. If not indicated, comply with the “Recommended Nailing Schedule - Table 1” of the “Manual for Wood Frame Construction” and other applicable recommendations of the AFPA. C.Install miscellaneous blocking and framing indicated and as required for attachment and support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. D.Erect wood framing members level and plumb. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side up. Construct framing members full length without splices. E.Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. F.Double or triple members at openings as required by design. Space short studs over and under opening to stud spacing. G.Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings. Construct double joists under wall studding. H.Bridge joists in excess of 8 ft span or as detailed, at mid-span members. Fit solid bridging at ends of members. I.Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inch. J.Construct load bearing framing and curb members full length without splices. K.Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. L.Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, roofing vapor retardant, and parapet construction. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 M.Coordinate installation of wood decking, glue laminated structural units, and prefabricated wood trusses. 3.4 SHEATHING A.Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm bearing. Use sheathing clips between sheets between roof framing members. B.Secure wall sheathing horizontally perpendicular to wall studs, with ends staggered, over firm bearing. C.Install plywood two span minimum continuous. D.Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel. E.Comply with printed installation requirements of the APA Design/ Construction Guide, Residential & Commercial for plywood application required, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 BLOCKING, CURBS, AND CANTS A.Construct curb [and cants] members of single pieces per location. B.Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by lapping side members alternately. C.Coordinate work with installation of decking and support of decking at openings. 3.6 TOLERANCES A.Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B.Surface Flatness of Roof: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 06175-A - SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide shop fabricated and pre-engineered wood trusses. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.BCSI: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses jointly produced by WTCA – Representing the Structural Building Components Industry and the Truss Plate Institute. B.Building Designer: The person that contracts with the Owner for the design of the Framing Structural System and/or who is responsible for the preparation of the Construction Documents. When mandated by the Legal Requirements, the Building Designer shall be a Registered Design Professional. C.Building: Structure used or intended for supporting or sheltering any use or occupancy. D.Building Code: As it applies to a Building, any set of standards set forth and enforced by a Jurisdiction for the protection of public safety. E.Building Official: Officer or other designated authority charged with the administration and enforcement of the Building Code, or a duly authorized representative. F.Construction Documents: Written, graphic and pictorial documents prepared or assembled for describing the design (including the Framing Structural System), location and physical characteristics of the elements of a Building necessary to obtain a Building Permit and construct a Building. G.Contractor: Owner of a Building, or the person who contracts with the Owner, who constructs the Building in accordance with the Construction Documents and the Truss Submittal Package. The term "Contractor" shall include those subcontractors who have a direct contract with the Contractor to construct all or a portion of the construction. H.Cover/Truss Index Sheet: Sheet that is signed and sealed, where required by the Legal Requirements, by the Truss Design Engineer, and depending on the Legal Requirements shall be permitted to contain the following information: (1) identification of the Building, including Building name and address, lot, block, subdivision, and city or county; (2) identification of Construction Documents by drawing number(s) with revision date; (3) specified Building Code; (4) computer program used; (5) roof dead and live loads; (6) floor dead and live loads; (7) wind load criteria from a specifically defined code (e.g., ASCE 7) and any other design loads (such as ponding, mechanical loads, etc.); (8) name, address and license number of Registered Design Professional for the Building, if known; (9) a listing of the individual identification numbers and dates of each Truss Design Drawing 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 referenced by the Cover/Truss Index Sheet; and (10) name, address, date of drawing and license number of Truss Design Engineer. I.Jurisdiction: Governmental unit that is responsible for adopting and enforcing the Building Code. J.Legal Requirements: Any applicable provisions of all statutes, laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, or orders of the governing Jurisdiction. K.Owner: Person having a legal or equitable interest in the property upon which a Building is to be constructed, and: (1) either prepares, or retains the Building Designer or Registered Design Professional to prepare the Construction Documents; and (2) either constructs, or retains the Contractor to construct the Building. L.Registered Design Professional: Architect or engineer, who is licensed to practice their respective design profession as defined by the Legal Requirements of the Jurisdiction in which the Building is to be constructed. M.Standard: National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction (ANSI/TPI 1). N.Truss: Individual metal-plate-connected wood component manufactured for the construction of a Building. O.Truss Design Drawing: Written, graphic and pictorial depiction of an individual Truss that includes the information required in the Standard. P.Truss Design Engineer: Person who is licensed to practice engineering as defined by the Legal Requirements of the Jurisdiction in which the Building is to be constructed and who supervises the preparation of the Truss Design Drawings. Q.Truss Designer: Person responsible for the preparation of the Truss Design Drawings. R.Truss Manufacturer: Person engaged in the fabrication of Trusses. S.Truss Placement Diagram: Illustration identifying the assumed location of each Truss. T.Truss Submittal Package: Package consisting of each individual Truss Design Drawing, and, as applicable, the Truss Placement Diagram, the Cover/Truss Index Sheet, Lateral Restraint and Diagonal Bracing details designed in accordance with generally accepted engineering practice, applicable BCSI defined lateral restraint and diagonal bracing details, and any other structural details germane to the Trusses. 1.3 DESIGN A.Trusses shall be designed in accordance with the Standard and where any applicable design feature is not specifically covered herein, design shall be in Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 accordance with the applicable provisions of the latest edition of the American Forest & Paper Association's (AF&PA’s) National Design Specification® (NDS®) for Wood Construction and all applicable legal requirements. B.Truss Manufacturer shall furnish Truss Design Drawings prepared in accordance with all applicable legal requirements. C.Truss Manufacturer shall furnish a Truss Placement Diagram which shall provide at a minimum the location assumed for each Truss based on the Truss Manufacturer's interpretation of the Construction Documents. D.Truss Manufacturer shall submit the Truss Submittal Package to the Building Designer and/or the local Building Official for review and approval prior to the manufacturing of the Trusses. E.The Truss Design Drawings shall include, at a minimum, the information specified below (per the Standard): 1.Building Code used for Design, unless specified on Cover/Truss Index Sheet. 2.Slope or depth, span and spacing. 3.Location of all joints and support locations. 4.Number of plies if greater than one. 5.Required bearing widths. 6.Design loads as applicable, including: a.Top Chord live load (for roof Trusses, this shall be the controlling case of live load or snow load); b.Top chord dead load; c.Bottom chord live load; d.Bottom chord dead load; e.Additional loads and locations; f.Environmental Load Design Criteria (wind speed, snow, seismic, and all applicable factors as required to calculate the Truss loads); and g.Sprinkler Loads: Obtain sprinkler drawings from sprinkler design company and design roof trusses for the concentrated loads of the sprinkler piping to meet the loading criteria of NFPA 13 h.Other lateral loads, including drag strut loads. 7.Adjustments to Wood Member and Metal Connector Plate design values for conditions of use. 8.Maximum reaction force and direction, including maximum uplift reaction forces where applicable. 9.Metal Connector Plate type, manufacturer, size, and thickness or gauge, and the dimensioned location of each Metal Connector Plate except where symmetrically located relative to the joint interface. 10.Size, species and grade for each Wood Member. 11.Truss-to-Truss connection and Truss field assembly requirements. 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 12.Calculated span to deflection ratio and/or maximum vertical and horizontal deflection for live and total load and KCR (creep factor) as applicable. 13.Maximum axial tension and compression forces in the Truss members. 14.Fabrication tolerance per the Standard. 15.Required Permanent Individual Truss Member Restraint location and the method of Restraint/Bracing to be used per the Standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. Cut sheets (profiles) for each truss shall be included with show grade of wood, member sizes, plate connections, loads, forces, dimensions, etc; Legible plan sheets of the truss layout shall be provided which show bracing/bridging, member labels, truss spacing, etc. 1.Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the State of the project. Truss design drawings shall conform with section 2303.4 of the current version of the International Building Code 2.Deflection Under All Loads: 1/240th of span, maximum. 3.Deflection Under Live Loads: 1/480th of span, maximum for floor trusses, 1/360th of span maximum for roof trusses. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Standards: TPI, Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; TPI, Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses. C.Design Engineering: Registered engineer PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Wood Trusses: 1.Lumber Standard: PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard. 2.Dressing: Dressed four sides. 3.Species: Manufacturer's option. 4.Moisture Content: Seasoned, 19 percent maximum, 7 percent minimum. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 5.Grade for Chord and Web Members: As determined by truss manufacturer. B.Metal Connector Plates: 1.Metal connector plates shall be manufactured by a Truss Plate Institute (TPI) member plate manufacturer and shall not be less than 0.036 in. thick (20 gauge) and shall meet or exceed ASTM A653/A653M grade 33, and galvanized coating shall meet or exceed ASTM A924/924M, coating designation G60. Working stresses in steel are to be applied to effectiveness ratios for plates as determined by test and in accordance with the Standard. 2.In highly corrosive environments, special applied coatings or stainless steel may be required. 3.At the request of the Building Designer, a TPI member plate manufacturer shall furnish a certified record that materials comply with steel specifications C.Connectors, Fasteners, and Metal Framing Anchors: 1.Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. 2.Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. 3.Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. 4.Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A; ASTM A 563. 5.Metal Framing Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653, G60. 6.Connectors: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653, G60. 7.Connectors: Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653; ASTM A 591, Coating Class C. 2.2 MANUFACTURING A.Trusses shall be manufactured to meet the quality requirements of the Standard and in accordance with the information provided in the final approved Truss Design Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. B.Do not allow any trades (ie-plumbing) to cut through truss members, unless approved by the structural engineer and truss manufacturer. C.Bracing (both temporary and permanent) shall be installed per the truss manufacturer’s specifications. D.Trusses shall be handled during manufacturing, delivery and by the Contractor at the job site so as not to be subjected to excessive bending. 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E.Trusses shall be unloaded in a manner so as to minimize lateral strain. Trusses shall be protected from damage that might result from on-site activities and environmental conditions. Trusses shall be handled in such a way so as to prevent toppling when banding is removed. F.Contractor shall be responsible for the handling, installation, and temporary restraint/ bracing of the Trusses in a good workmanlike manner and in accordance with the recommendations set forth in the latest edition of BCSI. G.Apparent damage to Trusses, if any, shall be reported to Truss Manufacturer prior to erection. H.Trusses shall be set and secured level and plumb, and in correct location. Each Truss shall be held in correct alignment until specified permanent restraint and bracing is installed. I.Cutting and altering of Trusses is not permitted. If any Truss should become broken, damaged, or altered, written concurrence and approval by a Registered Design Professional is required. J.Concentrated loads shall not be placed on top of Trusses until all specified restraint and bracing has been installed and decking is permanently nailed in place. Specifically avoid stacking full bundles of plywood or other concentrated loads on top of Trusses. K.Truss Submittals and any supplementary information provided by the Truss Manufacturer shall be provided by the Contractor to the individual or organization responsible for the installation of the Trusses. L.Trusses shall be permanently restrained and braced in a manner consistent with good building practices as outlined in BCSI and in accordance with the requirements of the Construction Documents. Trusses shall furthermore be anchored or restrained to prevent out-of-plane movement so as to keep all Truss members from simultaneously buckling together in the same direction. Such permanent lateral restraint shall be accomplished by: (a) anchorage to solid end walls; (b) permanent diagonal bracing in the plane of the web members; or (c) other suitable means. M.Materials used in temporary and permanent restraint and bracing shall be furnished by Contractor. 3.2 Quality Control A.A representative from the wood truss manufacturer shall inspect all wood roof trusses and verify that they are installed and braced per the manufacturer’s requirements and the requirements of the WTCA/ TPI guidelines. The representative shall look for and identify any truss defects or damage that may have occurred during manufacturing, transportation, or installation. The costs associated with these inspections shall be paid for by the contractor and included in the bid pricing from the truss manufacturer / supplier. The truss company shall provide a letter that states that the installation and bracing of the trusses has been Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 inspected and appears to be per the truss manufacturer’s guidelines, instructions, and specifications. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 07213-A - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide thermal insulation and vapor retarders. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Submit for approval test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Blanket/Batt Insulation: 1.Manufacturers: Johns Manville Building Insulations; Knauf Insulation; Thermafiber, Inc.; Thermal Design; or approved equal. 2.Application: Thermal insulation at underside of roofs, over all interior spaces. 3.Type: Kraft paper-faced mineral fiber. a.Standard: ASTM C 665 b.Accessories: Fasteners and tapes. c.Minimum R value = 36 B.Roof and Deck Insulation: 1.Manufacturers: Hunter Panels; Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp. - Engineered Wood Products; or approved equal. 2.Application: Exterior roofs and decks. 3.Type: Polyisocyanurate. C.Foamed in place CMU Wall Insulation: 1.Manufacturers: Core-Fill, or approved equal. 2.Application: Open Cells and Voids in exterior CMU walls. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D.Rigid Cellular Extruded Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 1.Manufacturers: Owens Corning, Styrofoam, or approved equal. 2.Application: On interior side of walls in conditioned spaces. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. Provide full thickness in one layer over entire area, tightly fitting around penetrations. B.Protect installed insulation and vapor retarder. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 07410-A - PREFORMED METAL ROOFING PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide sheet metal roofing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Sheet Metal Roofing: 1.Manufacturers: CAP-SEAM; Berridge Manufacturing or approved equal. 2.Seam Type: Standing-seam. a.Panel profile, size and color to be approved by Architect. 3.Metal: Hot-Dipped Galvanized. a.Standard: ASTM A446-85 Grade C G90 Coating A525-86 24 Gauge core steel. 4.Finish: Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating a.Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed before installation. B.Auxiliary Materials: 1.Provide components required for a complete panel system, including trim, closures, clips, gaskets, fillers, and similar items. Match materials and finish of preformed panels. 2.Rosin-sized building paper. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.Asphalt saturated organic felt underlayment. 4.Polyethylene underlayment. 5.Rubberized asphalt underlayment. 6.Bituminous isolation coating. 7.Batten bars and strips. 2.2 FABRICATION A.Panels shall have 18" on-center seam spacing with a seam height of 1". B.Snap-on seams shall be 1" in height and shall contain a Weather Seal. C.Concealed anchor clips shall be spaced as required to meet uplift loads (maximum of 24" on center). D.When required, Panel assembly shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories Label UL90, pursuant to Construction Number 296 and applicable Fire Ratings. E.Certification shall be submitted, based on independent testing laboratory, indicating no measurable water penetration or air leakage beyond allowable tolerances through the system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-331-86 and E-283-84. F.Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements. G.Metal Gauge: Fabricate panels and accessories with not less than 26 gauge steel sheet. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Comply with SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual recommendations. Comply with accessory manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with roofing system to ensure weathertight performance. B.Anchor securely to structure to withstand inward and outward loads. C.Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion. D.Clean and grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 07530-A - ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide elastomeric membrane roofing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. C.Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. Include labor and materials to repair or replace defective materials. 1.Warranty Period: 10 years. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Listing: UL Class A external fire exposure. C.Listing: FM Class I construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.EPDM Membrane Roofing: 1.Manufacturers: Carlisle SynTec; Firestone Building Products Company; GAF Materials Corporation; GenFlex Roofing Systems; Johns Manville International, Inc. 2.Type: Fully adhered. 3.Membrane: EPDM, 60 mils, internally reinforced. a.Standard: ASTM D 4637, II. 4.Walkways: Walkway board. 5.Ballast: Washed, rounded riverbed gravel where indicated on drawings. 6.Cover Board over Insulation: Glass-mat, water resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4” thick. 7.Color: White 8.Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 9.Insulation Substrate Board: 5/8” thick Glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum, Type X. a.Standard: ASTM C 1177. 10.Vapor Retarder: Reinforced polyethylene. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Inspect substrate and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means acceptance of substrate. B.Comply with roof system manufacturer's instructions and recommendations; clean, prime and prepare substrate. C.Install insulation with tightly butted joints and neatly fitted around penetrations. D.Begin roof installation only in presence of manufacturer's representative. Minimize seams and shingle overlaps to shed water. E.Where applicable, distribute ballast uniformly to 10 pounds per square foot or more as required by FM. Obtain approval of ballast weight before loading roof. F.Install walkway protection or pavers over an additional layer of membrane at locations indicated and where required to provide access to roof mounted equipment. G.Restore or replace damaged components. Protect work from damage. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 07620-A - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Flashings and counter flashings, and fabricated sheet metal items, as indicated on drawings. B.Accessories 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.Sheet Metal Flashings: Conform to the following criteria of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.Coping: SMACNA, Detail Figure 4-12B similar 2.Roof Penetration Flashing: SMACNA Figure 4-19A. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years documented experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A.Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion. Provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B.Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A.Concealed locations - Galvanized Steel: ASTM A526/A526M, G90 zinc coating; 24 gage thick steel. B.Exposed locations – Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000 Prefinished Steel: 24 gauge thick, color to be selected by Architect. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners: Galvanized steel or same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. B.Primer: Zinc molybdate or galvanized iron type C.Protective Backing Paint: FS TT-C-494, Bituminous D.Sealant: Type A specified in Section 07900 E.Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I F.Solder: ASTM B32; 50/50 type Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.3 FABRICATION A.Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B.Fabricate cleats of type sheet metal; same material as sheet, minimum 2 inches wide, interlocking with sheet. C.Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D.Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E.Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. F.Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. G.Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. H.Seal metal joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set and nailing strips located. C.Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B.Paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B.Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C.Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D.Seal metal joints watertight. E.Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. F.Seal metal joints watertight. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 SCHEDULE A.Flashings associated roofing including valley, hip, ridge, eave, gable edge, as required by roofing manufacturer for roofing system B.Counter flashings at roofing terminations (over roofing base flashings) C.Roofing penetration flashings, for pipes and equipment supports D.All flashings that are visible shall be prefinished or painted to match adjacent materials as approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 07710-A - ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide manufactured roof specialties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Insurance Requirements: FM approval or acceptance. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Gravity Air Vents: 1.Manufacturers: Berger Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal. 2.Material: Aluminum. B.Vent Stack Flashing: 1.Manufacturers: Thaler Metal Industries Ltd., or approved equal. 2.Material: Aluminum. C.Fascia Systems, Extruded Aluminum: 1.Manufacturers: ATAS International, Inc.; Metal-Era, Inc.; MM Systems Corporation, or approved equal. 2.Materials: 0.60 inch thick, extruded aluminum. 3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel. D.Fascia Batten and Panel Systems, Extruded Aluminum: 1.Manufacturers: ATAS International Metal-Era Inc., or approved equal. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.Materials: 0.60 inch thick, extruded aluminum. 3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel. E.Fascia for Single-Ply Roofing, Extruded Aluminum: 1.Manufacturers: ATAS International, Inc.; Metal-Era, Inc. or approved equal. 2.Materials: Fascia, resilient gasket or compression spring, 28 gauge (.018 inch) zinc-coated steel water dam, and aluminum fascia clip. 3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel. F.Fascia and Gravel Stops, Aluminum Sheet: 1.Manufacturers: ATAS International, Inc.; Metal-Era, Inc. or approved equal. 2.Aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick interlocking with 28 gauge (.018 inch) formed zinc-coated steel water dam/hold down clip, compression clamp, and compression pad. 3.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel. G.Fascia Panel Support Systems: 1.Horizontal girts and vertical framing members sized for required wind pressure loading. 2.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel. H.Elastic Roof Expansion Joint Covers: 1.Metal flanged elastic-sheet bellows-type joint system, membrane, and metal flanges compatible with substrate. 2.Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Comply with accessory manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with roofing system to ensure weathertight performance. Anchor securely to structure to withstand inward and outward loads. B.Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion. C.Test and operate units; clean, lubricate and adjust moving parts. END OF SECTION 07720-A ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 07720-A - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide roof accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Heat and Smoke Vent Insurance Requirements: UL and FM approval or acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ridge and Soffit Vents: 1. Manufacturers: Trimline Building Products, a Division of Diversi-Plast; or approved equal. 2. Material: Corrugated plastic. B. Portable Rooftop Pipe, Duct and Equipment Supports: 1. Manufacturers: Advanced Support Products, Inc.; MAPA Products; MIRO Industries, Inc.; PHP Systems and Design; Universal Support Systems, LLC; or approved equal. 2. Material: Galvanized steel. C. Insulated Roof Hatches with Metal Lid: 1. Manufacturers: Bilco; Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal. 2. Material: Zinc coated steel. D. Insulated Heat and Smoke Vents with Plastic Dome: 1. Manufacturers: Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal. 2. Material: Aluminum with clear anodized finish. E. Insulated Heat and Smoke Vents with Metal Lid: 1. Manufacturers: Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal. 2. Material: Zinc coated steel. 07720-A ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 F. Safety Railing System for Roof Hatches: 1. Manufacturers: Alaco Ladder Co.; or approved equal. 2. Material: Zinc coated steel. G. Rooftop Ladders and Platforms: 1. Manufacturers: Alaco Ladder Co.; or approved equal. 2. Material: Aluminum, painted. H. Rooftop Pedestal Paver Supports: 1. Manufacturers: Bison Deck Supports; Reed & Graham, Inc. Geosynthetics Division; or approved equal. 2. Material: Thermoplastic polypropylene. I. Prefabricated Curb and Equipment Support Units: 1. Manufacturers: ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation; or approved equal. 2. Material: Steel, 14 gauge (.0747 inch), hot dip galvanized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with accessory manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with roofing system to ensure weathertight performance. Anchor securely to structure to withstand inward and outward loads. B. Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion. C. Test and operate units; clean, lubricate and adjust moving parts. Leave units ready for field painting. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 07900-A - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide joint sealers and fillers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.Include manufacturer’s full range of color and finish options if additional selection is required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Each joint type. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces, Silicone: 1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Dow Corning; GE Silicones; or approved equal. 2.Materials: Two component silicone sealant. B.Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces, Urethane: 1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Pecora Corp.; Sika Corp.; or approved equal. 2.Materials: Two-component urethane sealant. C.Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces, Preformed Compression Seals: 1.Manufacturers: Watson-Bowman Acme Corp.; or approved equal. 2.Materials: Preformed precompressed foam sealant. D.Exterior Joints in Horizontal Surfaces, Urethane: 1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Pecora Corp.; Sandell Construction Solutions; Sika Corp.; Sonneborn; or approved equal. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.Materials: Self-leveling urethane sealant, ASTM C 920. E.Exterior Paving Joint Fillers, Bituminous: 1.Manufacturers: As submitted. 2.Materials: Bituminous fiber. F.Interior Joints, Limited Movement, Acrylic: 1.Manufacturers: Tremco; Bostik; Pecora Corporation; Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products; or approved equal. 2.Materials: Acrylic-emulsion, ASTM C 834. 3.VOC Content: Less than 50 g/L. interior Joints, Sanitary Silicone: 4.Manufacturers: Tremco; Dow Corning; GE Advanced Materials; or approved equal. 5.Materials: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920. 6.VOC Content: Less than 50 g/L. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means acceptance of substrates. B.Provide sealants in colors as selected from manufacturer's standards. C.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Clean and prime joints, and install bond breakers, backer rods and sealant as recommended by manufacturers. D.Depth shall equal width up to 1/2 inch wide; depth shall equal 1/2 width for joints more than 1/2 inch wide. E.Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged sealants. Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 08111-A – STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide steel doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Standards: ANSI/SDI-100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. C.Performance Standards: 1.Thermal-Rated Assemblies at Exterior: ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976. 2.Sound-Rated Assemblies at Mechanical Rooms: ASTM E 1408, and ASTM E 413. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Exterior Steel Doors: 1.Manufacturers: Amweld Building Products; Presray Critical Containment Solutions, a Division of Pawling Corp.; Steel Door Institute; Steelcraft Manufacturing; Windsor Republic Doors; or approved equal. 2.Material: Minimum 16-gauge galvanized steel sheet. 3.Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, thermally insulated. 4.Finish: Factory finished. 5.Accessories: a.Sightproof stationary louvers. b.Glazing stops. c.Silencers. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B.Exterior Steel Frames: 1.Manufacturers: Amweld Building Products; Steel Door Institute; Steelcraft; Windsor Republic Doors; or approved equal. 2.Material: Minimum 14-gauge galvanized steel sheet. 3.Corners: Mitered or coped. 4.Type: Welded. 5.Finish: Factory finished. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Fabricate work to be rigid, neat and free from seams, defects, dents, warp, buckle, and exposed fasteners. Install doors and frames in compliance with SDI-100, NFPA 80, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B.Provide thermally improved doors with maximum U-value of 0.24 BTU/hr./square foot degree F (ASTM C 236) for all exterior doors and elsewhere as noted. C.Provide acoustically improved doors with minimum STC of 33 (ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413) where indicated. D.Hardware: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware on final schedule. Provide for 3 silencers on single doorframes; 2 on double doorframes. E.Shop Finish: Clean, treat and prime paint all work with rust-inhibiting primer comparable with finish paint specified in Division 9 section. Provide asphalt emulsion sound deadening coating on concealed frame interiors. F.Touch up damaged coatings ready to receive finish painting. END OF SECTION SECTION 08560-A - SPECIAL FUNCTION WINDOWS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide aluminum, medium-duty commercial sliding service windows. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: C. R. Laurence, or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A.Model: Basis of design is SW5600A 1.Frames: Extruded aluminum 2.Finish: Clear anodized 3.Glazing: ½” insulated 4.Screens: Provide at both openings 5.Security: Keyed Lock PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 1.Fabricate windows to conform to AAMA standards and to accept glass specified. 2.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. 3.Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 08710-A - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide door hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications sections. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts are finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C.Final Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Schedule shall be coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1.Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a.Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item b.Name and manufacturer of each item. c.Fastenings and other pertinent information. d.Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e.Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc contained in schedule. f.Mounting locations for hardware. g.Door and frame sizes and materials. h.Keying information and Door index. i.Detailed information of existing conditions as they relate to new hardware being installed in existing doors and frames. 2.Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. 3.Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D.Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, closers, stops, coordinators & flushbolts, etc.) from a single manufacturer. No exceptions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1.Cylinders a.Best – No substitutions. 2.Locksets a.Schlage b.Corbin Russwin 3.Push/Pull Units a.Rockwood b.Trimco – BBW – Quality 4.Hinges a.Hager b.Stanley 5.Closers a.Norton 6.Door Holders a.Glynn-Johnson 7.Flushbolts a.Glynn-Johnson 8.Kick, Mop and Armor Plates a.Rockwood b.Trimco – BBW – Quality 9.Door Stripping and Seals a.National Guard Products b.Zero 10.Hardware Finishes: Satin chrome unless noted otherwise. a.Non-Metal products such as seals and frame silencers shall be gray or black. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 11.Auxiliary Materials: a.Door Trim Units: Edge trim, viewers, knockers, and mail drop, and related trim. b.Stops and overhead door holders. c.Weatherstripping and thresholds. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A.Each Door opening indicated in the Door Schedule is designated a hardware set corresponding to the sets below. The required hardware elements are listed without specific brand or part number. The Final Hardware Schedule described above shall indicate this detailed specification based on the elements listed in the hardware sets. The contractor shall include all pieces and accessories necessary for the complete and correct operation of the door assembly whether or not they are listed in the hardware sets. B.The standard of quality for different hardware elements is listed in the following articles. This only represents a standard and the specific product or series is not required. If the door opening requires a product superior to the quality standard in order to achieve proper function, that product should be submitted. If a quality standard is not listed for a particular required hardware element, the architect reserves the right to reject a product for reasons of quality or aesthetics. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A.Manufacturer’s Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer’s products that have manufacturers’ name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.Manufacturer’s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders and arms of closers. B.Base Metals: Products, hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated C.Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D.Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including “prepared for paint” surfaces to receive painted finish. E.Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 F.Provide all necessary filler plates as required for complete and professional installation. 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A.Match owners standard lock cylinder. Coordinate with the Owner prior to submitting finished hardware sets. B.Equip locks with cylinder type as indicated. Furnish construction cores for all locksets and cylinders. Provide security functions as indicated. C.Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. D.Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. E.Key Materials: Provide keys of nickel silver only. F.Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. Deliver keys to Owner. 2.5 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS A.Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. B.Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors . Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 2.6 CLOSERS: A.Size of units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Factory hand, tag, and pre-size all springs prior to jobsite delivery. No exceptions. 2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A.General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. B.Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C.Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied. D.Thresholds: provide Accessibility Code compliant type at entrance and exit doors. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Contractor to provide cores and keys. B.Follow guidelines of DHI “Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware” and hardware manufacturers' instructions. C.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. D.Adjust operation, clean and protect. 3.2 SCHEDULE A.Hardware Schedule: HW-1 105, 106, 109, 110A 3 Ea.Butt Hinges 1 Ea.Classroom Lockset 1 Ea.Deadlock 1 Ea.Overhead Stop 1 Set Silencers 1 Ea.Door Bottom 1 Ea.Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip HW-2 103 3 Ea.Butt Hinges 1 Ea.Deadlock 1 Set Silencers HW-3 107 4 Ea. 180° Butt Hinges 2 Ea. Flushbolts 1 Ea. Deadlock – keyed only, no thumbturn on inside 1 Ea. Bottom sweep mount on inside face 1 Ea. Weatherstrip HW-4 102A, 104A 3 Ea.Butt Hinges 1 Ea.Pull 1 Ea.Push plate 1 Ea.Closer 1 Ea.Deadlock – Keyed only, no thumbturn on inside 1 Ea.Wall Stop 1 1 1 Set Ea. Ea. Silencers Threshold Weatherstrip Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 HW-5 102B, 102C, 102D, 102E, 104B, 104C 3 Ea.Butt Hinges 1 Ea.Privacy Lockset 1 Ea.Wall Stop 1 Set Silencers END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 08920-A - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide louvers and vents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Aluminum Wall Louvers: 1.Manufacturers: Airline Products, Airolite; Construction Specialties; Industrial Louvers; McGill Architectural Products; Nystrom Building Products, Inc.; or approved equal. 2.Material: Aluminum extrusions. 3.Blades: Horizontal sightproof drainable blades. 4.Blade Type: Fixed. 5.Finish: As selected by Architect. 6.Auxiliary Materials: a.Bird screens. b.Insect screens. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B.Steel Wall Louvers: 1.Manufacturers: McGill Architectural Products; or approved equal. 2.Material: Galvanized steel. 3.Blades: Horizontal drainable fixed blades. 4.Blades: Horizontal non-drainable, fixed blades. 5.Blade Type: Fixed. 6.Finish: As selected by Architect. 7.Auxiliary Materials: a.Bird screens. b.Insect screens. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B.Comply with AMCA Standard 500 and provide units with AMCA Certification rating seal. Comply with SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual except as otherwise indicated. C.Provide separate continuous sills where needed to prevent water penetration. Maintain equal blade-to-blade and blade-to-frame spacing for uniform appearance. Provide concealed vertical mullions and reinforcement as needed. D.Provide anchors, supports and accessories as needed. Provide gaskets, flashings and fillers as necessary to make installation watertight. E.Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/172016 SECTION 09670-A – DECORATIVE MORTAR SYSTEM FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.Furnish and install the mortar flooring system as specified and indicated. Prior to installation, provide decontamination and cleaning as specified. The term “mortar flooring system” as used in this section will include the primers, resin systems and aggregate materials, topcoats, cove building materials, and any related materials for the project. 2.Complete the mortar flooring system installation in strict accordance with these specifications, the coating system manufacturer’s most current requirements for surface preparation, application and inspection, and the instructions for safety. In the event of a conflict between these specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions, the more stringent requirements will apply. 3.The Contractor shall be responsible for providing ventilation, initial cleaning, inspection, supervision, dust control and equipment protection as specified herein and related sections for the work associated with this Section. The Contractor is responsible for all other work associated with this Section including protection of existing equipment and structures in the work area, surface preparation, flooring application, curing, coating repair, rework, inspection and supervision. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Division 1 General Requirements 1.3 REFERENCES: 1.Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Specifications and Standards: 1. SSPC-PA-3:“A Guide to Safety in Paint Application”. 2.SSPC-SP-13: “Surface Preparation of Concrete”. 2.NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) 1.NACE Publication 6D-173, “A Manual for Painter Safety”. 2.NACE Publication 6G-164, “Surface Preparation Abrasives for Industrial Maintenance Painting”. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2016 3.ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 1.ASTM D4541 - L.R. “Standard Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings using Portable Adhesion Testers”. 2.ASTM E337 - L.R. “Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer”. 3.ASTM D4263-83 (1999), “Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method”. 4.ASTM F1869-98, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride”. 5.ASTM D4414-95, “Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notched Gages”. 6.ICRI Guide No. 03732, “Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings and Polymer Overlays,” International Concrete Repair Institute, Sterling, VA. 7.ASTM 4262, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface pH of Acid Etched Concrete”. 8.ASTM D4259, “Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete”. 1.4 DEFINITIONS 1.Terms used in this Section are defined as follows: 1 Mortar System Flooring Work The aspects involved with proper application of the specified high solids flooring system, including but not limited to cleaning, surface preparation, mixing, application, curing, and quality control. 2.Approved Materials The coating system, blast media, and specified materials for this coating work. 3.Wet Film Thickness The primer or coating films’ actual thickness immediately following application. Wet film thickness is measured in mils or thousandths of an inch (0.001”) and is abbreviated WFT. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 4.Dry Film Thickness The primer or coating films’ actual thickness following curing and drying. Dry film thickness is measured in mils or thousandths of an inch (0.001") and is abbreviated DFT. 5.Coating System Refers to the approved coating Manufacturer, Manufacturer abbreviated as CSM in this Section. 6.Manufacturer’s Technical Representative(s) Refers to the technical representative(s) of the approved CSM. 7.A/E Architectural or Engineering Firm. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.The Contractor shall meet the following requirements: 1.The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the workmanship and quality of the mortar flooring system installation. Inspections by the Owner, the Engineer, or others do not limit the Contractor’s responsibility. 2.Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials for flooring.Do not use materials from previously opened containers. 3.Use only products of the approved CSM. Provide the same products for repairs as for the original coating. 4.If any requirements of this specification are contradicted by a referenced standard or vice-versa, the matter shall be resolved in writing by the A/E or its representative. 5.Make available at all times all locations and phases of the work for access and inspection by the Engineer, the Owner, or other personnel designated by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide ventilation, egress, and whatever other means are required for the Owner, Engineer, or designated personnel to access and exit the work areas safely. 6.Conduct work so that the mortar flooring system is installed as specified herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that the coating system is installed as specified herein. The A/E shall inspect the work to determine conformance with the contract documents. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 7.The Contractor’s Supervisor shall be on site at all times and will be thoroughly familiar with the work in progress. This Supervisor shall have authority to receive and execute all direction provided by the A/E or the Owner. 8.The methods of construction shall be in accordance with all requirements of this specification and the best trade practices. Any changes in the mortar flooring system installation requirements shall be allowed only with the written approval of the A/E. 9.Installation shall be performed by an applicator having satisfactory experience in the application of these or similar materials or with on-site consultation by a qualified field service representative of the CSM. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1.Submit the following prior to commencing with any phase of the work covered by this Section: 1.Manufacturer’s current printed recommendations and product data sheets for all mortar flooring system products including performance criteria, surface preparation and applications, volatile organic compound (V.O.C.) Data, and safety requirements. 2.Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materials brought on- site including all coating system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast media. 3.Contractor’s written verification that the personnel who will perform this work have the required experience as specified in 1.05 1.9. This document must list the names of all of the Contractor’s supervisors and tradespeople who will work on the project covered by this Section. 4.List of cleaning and thinner solutions allowed by the CSM. 5.Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation for Coating System Materials. 2.Owner, contractor, and manufacturer’s representative shall review and mutually agree upon color, grade, and final texture of coating system before starting installation. The acceptance of a sample will constitute the job standard by which installation will proceed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.Material shall be delivered to project site in manufacturer’s original unopened containers. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture, direct sunlight and temperatures below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. 3.Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the Owner solely for this purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, clean-up and associated operations, and storage of coating materials related debris before authorized disposal, to these areas. All materials are to be stored on pallets or similar storage/handling skids off the ground. 4.Mix all coating materials in a designated enclosed mixing area. This enclosed area must protect the mixing operation and materials from direct sunlight, inclement weather, freezing, or other means of damage or contamination. Protect all other concrete and metallic surfaces and finishes from any spillage of material(s) within the mixing area. 5.Do not use drain piping for disposal of coating materials. 6.The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures necessary to avert potential hazards associated with the mortar flooring system materials as described on the pertinent Material Safety Data Sheets or container labels. 7.Deliver all materials to the job site in new, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the CSM’s name and label. 1.Labels on all material containers must show the following information: 1.Name or title of product. 2.Manufacturer’s batch number. 3.Manufacturer’s name. 4.Generic type of material. 5.Application and mixing instructions. 6.Hazardous material identification label. 7.Shelf life date. 2.All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to the materials. 3.All materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage or loss of label. 4.Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, prematurely opened, diluted materials, or materials which have exceeded their shelf life. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.Surfaces and surrounding air temperatures must exceed 55 degrees F but must be less than 90 degrees F, with materials at not less than 70 degrees F during application. 2.Do not apply coating materials when dust is being generated. 3.If existing facility lighting is not adequate for flooring system application, the Contractor shall provide all temporary lighting during the work equivalent to one 200 watt explosion proof incandescent lamp per 100 square feet of work area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 1.Primer: Series 201 Epoxoprime, two-component, moisture tolerant, penetrating modified polyamine cured epoxy primer. 2.Intermediate Mortar: Series 223 Deco-Trowel. Series 223 is an aggregate filled, modified polyamine cured epoxy resin decorative mortar flooring system. 3.Grout and top Coat: Series 284 two-component, modified polyamine cured epoxy glaze. Thickness and number of coats will vary depending on desired finish. 4.Coving: Use Series 223 Deco-Trowel mortar to form cant or rolled radius coves. 2.2 MANUFACTURER 1.Tnemec Company, Incorporated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 1.Protection Mask, cover, or otherwise protect all surfaces, equipment, and finishes not to receive the mortar flooring system specified in this Section. 2.Strictly follow the approved CSM’s written instructions and the requirements of this specification regarding all aspects of mortar flooring work including: mixing, application, recoat times and curing. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.Mock-up 1.Prior to commencing the installation, the Contractor shall install with the owner’s approval, a mutually agreed upon mock-up test sample to show final color and appearance of the mortar flooring system. 3.2 PREPARATION 1.Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days. Verify dryness by testing for moisture with a “plastic film tape-down test”. (Reference ASTM D4263) 2.Shot-blast or mechanically abrade to remove laitance, curing compounds, sealers and other contaminants and to provide surface profile. (Reference ASTM D4259, ICRI CSP 4-9). 3.Vacuum clean concrete to remove all dirt, dust, and other loose materials. 4.After mechanically abrading, verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of any contaminants, which could adversely affect the adhesion of the flooring system. 5.If between final surface preparation work and mortar flooring system application, contamination of the prepared and cleaned substrates occurs, recleaning shall be required until the requirements of this Section are met. 3.3 INSTALLATION 1.Primer: The primer shall be mechanically mixed, applied and cured in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply uniformly at a film thickness of 6 to 8 dry mils. 2.Cant Cove or rolled radius cove bases shall be installed in accordance with the CSM’s written instructions and as indicated on the Standard Flooring Details. 3.Intermediate Mortar: The material shall be mixed, applied and cured in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply by trowel to 1/4" thickness. Note to Specifier: Floor and wall transitions can be formed to have a cant cove or rolled radius cove. This will provide a seamless wall to floor transition. 4.Top Coat: The high-solids, top coat shall be mechanically mixed, applied and cured in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and applied at a film thickness of 8 to 10 dry mils. Skid resistance properties can be adjusted by the film thickness and number of topcoats and should be determined at the time the mock-up is completed. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 5.Finish Coat (Optional): The high-solids, orange-peel, epoxy finish coat shall be mechanically mixed, applied and cured in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply at a film thickness of 4 to 6 dry mils. 6.Fill all crack and recessed joints, such as control and construction joints, with Tnemec Series 201 Epoxoprime and fumed silica. When filled, joint should be flush with the floor surface. 3.4 CLEANUP 1.Remove waste materials, rubbish, and debris and dispose of them at the owner’s direction. Leave work areas in a clean and tidy condition. 3.5 PROTECTION 1.Protect the completed work from water, airborne particles or other surface contaminants until cured for a minimum of 24 hours after application. 2.Protect from traffic, physical abuse, immersion and chemical exposure until the complete system has thoroughly cured for 24 hours at 75 degrees F. For different temperatures, consult the manufacturer’s representative about curing times. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION AND TESTING 1.Inspection by the Engineer, Owner or others does not limit the Contractor’s responsibilities for quality as specified herein or as required by the CSM’s instructions. 2.The Contractor shall perform the Q.C. procedures listed below in conjunction with the requirements of this Section. The Engineer will inspect the work to determine conformance to the contract documents. 1.Degree of Cleanliness. Visually inspect the degree of cleanliness of substrates to meet the requirements of this Section. The pH of the concrete substrates will be measured using pH indicating papers. pH testing is to be performed once every 100 sq. ft. of surface area to be coated. Acceptable pH values shall be between 8.0 and 11.0 as measured by a full- range (1-12) color indicating pH paper with readable color calibrations and a scale at whole numbers (minimum). Use Hydrion Insta-Chek Jumbo 0-13 or 1-12 or equal. The paper shall be touched to the surface once using moderate finger pressure. The surface shall not be wiped or moved laterally to disturb the surface during pH testing. Following the one touch, lift the paper vertically to not “wipe” the surface. Compare the color indicated Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 with the scale provided and record the pH. Note: If the surface of the concrete is dry, it is not possible to take a pH measurement. However, pH values are still important on dry surfaces. When a dry concrete substrate is encountered for a pH test, the surface where the pH test is to be performed shall be sprayed lightly with distilled, deionized water from a commercially available spray bottle that has been properly rinsed to preclude any dissolved solids. The spray shall just wet the surface to a “shiny” appearance. Wait 60 seconds to allow chemical equilibria to be established and then test the pH of the water on the surface. Perform this test in accordance with ASTM D4262. 2.Concrete Surface Profile Using the replicate rubber specimens inspect the concrete surface profile in accordance with ICRI Guide No. 03732. This should be performed once for every 100 square feet of surface area to be coated. 3.Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of each shift using a thermometer and measure and record substrate temperature once every two hours using a surface thermometer. 4.Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift using a sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337. 5.Inspect correct mixing of coating materials in accordance with the CSM’s instructions. 6.Inspect and record that the “pot life” of coating materials used are not exceeded during installation. 7.Measure and record the thickness of the coating system using a notched gauge in accordance with ASTM D4414 for Wet Film Thickness at least once every 10 sq. ft. of coating area. 8.Perform moisture tests on concrete as follows: 1.Once for every 500 square feet of surface area to be coated, perform the plastic sheet test in accordance with ASTM D4263. If moisture is indicated, proceed to step 2 below. 2.Perform calcium chloride moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D1869 once for every 1000 square feet of surface area to be coated. The maximum limit for moisture vapor emissions rate should be 3.0 lbs. per 24 hours per 1000 sq. ft. If tests indicate rates higher than 3.0, consult with Tnemec’s Technical Service Department for further evaluation. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 9.Inspect to verify proper curing of the mortar flooring system as recommended by the CSM. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 09700-A - SPECIAL WALL SURFACES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide wall coverings and surface preparation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. C.Extra Stock: Submit extra stock equal to 2 unopened rolls of each type of wall covering used. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Performance: Fire performance meeting requirements of building code and local authorities. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels: 1.Manufacturers: Crane Composites; or approved equal. 2.Material: Glasbord Panels: a.Type Fire-X b.Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s full range. c.Size: as required to cover areas indicated on drawings d.Moldings: Provide harmonizing PVC moldings. 3.Surfaseal Surface Protection: Provide manufacturer’s surface protection for fiberglass reinforced panels. 4.Division Bars, Corner Trim: Panel manufacturer’s standard length extruded vinyl pieces; longest length possible to eliminate joints. 5.Fasteners: Noncorrosive drive rivets 6.Adhesive: provide panel adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Acclimatize materials, prime and seal substrates, test substrates for moisture content and prepare surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. B.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply adhesive and install with seams plumb and overlapped and double-cut to ensure tight closure except where pattern would not match. Do not place seams within 6 inches of corners. C.Remove air bubbles, blisters, wrinkles and other defects; horizontal seams are not permitted. Remove excess adhesive immediately; clean walls and protect surfaces. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 09800-A - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide high performance coatings and surface preparation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. C.Extra Stock: Provide 2 unopened gallons of each coating and color used in the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Regulations: Compliance with VOC and environmental regulations. C.Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. 1.Provide 4 foot x 4-foot mock-ups of each type of surface. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Floor and Wall Coatings: 1.Manufacturers: Duron Paints & Wallcoverings; Key Resin Co.; Rodda Paint; or approved equal. 2.Type: Acrylic component floor coating systems. 3.Type: Epoxy wall coatings. B.Sealers for Concrete and Masonry: 1.Manufacturers: Triangle Coatings, Inc.; or approved equal. 2.Type: Non-visible penetrating sealer, graffiti guard. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C.Coatings for Concrete and Masonry: 1.Manufacturers: Dur-A-Flex, Inc.; ICI Dulux Paint Centers, Inc.; Modac Products Sonneborn Building Products; Key Resin Co.; PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. - Pittsburgh Paints; Rodda Paint; SGM, Inc.; Tamms Industries, Inc.; Tnemec; United Gilsonite Laboratories; or approved equal. First-line commercial-quality products for all elastomeric coating systems. 2.Type: Alkali-resistant primers/sealers. 3.Type: Acrylic coatings. 4.Type: Elastomeric coatings. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Inspect surfaces, report unsatisfactory conditions in writing; beginning work means acceptance of substrate. B.Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation, priming and coating work. Coordinate with work of other sections. C.At existing areas to be repainted, remove blistered or peeling paint to sound substrates. Remove chalk deposits and mildew and wash all surfaces with mild detergent. Perform related minor preparation including caulk and glazing compounds. Spot prime bare areas before priming and painting as specified. D.Match approved mock-ups for color, texture, and pattern. Re-coat or remove and replace work which does not match or shows loss of adhesion. Clean up, touch up and protect work. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 09900-A - PAINTING PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide painting and surface preparation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.Include manufacturer’s full range of color and finish options if additional selection is required. C.Extra Stock: Submit 2 unopened gallons of each paint and color used in the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Regulations: Compliance with VOC and environmental regulations. C.Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. 1.Provide 4 FT x 4 FT mock-ups of each type of surface. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Painting: 1.Manufacturers of Regular Paints: Benjamin Moore; Duron Paints & Wallcoverings; ICI Devoe Coatings; Kelly-Moore Paints; Miller Paint Co. / Devine Color; PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. - Pittsburgh Paints; Pratt & Lambert Paints; Rodda Paint; Sherwin-Williams; United Gilsonite Laboratories; or approved equal. 2.Manufacturers of Multicolor Coatings: Polomyx; Zolatone; or approved equal. 3.Application: Interior unfinished surfaces. 4.Application: Exterior unfinished surfaces. 5.Primary Coating Type: reference room finish schedule. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Inspect surfaces, report unsatisfactory conditions in writing; beginning work means acceptance of substrate. B.Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation, priming and coating work. Coordinate with work of other sections. C.At existing areas to be repainted, remove blistered or peeling paint to sound substrates. Remove chalk deposits and mildew and wash all surfaces with mild detergent. Perform related minor preparation including caulk and glazing compounds. Spot prime bare areas before priming and painting as specified. D.Match approved mock-ups for color, texture, and pattern. Re-coat or remove and replace work which does not match or shows loss of adhesion. Clean up, touch up and protect work. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 10425-A - IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.The work of this section includes signs and identifying devices. B.Related work: 1.Documents affecting work of this section include but are not necessarily limited to: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections in Division 1 of these specifications. 2.Section 09800 - Special Coatings 3.Section 09900 - Painting 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A.Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 sections. B.Product data: after the contractor has received the owners notice to proceed, submit: 1.Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this section; 2.Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show sign copy, required mounting locations, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this section with the work of adjacent trades. 3.Color chart showing colors and patterns available in the specified products from the proposed manufacturer. 4.Manufacturers recommended installation procedures, which when approved by the architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section. 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Store products immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect until installed. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A.Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by Architectural Signing, Inc., 4082 Glencoe Avenue, Marina Del Ray, California 90261, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein. B.Provide the products upon which design is based or provide equal products of another manufacturer approved in advance by the Architect. C.Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this Section from a single manufacturer. 2.2 WALL SIGNS A.Provide wall sign plaques with the following attributes: 1.Size:8” x 8” 2.Type style: Raised 1/8" Upper Case San Serif; 3.Plaque color: Selected by Architect 4.Type color: Contrasting color (Selected by Architect) 5. Mounting: Silastic adhesive, (mounting location as shown on approved shop drawings) 6. Material: Cast brass B.Messages: “Men”, and “Women”. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A.Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect, using only the approved mounting materials, and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb and in accordance with ADA requirements. END OF SECTION 10430 SITE SIGNAGE PAGE 1 OF 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 10430 – SITE SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1, Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site Signage 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03310 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Shop Drawings: Indicate proposed fabrications, mounting details, color separations, and font styles for each sign. B. The graphic representations shown in the Drawings are intended to depict the design intent. Final artwork shall be prepared by the sign manufacturer and submitted to Owner’s Representative for approval. C. Technical data: manufacturer data and product information. D. Color samples: Paint color samples. The Owner’s Representative will make all sign color selections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.5 MOCK-UP SAMPLES A. Submit samples of the proposed fastener hardware. Samples shall be submitted for each installation application. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Review location of signs with owner prior to installation. 10430 SITE SIGNAGE PAGE 2 OF 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle signage in order not to damage or mar surfaces of signs or adjacent finish surfaces as applicable. B. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration or staining. C. Store signage material in a safe, dry, above-ground. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation with adjacent finish materials in manner not to destroy adjacent surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. iZone Imaging 2526 Charter Oak Drive, Suite 100 Temple, TX 76502 Phone (888) 464-9663 Fax (254)778-0938 Contact: David Gloriosa B. Or Approved Equivalent 2.2 SIGN PANELS A. Paint: High-grade polyurethane paint specially formulated for the exterior sign industry. All graphics and text shall be painted. Adhesive applied graphics or text are not acceptable. B. Refer to Drawings for signage information. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Utilize stainless steel, tamper resistant bolt and nut assemblies. B. Where exposed adjacent to the sign face or back, the fasteners shall be painted to match the sign color adjacent to the fastener. 10430 SITE SIGNAGE PAGE 3 OF 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that areas are ready to receive signage. B. Notify owner in writing of unacceptable conditions in surfaces or substrates. C. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install signs in accordance with good construction practices. Avoid warps, buckles, distortions, opening up of joints, or overstressing of fasteners. B. Locate and install signage in locations as indicated on the signage schedule and in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed signs from damage and vandalism until project completion. END OF SECTION SECTION 10800-A - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Provide toilet, bath and laundry accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B.Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ITEM MANUFACTURER MODEL # TA1 Wall Mounted Electric Hand Dryer Bobrick B-7128 TA2 Toilet Tissue Holder (Double)Bobrick B-2892 TA3 36” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806x36 TA4 42” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806x42 TA5 Soap Dispenser (Lav Mounted)Bradley 6315 TA6 Frameless Mirror (24”x36”)Bobrick B-1556 2436 TA7 Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit Bobrick B-270 TA8 Mop and Broom Holder Bobrick B-224 TA8 Diaper Changing Station Bobrick KB110- SSWM PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B.Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 11510 SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 11510 – SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, Standard General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1, Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General 1. Furnish and supply all labor, equipment, materials and incidentals necessary to assemble, install and otherwise construct park equipment as listed under products. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations 1. Each type of site furnishing(s) shall be obtained through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Safety 1. All equipment shall be free of sharp edges and corners, and extremely rough surfaces. 2. All raised platforms shall have handrails. 3. Wood shall be pressure treated with a non-toxic preservative. C. Allowable Tolerances 1. Metals shall be straight or at design radii or bends, without kinks, bents, and crimps and shall be true to shape. 2. All metal parts and hardware shall be hot dip galvanized, have electrostatically bonded colors, or have an approved corrosion-resistant coating. 3. Wood shall be structurally sound and free of heart centers. 4. Wood shall not be noticeably warped or bowed and shall be free of large checks, splinters and waves. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect from inclement weather; wet, damp, extreme heat or cold. 11510 SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Keep manufacturers labels, installation instructions, and warranty information. C. Store wood in a manner to prevent warpage and/or bowing. D. Delivery times for equipment will be taken into account by the Contractor as work proceeds. Late deliveries will not be accepted as a reason to extend the completion date for the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. The Contractor shall submit to the Landscape Architect manufacturers catalog information sheets, installation details and a listing of model numbers, option numbers, and color charts of each piece of equipment that the Contractor proposes to install. 2. The Contractor's submittals shall be approved by the Landscape Architect prior to ordering of equipment. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of unfinished work and shall be responsible for the safety of park users utilizing unfinished equipment. PA RT 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SITE FURNISHINGS AND PARK EQUIPMENT A. General 1. All equipment and materials shall be new, unused and the standard product of one manufacturer. B. Site Furnishings 1. Products supplied per construction drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION Install site furnishings and park equipment in the exact locations shown on the drawings and in strict conformation with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 15010-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK Page 1 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15010-A -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1. The Conditions of the Contract. 2. Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.02 BASIC REQUIREMENTS A. In accordance with the Conditions of the Contract, each Mechanical Contractor executing work in Division 15 is acting in the capacity of a sub-contractor. However, throughout Division 15, the mechanical sub-contractor is hereinafter referred to as the Contractor. B. The Contractor is duly bound to all applicable requirements of the prime contractor as stipulated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter specified or indicated on accompanying drawings, and provide equipment and labor as required in connection with his work and systems. 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall visit the site and verify the following: 1. Items shown or indicated as "existing" on the drawings, including structures, trees, utilities, obstructions, etc. 2. Work conditions. 3. Hazards. 4. Soil grades and conditions. B. Acceptance of a contract shall be deemed as evidence that the site visit has been made and that the Contractor has familiarized himself with the conditions noted above. 1.04 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required utility connections, meters and meter boxes, utility extensions and/or relocations and shall pay all costs and 15010-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK Page 2 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 inspection fees for all work included therein. 1.05 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as hereinafter modified in individual sections of Division 15 and contract drawings, materials and installation shall meet the requirements prescribed in the latest editions of the applicable manuals and standards of the following codes and standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA): a NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code b NFPA No. 90A, Air Conditioning Systems c NFPA No. 91, Blower & Exhaust Systems d NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code e NFPA No. 200 Series, Building Construction f NFPA No. 14, Standpipes and Hose Systems 2. United States of America Standards Institute (ASA) Standards: a International Plumbing Code b B31.1 and B31.1a, Code for Pressure Piping 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 5. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI). 6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). 7. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA). 8. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). 9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 10. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 11. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 12. Fire Department as applicable to construction on this site. 13. Building Code for Construction. 15010-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK Page 3 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 14. Occupational Safety and Hea0lth Act (OSHA). 15. State and Local safety and health standards. 16. All work shall be in accordance with all regulations and requirements of the Standards and Specifications for Handicapped and Disabled for the Construction of Public Buildings and Facilities in the State of Texas Usable by Physically Handicapped and Disabled Persons. 17. See individual sections for additional codes, standards, and special requirements. B. Where materials or equipment are specified to be approved, listed, tested, or labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or constructed and/or tested in accordance with the standards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or the Air Moving and Conditioning Association, the Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this section of the specifications conform to such requirements. The ASME stamp, AMCA label, or the U.L. label, will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to the respective requirements. C. It is the intent of Division 15 and the related drawings to comply with the above mentioned requirements, standards and codes. However some discrepancies may occur. Where discrepancies occur, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of discrepancies and request an interpretation. 1. Request for interpretation shall be made before any work is performed or material is fabricated. 2. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable codes, standards, and/or regulations, the Contractor shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies to comply with the codes, standards and/or regulations. 3. Should a conflict or discrepancy occur between codes, standards and/or regulations, the Contractor shall be obligated to comply with the most stringent, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The specifications and accompanying drawings of the building indicate plans and details showing installations and locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, outlets, controls, etc. Due to the intricacies of construction it is impractical to specify or indicate every detail; in such cases the current rules of good construction practices and applicable specifications shall govern. 15010-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK Page 4 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. If departures from the drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such proposed departures shall be made to the Architect/Engineer in writing. Each request shall state reasons and recommended correction for proposed departure. No departure shall be made without prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer. C. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all drawings and specifications and properly use information found on the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings and specifications affecting his work. D. Dimensional information pertaining to new work in the structure shall be taken from the appropriate drawings. Dimensional information pertaining to existing conditions and outside the structure shall be made by the Contractor on the site. E. Should the drawings or specifications disagree within themselves, or with each other, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be performed or furnished at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Interrelation of the specifications and drawings and schedules is as follows: 1. Specifications determine type and installation of material. 2. Drawings establish location, quantities, dimensions and details. 3. Schedules establish performance characteristics of equipment. G. Dimensions indicated on drawings govern scaled measurements. Large scale details govern small scale drawings. 1.07 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT A. The size of mechanical equipment indicated on the drawings is based on the dimensions of the equipment by the manufacturer indicated on the drawings, in the specifications and/or as listed in equipment schedules. Other manufacturers may be acceptable if equal in design and function. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment proposed to be furnished will fit in the allotted space. C. Space is critical; therefore, equipment of larger sizes than shown, even though of specified manufacturer, will not be acceptable unless Contractor can demonstrate that ample space exists for proper installation, operation, and maintenance. D. Equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces and accessory items such as valves, pumps, motors, drives, filters, gauges, controls, etc. Accessories shall be installed to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 15010-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK Page 5 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E. If requested by Architect/Engineer, Contractor shall prepare and furnish detailed installation drawings indicating arrangement and installation of proposed equipment, and submit to Architect/Engineer for approval. Approval, in writing, shall be obtained before ordering equipment. 1.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All mechanical (plumbing, fire protection and HVAC) equipment shall be furnished and installed complete and ready for use. The Contractor or Subcontractor furnishing the equipment item shall furnish and install all auxiliary piping, valves, controls, control wiring, conduit, alarms, etc., required. All necessary devices, control wiring, conduit, etc., will not necessarily be shown on the drawings. Control wiring, conduit, etc., for equipment items provided by the General Contractor shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor unless shown on the mechanical and electrical drawings or so stated in the specifications. 1.09 SUPERINTENDENT A. It shall be the responsibility of each superintendent to study all Contract Documents and familiarize himself with the work to be done by other trades. The superintendent shall coordinate his work with other trades and before material is fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not cause any interference that cannot be resolved without major changes to the Contract Documents. 1.10 PROJECT OBSERVATION A. Project observation by the Architect/Engineer is for the express purpose of verifying compliance by the Contractor with the Contract Documents, and shall not be construed as construction supervision nor indication of approval of the manner in which the work is being performed. 1.11 FINAL OBSERVATION A. The Architect/Engineer will make a final observation of the project in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract. B. Before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final observation, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to personally make a detail observation of the complete project assuring himself that the Work on the project is ready for final acceptance. C. Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Project Closeout before receiving final acceptance of the Work. 15010-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK Page 6 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15020 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B.Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C.Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E.The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect/Engineer's instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect/Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F.Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A.It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. If additional work is required for Work indicated or specified, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or as required to Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 complete the installation. B.The Contractor shall be responsible for placing his material and equipment into the building and shall carefully lay out his work in the project to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed and thereby provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. C.Investigate structural and finish conditions and coordinate all work with the various trades to avoid interferences between the different phases of Work. Harmonize work so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or handicapping each other. D.Unless specifically noted to be exposed, lay out work in finish portions of the building so that it will be concealed in chases, suspended above ceilings, etc. Allow proper clearances where pipes and ducts are to be insulated. Bending or installing pipes in a strain in order to insulate or to clear obstructions will not be permitted. E.Lay out work as required to avoid crippling of structural members. Inserts for pipe hangers are to be set before concrete is poured. Provide and properly lay out sleeves in concrete for penetrating pipes and ducts. Hold pipes and ducts as tight to structure as possible and provide proper and required sloping to pipes. F.Lay out and install equipment as required to provide convenient and safe maintenance and access for future replacement as well as providing easy access to oiling devices and parts requiring adjustment. 1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B.Do not receive equipment or materials on the job site until adequate space has been provided for storage. C.Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D.Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. E.Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. F.Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.5 PRECEDENCE OF MATERIALS A.The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of his equipment and material into the allotted spaces in the structure so as to provide complete and acceptable systems. B.Piping interferences shall give precedence to pipe lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. 1.6 Furnish a suitable trap on each drain not provided with a trap. A.All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome-plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match. 1.7 INSTALLATION METHODS A.Unless noted otherwise, piping and ductwork may be run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping and ductwork exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect/Engineer. B.Conceal piping and ductwork to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C.Where piping must be exposed in finished areas, install to meet the following requirements: 1.Do not expose unless so indicated on the drawings. 2.If piping must be exposed because of unforeseen interferences or job conditions, obtain approval in writing from the Architect/Engineer. 3. Exposed domestic water pipe (copper) shall be chrome plated (insulation shall be omitted if approved by Architect/Engineer) and no joints shall appear in pipe line if at all possible. If insulation must remain, insulated pipe shall be in chrome plated sleeve. 4. Exposed sanitary sewer or drainage piping shall be DWV copper (or DWV PVC if code allows) and shall be inside chrome plated sleeve or cast iron piping housed inside gypboard furring. D.Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. E.No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. F.Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 G.Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect/Engineer. H.All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. I.All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. J.Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. K.Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. L.For additional requirements for installation of mechanical work, refer to individual sections in Division 15. 1.8 ESCUTCHEONS A.Where pipes penetrate walls and/or floors in exposed areas, provide stainless steel escutcheon plates. B.Escutcheon plate shall be set screw type and sized to fit pipe and to cover penetration opening. 1.9 WELDING PROCEDURES A.Welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding method, using a metallic arc or gas welding process. B.Pipe shall have the ends beveled 37-1/2 degrees with joints aligned true before welding. C.Except as otherwise specified, all changes in direction, intersection of lines, reduction in pipe size and the like shall be made with factory-fabricated welding fittings. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction will not be permitted. D.All welding operations shall conform to the latest recommendations of the American Welding Society and to Section Six of the Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1, current edition. All qualifying tests, welding and stress relieving procedures shall, moreover, be in accordance with Standard Qualification for Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators, Appendix A of the Code, Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 current edition. E.Schedule 40 pipe shall be welded with not less than three passes including 1 tack, 1 filler and 1 lacer. Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than 4 passes including 1 tack, 2 fillers and 1 lacer. 1.10 UNIONS A.Unions shall be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, traps, and at all pieces of equipment (pumps, condensers, tanks, etc.), so that equipment may be readily disconnected. B.Unless written approval has been obtained from the Architect/Engineer, no unions are to be placed in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building. 1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. B.Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 1.6 ROOF PENETRATIONS A.Pipes and/or ducts penetrating the roof shall be installed as directed by roofing supplier/installer and shall be compatible with roofing system. 1.13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A.The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work and upon its completion, test his work and make all tests as required by the specifications, State, Municipal and other authorities having jurisdiction of the work. Piping pressure tests shall be made before pipe is concealed or covered. 1.14 COOPERATION AND CLEANUP A.The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the other trades on the job to help keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment and materials and shall clean his debris from the job. B.Upon the completion of the job, the Contractor shall immediately remove all of his tools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by his portion of the work. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C.Refer to section on Cleaning, for additional cleaning requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15070 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR PIPE, CABLES AND DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATING A.General: 1. Trenching shall be in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Document, Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; 1926-652 - General Trenching Requirements. a.Banks more than 5 feet high shall be shored, laid back to a stable slope, or some other equivalent means of protection shall be provided where employees may be exposed to moving ground or cave-ins. Refer to drawings for standard trenching details. b.The Contractor may also have supporting systems, pilings, cribbing, shoring, etc., designed by a Registered Professional Structural Engineer and submitted to the Architect/Engineer as a shop drawing submittal before any trenching work is done. Submittal drawings shall be sealed by the Engineer. 2.Excavate to the depths indicated or as otherwise specified. 3. Pile materials suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slide or cave-ins. 4. Remove excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill. 5. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and remove any water accumulating therein. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 6. Sheeting and shoring shall be done as may be necessary. 7. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that short sections of a trench may be tunneled if the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly tamped in such tunnel sections. 8.Excavate all materials encountered including rock and filled-in material. B.Trench Excavation: 1. Sides and Bottom: Trenches shall be of the necessary width for proper laying of pipe, cables, or ducts. The banks of pipe trenches shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. Do not over-excavate. Grade bottom of the trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except for the portions of the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints and as hereinafter specified. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after the trench bottom has been graded. In order that the pipe rest on the prepared bottom for as nearly its full length as practicable, bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth, and width as required for properly making the joint. 2. Stones: Remove stones necessary to avoid point bearing. Where rock excavation is required in trenches for pipe, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of 6 inches below the trench depths indicated or specified. Except as hereinafter specified for wet or otherwise unstable material, overdepths shall be backfilled as and with materials specified for backfilling the lower portion of trenches. 3. Unstable Material: Remove wet or otherwise unstable material encountered beyond the depths indicated on the drawings or specified herein and replace with satisfactory material. 4. Sanitary Sewers: The width of the trench at and below the top of the pipe shall be such that the clear space between the barrel of the pipe and the trench wall shall not exceed 8 inches on either side of the pipe. The width of the trench above that level shall be as wide as necessary for sheeting and bracing and the proper performance of the work. The bottom of the trench shall be rounded so that at least the bottom quadrant of the pipe shall rest firmly on undisturbed soil for as nearly the full length of the barrel as proper jointing operations will permit. Excavate this part manually only a few feet in advance of the pipe laying by men skilled in this type of work. 5.Water Supply and Distribution Lines: Unless otherwise indicated, grade trenches to avoid high points with the necessity of placing vacuum and relief valves in the water lines. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate trenches to a depth to provide a minimum cover over the top of the pipe of 2 feet in unpaved areas and 2-1/2 feet under paved areas; excavate Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 deeper to avoid interference of the water lines with other utilities. C. Excavation for Appurtenances: Excavate for manholes and similar structures sufficiently to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and the embankment or timber that may be used to hold and protect the banks. Overdepth excavation below such appurtenances shall be refilled with sand, gravel or concrete. D. Excavation Beneath Buildings: Exercise care and minimize disturbance to the capillary water barrier or compacted subgrade. 3.2 REMOVAL OF UTILITY LINES A.When utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, notify representatives of the Utility, the Owner, and others in ample time for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of the service. 3.3 BACKFILLING A.General: The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required pressure tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified in the several sections covering the installation of the various utilities. Where damage is likely to result from withdrawing sheeting, leave the sheeting in place. Except as otherwise specified for special conditions of overdepths, backfill the trenches to the ground surface with selected material that is suitable for the specified compaction and as hereinafter specified. Reopen improperly backfilled trenches, and trenches that show sinking within 12 months after Substantial Completion to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill and compact as specified. The meaning of "density of the adjacent soil" when the adjacent formation is rock shall be interpreted as maximum density. The surface shall be restored to its original condition as near as practicable and as hereinafter specified. Replace sidewalks, curbs, gravel, pavement, base course, and compacted subgrade disturbed by trenching operations. B.Lower Portion of Trench: Deposit backfill material in 6-inch-maximum-thickness layers and compact with suitable tampers to the density of the adjacent soil or grade as hereinafter specified until there is a cover of not less than 2 feet over sewers and l foot over other utility lines. The backfill material in this portion of the trench shall consist of a selected material at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, free from stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension and hard clods and frozen conglomerates larger than 6 inches in any dimension, except that where the pipe is coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion the backfill material shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension. If any portion of the cover in the lower portion of the trench is in the depth of special compaction and materials requirements under pavement, the special requirements shall control. Special care shall be taken not to damage the coating or wrapping of pipes. C.Remainder of Trench: Except for special materials for pavements, the remainder Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 of the trench shall be backfilled with material that is free of stones larger than 6 inches or 1/2 the layered thickness, whichever is smaller, in any dimension. Backfill material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding the thickness specified, and each layer shall be compacted to the minimum density specified as applicable to the particular area except that in areas other than under roadways, parking areas, shoulders of roadways and parking areas, and other paved areas subject to vehicular movement, settling of granular, non-cohesive material with water will be permitted. 1. Under Pavements: Six-inch layers, 90 percent CE 55 maximum density for cohesive soils and 95 percent CE 55 maximum density for cohesionless soils up to the elevation at which the requirements for pavement subgrade material and compaction control or up to the bottom of the concrete backfill. 2. Under Turfed or Seeded Lawn Areas and Sidewalks: Twelve-inch layers, 85 percent CE 55 maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent CE 55 maximum density for cohesionless soils. This requirement also applies to areas designated to be turfed or seeded. 3. Under Other Areas: Two-foot layers, density equal to the adjacent soil. 3.4 TEST FOR DISPLACEMENT OF SEWERS A. Sewer mains shall be checked to determine whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred after the trench has been backfilled to 2 feet above the pipe and tamped as specified. The test will be as follows: A light will be flashed between manholes, or, if the manholes have not as yet been constructed, between the locations of the manholes, by means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror. If the illuminated interior of the pipe line shows poor alignment, displaced pipe, or any other defects, the defects shall be remedied. 3.5 LANDSCAPE A.Routing: 1.Stake the route jointly with the Owner. 2. Mark trees, shrubbery and other landscaping to be saved, jointly with the Owner. 3.Avoid the drip line of other trees and large shrubbery. B.Repair: Place topsoil in top 6 inches of trench in areas of existing cultivated ground cover. C.Sod: Plant sod in areas of existing sod. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15110 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.This work covers the requirements for the valves as indicated and required for the various systems throughout the project. B.The requirements of this section apply to all piping work specified in other sections of these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Special Tests and Quality Requirements: 1. Bronze ball valves shall be rated for 150 SWP/600 WOG. Ball valves shall be equipped with blowout proof stems and adjustable packing glands and to be of a two piece screwed end cap design. Packing shall be teflon or glass filled teflon. Seats to be glass filled teflon. Ball valves are acceptable alternates for gate valves when used for on/off services provided valve is suitable for service. 2.Iron valves shall have pressure containing parts conforming to ASTM Specification A-126, Grade B. Wedge and seat ring material for iron valves shall conform to ASTM Specification B-584 Alloy C84400. 3. Stem materials for bronze valves shall conform to ASTM B-99 Alloy C65100, ASTM Specification B-371, Alloy 694 (rolled silicon brass) or other approved materials with less than 15% zinc. Stem material for IBBM valves shall conform to ASTM B-371 Alloy 694 or ASTM B-16 Alloy C36000 brass. B. Valves of the same type shall be furnished by the same manufacturer, unless approved by Engineer. If approval is requested, substitution must be one of approved manufacturer on approved list. 1. Submittal data for substitute shall consist of manufacturer's name, size, figure number, detailed technical drawings and appropriate engineering information to substantiate quality. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.4 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A.Where a manufacturer has been listed, it is for quality, design and function. B.Products equal in quality, design and function by one of the following will be acceptable. 1.Valves: a. Crane b. Nibco c. Homestead d. Stockham e.Mueller No Substitutions 2. Hydrants: a. Josam b.Wade c.Zurn No Substitutions PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE TYPES AND SIZES A.Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated valves of the type, body material and pressure class indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide valve size same as connection pipe size. B.Ball Valves bronze: Class 150# steam/600 WOG; Nibco T-580-70, Stockham S-216-BR-R-T. C.Wall Hydrants: Non-freeze type with integral vacuum breaker. Josam 71050. 1.The following equal in design and function are acceptable (no substitutes): a.Wade b.Zurn D.Wall Hydrants (box type): Non-freeze type with integral vacuum breaker. Josam 71000 Hydrosan I. 1.The following equal in design and function are acceptable (no substitutes): a.Wade b.Zurn Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.2 VALVE HANDLES A.All valves installed in insulated pipelines shall have handle stem extensions of a length required to allow operation of the handle without contacting the outside surface of the insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.General Requirements: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements: 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. a. Locate valves so as to be accessible. b. Provide separate support where required for a rigid installation. 2. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position wherever possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane, unless approved by Engineer. If approved, install valve drains with hose-end adaptor for each valve with stem below horizontal plane. 3.Where insulation is required or indicated, install extended-stem valves and arranged in the proper manner to receive insulation. 4. Install valves with bodies of metal other than cast-iron where thermal or mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur. 5.Do not install bronze valves and bronze valve components in direct contact with steel, unless the bronze and steel are separated by a dielectric insulator. Install bronze valves in steam and condensate service and in other services where corrosion is indicated or can be expected to occur. 6. Install mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated, and where valves 4" and larger are mounted more than 7'-0" above the floor, and where recommended by the valve manufacturer because of valve size, pressure differential or other operating condition making manual operation difficult. 3.2 VALVE ENDS AND CONNECTIONS A.Except as otherwise indicated, select and install valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Pipe size 2" and smaller shall have threaded valves. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Pipe size 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged valves. 3. Install threaded adapters at each valve and component such that the item can be removed without the use of a torch. Unions at valves and equipment shall be Elkhart 102M wrought copper, or equal. 3.3 SPECIAL VALVE REQUIREMENTS A.Except in fire protection systems and boiler isolation installations, non-rising stem gate valves may be used where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A.Check and adjust valves and accessories for smooth operation. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15120 - PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Furnish and install pipe, fitting and connection for the various systems throughout the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Piping, fittings, and installation to meet or exceed the requirements of applicable codes and standards, latest editions. B.See Basic Materials and Methods for welding requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND TUBE A.Steel: ASTM A 120 and A 53, welded black or hot-dipped galvanized, Schedule 40 (standard weight), plain or screwed end. B.Copper: 1. Seamless Water Tube:ASTM B 88, Type K, L, or M, drawn temper, furnish straight, or coil (only when enclosed in concrete). 2. Seamless Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, drawn temper, standard weight. 3. Seamless Pipe: ASTM B 42, drawn temper, regular strength. C.Plastic: 1. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): a. Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM D-1527, ABS 1210. b.SDR-PR, ASTM D 2282, non-threaded, SDR 17, ABS 1210. c. Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV):ASTM D 2661, Class S-2-2 of Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 ASTM D 1788. d.Sewer Pipe: ASTM D 2751, SDR 23.5 for 4" and 6"; SDR 42 for over 6". 2.Polyvinylchloride (PVC): a. Schedule 40, 80 or 120, ASTM D 1785, PVC 1220. b.SDR-PR, ASTM D 2241,non-threaded, SDR 17, PVC 1220. c. Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV): Class 12454-B/ASTM D 1784. d.Sewer Pipe: ASTM 2729, PVC 1220. e. Bell end, Schedule 40 or SDR, ASTM D 2672, PVC 1220. 3.Polyethylene (PE): a. Schedule 40, ASTM D 2104, Grade PE 2306. b.SDR-PR, ASTM D 2239, SDR 11.5, PE 2306. D.Cast Iron: 1. Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, coated, service weight, and extra heavy weight. 2. Hubless Pipe: Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, Standard 301. 3.Water Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C105, centrifugally cast. 4. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151. 5.Water Pipe, Flanged: ANSI/AWWA C151. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A.Steel: 1. Cast iron drainage, ANSI B16.12 coated. 2.Malleable iron, ANSI B16.3, 150 lb., hot-dipped galvanized or black finish. 3.Forged steel, socket welding, ANSI 16.11. 4. Butt welding, ANSI B16.9. 5. Cast iron flanged, ANSI B16.1, 125 lb. 6. Unions: Malleable iron, threaded, FSWW-U-531, Class 1, Type A or B. B.Copper: 1.Wrought copper and bronze, solder-joint pressure, ANSI B16.22, wrought copper material. 2. Cast bronze threaded, ANSI B16.15, 125 lbs. class. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. Cast bronze solder-joint pressure, ANSI B16.18 and ANSI B16.18a. 4. Cast bronze solder-joint drainage (DWV), ANSI B16.23. 5. Cast bronze flange and flange fittings, ANSI B16.24, 150 lbs. class. 6. Cast bronze, flared copper tube, ANSI B16.26. C.Plastic: 1. ABS, socket type, Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM D2468/Schedule 40 and ASTM D 2469/Schedule 80. 2. ABS, threaded, Schedule 80, ASTM D 2465. 3. ABS, DWV, ASTM D 2661. 4. ABS, sewer, ASTM D 2751. 5. PVC socket-type, Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM D 2466/Schedule 40 and ASTM D 2467/Schedule 80. 6. PVC threaded, Schedule 80, ASTM D 2464. 7. PVC, DWV, ASTM D 2665. 8. PVC, sewer, ASTM D 2729. 9. PE, Schedule 40 and 80, butt fusion, ASTM D 2610/Schedule 40 and ASTM D 2611/Schedule 80. 10. PE, insert, ASTM D 2609. 11.PE, SDR, 11.5-PE 2306, ASTM D 2683. D.Cast Iron: 1. Soil pipe, ASTM A 74, ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint. 2. Hubless, Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301. 3.Grey iron, ANSI A21.10. 4. Ductile iron, ANSI A21.10. 2.3 ACCESSORIES FOR PIPE AND TUBE JOINTING A.Steel Pipe: Rector Seal No. 5 joint compound, teflon tape for threads. B.Copper: Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1. Solder Metal: ASTM B32. 2. Brazing Flux: FSO-F499, Type B. 3. Soldering Flux: FSO-F506, Type 1. 4. Brazing Filler: AWS 5.8. C.Plastic: 1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2. ABS Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 3.Thread lubricant, as recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer. D.Cast Iron: 1. Jute: FS H-P-117, Type I. 2. Rubber Gaskets, Lubricant, Glands, Bolts and Nuts: ANSI A21.11. 3.Gaskets for Soil Pipe: ASTM C564. 4. Neoprene Sleeve Gaskets for Hubless Pipe and Retaining Clamp: Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, Standard 301; fitting coupling, ASTM A 48, Class 30-A. 5.Gasket lubricant as recommended by gasket manufacturer. 2.4 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A.Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psi, malleable iron for threaded steel piping; bronze for copper pipe, soldered joints. B.Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psi, forged steel slip-on flanges for steel piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; synthetic rubber gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch thick preformed synthetic rubber bonded to asbestos elsewhere. C.Grooved and Shouldered Pipe Ends: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction and expansion; C- shape composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Thread and clean pipe and fitting as specified in Basic Materials and Methods section. B.Not more than three threads shall be exposed after making connection. C.Use thread tape or approved joint compound on male threads only. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D.Flanged Connections: 1.Tighten flanged bolts so that gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed. Do not distort flanges. 2. Ends of bolts to project 1/8" to 3/8" beyond face of nut after tightening. E.Clean ends of pipe with steel wool as required for making connections. F.Welding: ANSI B31.1. G.Clean and polish contact surfaces of copper before flux. H.Clean and polish contact surfaces of plastic before applying cement. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Grade water, and condensate lines to point of drainage collection and/or as indicated on drawings. 2. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3. Anchor horizontal runs over 50 feet, at midpoint, to force expansion equally towards ends. 4. Exterior underground water lines, except with welded joints, shall have concrete thrust blocks or an approved type anchor in accordance with NFPA 24, Chapter 8-6, Appendices A and B. a. Install thrust blocks at changes in direction, elevations, plugs, tees, crosses, etc. 5. Piping runs designed for the purpose of carrying gaseous materials shall be cleaned by pulling a swab through the pipe during installation. 3.3 PIPING A. Vertical: 1. Install supports for vertical piping at each floor and at intervals not to exceed: a. Steel: 10 feet. b. Copper: 10 feet. c. Plastic: 10 feet. d. Cast Iron: 15 feet. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Provide supports no more than 8 feet from end of risers. 3. During construction, if support is not available, support and secure piping using stakes and metal braces. 4. Provide watertight threaded connections at roof drains. B.Horizontal - Suspended: 1. Install supports for suspended horizontal piping at sufficiently close intervals to maintain alignment and prevent sagging, but not to exceed the following: a. Steel and Copper: 1-1/4" and smaller, 6 feet; 1-1/2" and larger, 10 feet. b. Plastic: 4 feet. c. Cast Iron: 5' length of pipe, 5 feet; 10' length of pipe, 10 feet. 2. Provide supports maximum 18" from each joint, ends of runs, change in directions or alignment. C.Horizontal - Underground: 1.Lay on firm bed of sand for entire length of trench. 2. Backfill evenly on both sides to maintain alignment. Employ partial backfilling for cradling pipe during backfilling. 3. Anchor piping on grade prior to embedment in concrete. 3.4 JOINTING A.Steel: 1. Die-cut screwed joints with full cut standard tapered pipe threads. Use an approved cutting oil. 2. Unless noted otherwise, screw joint steel piping 2-1/2" and smaller. Weld piping 3" and larger, including branch connections. B.Copper: 1. Soldered and/or brazed joints to be inserted to full depth after applying flux. Bring joint to temperature as quickly as possible and apply continuous bead of solder or filler material. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Flared joints to be made by flaring end of tube to retain fitting. Tighten fitting. C.Plastic: 1. Joints to be as follows: a. ABS: Threaded. b. ABS: Solvent cemented. c. PVC: Threaded. d. PVC: Solvent cemented. e. PE: Fusion welded. f. PE: Insert fittings. 2. Connections and jointing with other materials shall be made with use of adapter as recommended by pipe manufacturer. D.Cast Iron: 1.Mechanical Joint Installation: Per manufacturer's instructions. 2. Push-On Joint Installation: Per manufacturer's instructions. 3. Junction with Other Materials:Use type of adapter and technique recommended by pipe manufacturer. 4. Compression Joint Installation: a. Clean hub and insert gasket. b. Apply gasket lubricant to spigot and inside of gasket. c. Drive spigot into gasketed hub with pulling tool or suitable device. 5. Hubless Joint Installation: a. Place gasket on end of one pipe and retaining clamp on end of adjoining pipe. b. Firmly seat pipe ends against integrally molded shoulder inside neoprene gasket. c. Slide retaining clamp into position over gasket and tighten evenly to 4 ft.-lbs. of torque. d. Firmly stabilize connections at water closets, trap arms and horizontal branches by use of strapping and blocking. 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING OF WATER SYSTEMS Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A.Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of systems. Pipe stored on the project shall have open ends capped and equipment shall have openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and dirt removed. B.Systems shall be cleaned with a chemical compound specifically formulated for the purposes of removing the above listed foreign matter. These chemicals shall be injected into the systems, circulated and completely flushed out. Repeat the process if required. After each flushing, remove and thoroughly clean all strainers. Contractor shall furnish all valves, pumps and fittings required for flushing. C.Final connection is not to be made to the system until the Contractor and/or a Chemical Subcontractor has filed with the Owner's representatives, a report stating that the systems are clean. 3.6 TESTING A.See individual sections on the various mechanical systems for testing. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15250 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Installation of insulation of piping, equipment, ductwork as herein indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas b.Schuller c.E. O. Wood d. Certain Teed e.Knauf 2. Elastomeric Insulation: Armstrong (Armaflex) 3.Mastics: f.Benjamin Foster g.Insul-Coustic h.Chicago Mastic i.Childers Products 4. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc. 1.4 GENERAL A.All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection. B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned. C.All material shall be finished with surfaces having a maximum flame spread rating of 25 under ASTM Method 84. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D.Non-compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to eliminate through metal conductance. E.Sizing, paint, pipe shield or saddle, and internal duct insulation shall be provided under other sections of Division 15. F.Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. G. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed. However, sufficient insulation shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125F (OSHA Standard) on the hot surfaces. H.Insulation shall be applied to all parts of a system which contains hot or cold water, air, or liquids. The piping systems include all valves, fittings, devices, etc. Do not omit insulation on any valve or device when that valve or device is part of a system specified to be insulated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION A.Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: 1. Owens/Corning Fiberglas 25ASJ/SSL or approved equal, one piece pipe insulation (3 lb/cu. ft. density) with all service jacket. a. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: 1/2" Pipe - 1/2" Thick 3/4" - 1-1/2" Pipe - 1" Thick 2" and Larger Pipe - 1-1/2" Thick b. Use pre-formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts. Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation. c.Where insulation is exposed to weather, use J-M Flame-Safe ML, or approved equal, Metal-Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation. B.Drain Lines: All sections of condensate drain lines from air conditioning equipment; P-traps and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving air conditioner drainage where such traps are above ceiling or finished floors. 1. Armstrong "AP Armaflex", or approved equal, flexible elastomeric pipe insulation. Insulation shall be 1/2" thick. C.Refrigerant Suction Piping: 1. Armstrong "AP Armaflex", or approved equal, flexible elastomeric pipe insulation. Insulation shall be 3/4" thick. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.Where insulation is exposed to weather, paint entire surface with 2 coats UL Classified, Elastomeric finish, WB finish. 2.2 HEAT TRACING A.ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.XL - Trace by Raychem Corporation. 2.Nelson Type LT 3.Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B.HEATING TRACING; The self-regulating heater shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG nickel coated-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself without overheating to be used directly on plastic pipe, and to be cut to length in the field. The heater shall be covered by a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. C.In order to provide energy conservation and to prevent overheating, the heater shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulation factor is defined as the percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heater output going from 40 degrees F pipe temperature operation to 150 degrees F pipe temperature operation. D.The heater shall operate on line voltage of 120 volts without the use of transformers. E.The heater shall be sized according to this table. The required heater output rating is in watts per foot at 50 degrees F. (Heater selection based on 1" fiberglass insulation on metal piping). PIPE SIZE WATTS PER LIN.FT. 3 inches or less 5 watts 4 inches 5 watts 6 inches 8 watts 8 inches 2 strips - 5 watts 10 inches to 14 inches 2 strips - 8 watts F.Power connection, end seal, splice and tee kit components shall be applied in the field. G.The system shall be controlled by a bulb-sensing thermostat set at 40 degrees F either directly or through an appropriate contactor. H.Ground fault circuit breakers shall be provided as required by section 427-22 of the NEC-1987. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.3 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A.All un-lined supply, return air and outside air duct systems located in spaces above ceilings not used as return air plenum and in non-conditioned spaces shall be insulated with 2" thick fiberglass flexible ductwrap with vapor barrier. (Duct systems with less than 1" thick liner are to be considered as un-lined.) B.All lined (minimum 1" thick liner) supply, return air and outside air duct systems located in spaces above ceilings not used as return air plenum and in non- conditioned spaces shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick fiberglass flexible ductwrap with vapor barrier. 2.4 ADHESIVES A.A water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50. B.A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment adhesive; Foster 85-15 or Childers CP-85. C.Same adhesive, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82. D.A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible elastomeric insulation; Armstrong 520. 2.5 DUCT SEALANTS A.A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, high velocity duct sealer; Foster 32-14 or 3M EC-800. B.Same sealer, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 30-02. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A.Equipment: Insulation shall be cut to fit the contour of the equipment and secured by means of bands, stick clips, weld pins and lugs or adhesives as required for each individual piece of equipment. B.Piping: Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with a contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly bevelled and finished. C.Ductwork: 1. Fiberglass board insulation shall be applied to duct with mechanical fasteners such as stick clips or weld pins spaced as required to install full pieces of board insulation (approximately 12" centers on bottom). Joints and seams in vapor barrier facing shall be covered with 3" wide matching Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 tape or with vapor barrier mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh reinforcement. Where duct standing seams exceed the insulation thickness, an additional layer of board will be required. 2.Flexible fiberglass insulation shall be wrapped around ducts and secured with outward clinching staples. Ducts 24" wide and larger shall have the insulation additionally secured with stick clips on 18" centers or with 4" wide bands of adhesive applied on 18" centers. Insulation shall be lapped a minimum of 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be sealed with an approved mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh reinforcement. Where insulation terminates, all raw glass shall be sealed to duct. 3.Flexible elastomeric insulation shall be adhered to clean, oil-free surface by compression fit method and full coverage of 520 adhesive. Seal butt joints with same adhesive. Apply same thickness on standing metal duct seams as installed on the duct surface. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnish and install plumbing fixtures. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fixtures:By same manufacturer for each type product specified throughout unless noted otherwise. B.Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout unless noted otherwise. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store fixtures in shipping containers with labeling in place. B.Handle fixtures with care to insure against breakage. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Stainless Steel Security Fixtures 1.Acorn. 2.Bradley. 3.Metcraft. B.Fixtures 1.American Standard. 2.Crane. 3.Eljer. 4.Kohler. 5.Universal-Rundle. C.Fixture Trim 1.American Standard. 2.Chicago. 3.Kohler. 4.Speakman. 5.T&S. D.Flush Valves 1.Delany. 2.Sloan. 3.Zurn. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E.Water Closet Seats 1.Church 2.Kohler. 3.Olsonite. F.Fixture Carriers 1.Josam. 2.Jay R. Smith. 3.Wade. 4.Zurn. G.Drinking Fountain 1.Elkay. 2.Halsey Taylor. 3.Haws. 4.Oasis. 5.Sunroc. 2.2 WATER CLOSET (WC-1) A.Bowl: Acorn 1680-1-ULF 1.6 gallons per flush, elongated toilet fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel with 14 gage cabinet, bowl, and flushing rim and 16 gage trap covers. Welds shall be ground smooth with exterior surfaces polished to No. 4 satin finish. Toilet shall be siphon jet type with elongated bowl and self- draining rim with hinged plastic seat. Trap shall pass 2 5/8 inch ball. Exterior of trap shall be fully enclosed. Interior coated with fire resistant sound deadening coatings. Fixture shall withstand loading to 2000 pounds with no measurable deflection and up to 5000 pounds with no permanent damage. Complete with 1500 Series wall sleeve for concrete block walls. B.Flush Valve: Sloan Model No. 152-1.6 ES-S, 1.6 gallons per flush, concealed closet flushometer, rough brass with nonhold-open actuator, 1 inch IPS wheel handle back-chek angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker, elbow flush connection and spud coupling for 1-½ inch concealed back spud. Include H-532 sweat solder adapter. Sensor Activated with pushbutton assembly with wall panel and sleave for up to 8 inch wall. Provide piping fittings in chase. Provide 120v single phase transformer to provide 24 VAC power to controller. 2.3 WATER CLOSET (WC-2) HANDICAP A.Same as specified for WC-1 except add suffix (-HC) for handicapped height adjustment. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.4 URINAL (UR-1) A.Urinal: Acorn 1709HEU Series wall-hung straddle urinal with washout flushing action and continuous four-wall flushing rim; 16 gage Type 304 stainless steel with exposed surface, polished to No. 4 satin finish. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth, construction shall be free of visible voids, seams, and crevices. Trap shall provide 2 ½ inch seal and shall pass 1.9 inch ball. Fixture shall be fitted with beehive dome strainer. Back and underside of fixture supplied with sound deadening fire resistant material. No. 1500 wall sleeve for concrete block wall. Unit shall be designed for back supply. Provide pipefittings in chase. B.Flush Valve: Sloan Model No. 195 ES-S, concealed urinal flushometer, rough brass with nonhold-open actuator, 3/4 inch IPS wheel handle back-chek angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker, elbow flush connection and spud coupling for 3/4 inch concealed back spud. Include sweat solder adapter. Sensor Activated with pushbutton assembly with wall panel and sleave for up to 8 inch wall. Provide piping fittings in chase. Provide 120v single phase transformer to provide 24 VAC power to controller . 2.5 URINAL (UR-2) HANDICAP B. Same as specified for UR-1 except add suffix (-HC) for handicapped height adjustment. 2.6 LAVATORY (L-1) HANDICAP A.Lavatory: Bradley LVSD2, barrier-free lavatory constructed of Evero Geo Series natural quartz. Two bowl, 60 inches by 21 inches by 12 inches tall. Provide Bradley sensor activated faucet for single temperature with deck mounted spout, and 120v transformer mounted in apron. Provide grid strainer, No. 1110 elbow drain fitting with tubing drain to wall and No. 1116, 1 ¼ inch P-trap waste for mounting in chase. 2.7 SINK (S-1) HANDICAP A.Sink: Advance Tabco 7-PS-20, Series barrier-free lavatory constructed of Type 304 stainless steel. Bowl, countertop, skirt, and backsplash, 14 gage. Oval bowl, 14 ½ inches by 9 ½ inches by 5 inches deep. Surfaces polished to No. 4 finish. Provide Advance Tabco K-210 faucet, satin finish, wrist blades, 4” O.C. deck mounted. Provide grid strainer, 1 ¼ inch P-trap waste. McGuire 165 trim. B.Trap Wrap/Supply Insulation: Handilav-Guard Model No. 102. 2.6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (EWC-1) - HANDICAP A.Halsey Taylor Model HRFSEBP, ADA rated and barrier free, two units mounted at heights as shown on drawings. High unit shall be standard depth. Satin finish stainless steel. Self-closing pushbar, and automatic stream regulator. B.Cooling System: Remote chiller refrigeration system shall be hermetically sealed and shall employ a 1/5 hp, 115 volt, single phase, 60 hz motor rated at 4.5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 amperes. Refrigerated water cooler; shall deliver 8.0 gph of 50 water at 90 ambient and 80 inlet water, shall be UL listed and comply with ARI Standard 1010- 84; Halsey-Taylor No. SJ8-Q. C.P-Traps: McGuire 8872 cast body with tubular wall bend and escutcheon; 1 ¼- inch by 1 ¼-inch, 17 gage. D.Stops: McGuire 167LK supplies with loose key stops 3/8-inch nominal by ½-inch outside diameter. 2.7 MOP SINK (MS-1): A.Basin: Size 24" x 24" x 12" precast terrazzo basin with 12" curb all around, integrally cast stainless steel cap and rim guard on exposed sides. Drain shall be 3" IPS hub outlet, chrome plated brass drain, with removable strainer plate, integrally cast. Seal between sink and wall with a bead of Fiat No. 833-AA silicon sealant; Fiat Model No. MSBID2424. B.Faucet: Chrome plated with vacuum breaker, integral stops, adjustable wall brace, pail hook and 3/4" hose thread on spout. Body inlets 8" center to center, lever handles, 1021 flow control. Center to spout outlet from back of wall flange 8"; Chicago No. 897. C.Hose and Hose Bracket: 30" long flexible, heavy-duty 5/8" rubber hose, cloth reinforced with 3/4" coupling at one end. Bracket is 5" long by 3" wide, 18 gauge Type 302 stainless steel with rubber grip; Fiat No. 832-AA. D.Drain: 3" cast iron pipe and p-trap by Contractor. E.Mop Hanger: 24" long by 3" wide 18 gauge Type 302 stainless steel mop hanger with three (3) rubber tool grips; Fiat No. 889-CC. 2.8 FLOOR DRAIN A.Wade 3” W-1100 with W-2400 trap. Primer and funnel as required. 2.8 TRENCH DRAIN A.Zurn Z-890 with slotted stainless steel grate, bottom outlet and end caps. 2.10 CLEAN-OUT A.Wade W-6000-TY 2.11 HOSE BIBB A.Wade W-8620 PART 3 – EXECUTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location with Drawings and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. B.Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install each fixture with trap, unless provided integral with fixture or noted otherwise on Drawings, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B.Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops reducers, and escutcheons. C.Install components level and plumb. D.Install and secure fixtures in place with all carriers and bolts. E.Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900; color shall match fixture. F.Mount fixtures to following heights above finished floor: 1.Water Closet a.Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim. b.Handicapped: 17 to 19 inches to top of seat. 2.Urinal a.Standard: 24 inches to top of bowl rim. b.Handicapped: Maximum of 17 inches to top of bowl rim. 3.Lavatory Wall-Hung a.Standard: 31 inches to top of bowl rim. b.Handicapped:Maximum of 34 inches to top of bowl rim; 29 inches clear to bottom of apron. 4.Electric Water Cooler a.Standard: 40 inches to top of basin rim. b.Handicapped: Maximum of 36 inches to spout. 5.Water Closet Flush Valves a.Standard: 11 inches minimum above bowl rim. b.Handicapped: Maximum of 44 inches to control device. c.Install control on wide side of stall. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. B.At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. C.Solidly attach water closet carrier feet to floor with all screws, as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15480 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eemax 2. Chronomite 3.Rheem B.Certifying Agency: Certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 GUARANTEE A.Guarantee for five years from date of project acceptance. B.Repair or replace all faulty equipment within guarantee period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS A.Heater Type: Electric. B.Heater Style: Standard Self-contained. C.Water Heater: 1.Weight: 8 lbs 2.Operating Pressure: 25 min PSI, 150 max PSI 3.Cover: Enameled Steel 4.Heater : Glass reinforced Heater Bodies and Ni Chrome elements 5.Color: White 6.Element: Dual replacement cartridge inserts 7.Microprocessing temp control (+/-1°) accuracy, adjustable range 100° - 140°F Pipe Fitting: 3/4 npt at bottom of unit (□□” OD) UL listed: E86887(M) US Patent #’s: 4,960,976 and 4,762,9801. D.Heaters to be free of: 1. Sharp edges. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Scratches on enameled surfaces. 3. Loose screws. 4. Loose panels. 5. Dents on shell. E.Service Conditions: 1. Nominal Capacity: As scheduled on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install heater, piping and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.2 TESTING AND FLUSHING A.Flushing: After piping, valves and accessories are connected, but prior to start-up and testing, flush heater unit under full system pressure. B.Start-up and Testing: 1. Start-up: After flushing, drain heater tank, refill tank, and start-up unit in accordance with manufacturer's operating instructions. 2. Operations Test: a.Test heater unit after field adjustments have been made. b. Retest until specification requirements have been met. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A.Adjust: 1. Adjust thermostat to desired outlet water temperature. B.Clean: Upon completion of testing and adjusting, clean parts of heater unit to remove grease, sludge and foreign substances. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15720 PACKAGE ROOFTOP UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Furnish and install package type heating and cooling units as indicated on the drawings, in schedules, and by the requirements of this section. B.Units shall have electric heat with direct expansion cooling, or package heat pump units. C.Units shall be a complete package with all operating controls including room thermostat. Refer to controls sections for detailed temperature control requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Units shall be as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Lennox 2. Carrier 3. Trane 4. Yor k PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGE ROOFTOP ELECTRIC HEATING AND COOLING UNITS A.Furnish and install a one-piece air-to-air DX mechanical heat pump system complete with automatic controls. The equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, precharged, piped and wired internally ready for field connections. In addition, manufacturer shall test operate system at the factory before shipment. B.Furnish and install a steel roof mounting frame. It shall mate to the bottom perimeter of the equipment. When flashed into the roof, it shall make a unit mounting curb and provide weatherproof duct connection and entry into the conditioned area. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C.Equipment shall be capable of [bottom] [front] handling of conditioned air. D.Furnish and install complete with all controls, an air mixing damper assembly, including fresh air, recirculated air, and exhaust air dampers. The fresh air section shall be equipped with cleanable air filters. The assembly shall mount within the confines of the unit casing. Units shall have full vent cycle. E.The total certified cooling capacity shall not be less than scheduled capacities. The total compressor power input shall not exceed scheduled FLA. F.The coils shall be non-ferrous construction with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Outdoor coil shall have sub-cooling rows. G.The total certified heating capacity shall not be less than scheduled capacities. H.The compressor shall be resiliently mounted, have built-in 3 mode crankshaft lubrication, crankcase heater, discharge temperature limiter, current and temperature sensing motor overloads. The system shall be protected by high pressure switches and a compressor timed off cycle controller. I.Furnish and install a nichrome bare wire electric heat section of Kw capacity, equipped with fusible links. Sections having more than one circuit shall be step started in 40 second increments per circuit. J.Centrifugal air blowers shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, adjustable belt drives and be capable of delivering scheduled cfm at an external static pressure scheduled. The outdoor unit fans shall be direct driven. All motors shall have inherent protection devices. K.The frame shall be of welded construction. The casing shall be of galvanized panels with a baked-on outdoor enamel finish. The entire bottom of cabinet shall be insulated with not less than 1" thick fiberglass. Cabinet panels shall be insulated with not less than 1-1/2" thick fiberglass. L.Furnish 2" thick fiberglass replaceable filters. M.All components, wiring and inspection areas shall be completely accessible through removable panels. N.The units shall have the additional following features: 1. Suction line accumulator, factory installed and piped. 2. High pressure switches, factory installed and wired. 3.Wall mounted combination heating-cooling thermostat with a clear unbreakable plastic guard. 4. Start kit to allow compressor to start under loaded conditions or low voltage Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 O.System controls shall include room thermostat, night set-back thermostat, time clock, and remote readout and control panel. P.Units shall be thoroughly tested and approved according to ARI Standard 240 and 270 Conditions. Q.Compressor shall have five year warranty, including parts and labor. R.Units rated at 2000 cfm and larger shall have a duct mounted smoke detector mounted in the unit per the mechanical code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNITS A.Install units in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Rooftop units shall be installed and proved completely water tight. C.The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the correct power wiring to the AC units. He shall instruct the Electrical Contractor as to the proper connection point, disconnect location, over-current, short circuit protection, minimum circuit amps, the proper internal routing of wire and conduit and the proper connection methods inside the unit. Wire size shall in no case be smaller than that indicated on the electrical drawings and/or in the electrical specifications. The HVAC Contractor shall assure proper and complete unit manufacturer's data is available and is used for installation by the Electrical Contractor. Wiring, conduits and disconnects not installed correctly shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. D.All control wiring and conduit shall be furnished and installed by the HVAC Contractor. Wiring inside the unit shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams. All wiring must be sized, color coded and connected in strict accordance with Division 16 sections of these specifications. Minimum wire size inside unit cabinet shall be No. 16, copper, stranded. Wiring within the unit shall be bundled and neatly trained. Terminal connections shall be properly made-up using connector devices and each connection point clearly identified as to function. Submit connector devices for review. Control wiring installation shall be supervised and approved by the unit manufacturer's authorized representative. E.Start-up and initial adjustments shall be done by the unit manufacturer's authorized service personnel. F.When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to equipment. Submit listing of electrical feeder size, conduit size, breaker size, etc., for each item of equipment to the Architect/Engineer for review. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15820 - EXHAUST FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Direct drive inline exhaust fan 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fans shall be as manufactured by one of the following: 1.Penn 2. Acme 3.Cook 4. Jenn Air 5. Greenheck PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INLINE EXHAUST FAN A.Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Should motor fan or fan bearings have appreciable noise or vibration, the motor, fan wheel, bearings or all shall be replaced. Should fan have objectionable noise or vibration the fan shall be replaced. Fan tip speed shall not exceed the values in schedule. B.Fan bearings shall be self-aligning type ball bearings. Bearings shall be heavy duty type for long life. C.Fan and motor shall be mounted on a rigid frame assembly. Fan housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge metal. Fans with exposed motors and drive shall have a belt guard rigidly secured to the fan assembly. D.Fans shall have automatic dampers to open and close with fan operation. Dampers shall be rigidly constructed and not vibrate or rattle when fan is operating. E.Fan motors shall be open drip proof design and with "Electrical" item of this section. F.Capacity shall be as scheduled. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Fans shall be mounted as indicated. They shall be securely mounted. B.Provide spring isolators. C.When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to equipment. Submit listing of electrical feeder size, conduit size, breaker size, etc., for each item of equipment to the Architect/Engineer for review. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15830 - LOW VELOCITY METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent: 1.The extent of low velocity metal ductwork is indicated on the drawings and in the schedules, and by the requirements of this section. 2.Low velocity ductwork is hereby defined to include work with velocities not exceeding 2000 fpm and static pressures not exceeding 2" w.g. B.The types of ductwork specified in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Heating supply and return air systems 2. Air conditioning supply and return air systems 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Industry Standards: 1. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction and details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A.Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B.Ductwork Metal and Gages: Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 2.Gages, Ductwork: Fabricate steel ductwork (galvanized and stainless, if any) from the following minimum gages for diameters and sizes up to the corresponding maximum dimensions indicated: Round Duct Rectangular Duct 26 gage up to 13" diameter 26 gage up to 12" 24 gage up to 22" diameter 24 gage 13" to 30" 22 gage up to 36" diameter 22 gage 31" to 54" 20 gage up to 50" diameter 20 gage 55" to 84" 18 gage up to 60" diameter 18 gage 85" up 16 gage up to 84" diameter Larger diameter round ductwork not permitted. C.This Contractor shall furnish and install complete systems of ductwork shown, including plenums, casings, splitters, extractors, dampers, etc. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, ductwork and plenums shall be constructed of new galvanized prime grade lock forming steel sheets. D.Ducts and plenums shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Guide and SMACNA Manual. The Contractor shall present the Architect's representative with a copy of the SMACNA Manual at start of project. E.All flat panels of ducts 12" and larger shall be crossbroken or machine beaded. F.At each duct or plenum connection to fan and coil units, or fans, provide a flexible connection of Ventfabrics "Ventglass" (30 oz.) installed with sufficient slack to render it flexible. G.In each square elbow, provide airfoil pattern double thickness turning vanes. Turning vanes shall be constructed in accordance with the SMACNA Manual. H.At each low pressure ductwork branch from a low pressure duct and at each sweeping elbow take-off to a grille or ceiling diffuser, provide a splitter damper consisting of blade on a square operating rod fitted with an adjusting device. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, the adjusting devices located in finished ceilings shall be Ventfabrics, Inc., No. 666, with the adjusting device securely fastened to the furring and ceiling and cover shall be painted to match ceiling. Where splitters occur above removable ceiling, the damper quadrant shall be above the ceiling against the duct and shall be Ventfabrics, Inc., No. 637. I.Each individual air supply unit, whether sidewall, floor or ceiling diffuser, shall be fitted with a device to permit the adjustment of the amount of air supplied to the unit independent of any other outlet. These devices may take the form of outlet boots with extractors, or of branch ducts with splitter dampers, as installation Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 conditions dictate, but in any case, each shall be fitted with a means of manual adjustment of the amount of air delivered to the outlet. J.Where internal acoustical lining is indicated on the drawings, the duct sizes shown have allowed for the lining thickness. K.Install flexible ductwork as indicated on the plans. Install flexible ductwork such that continuous bends do not exceed 90 and bend radius is no less than 3D. 1.Low pressure flexible duct shall conform to the Class 1 requirements of the National Fire Protection Association. A nominal 1" thickness of fiberglass insulation shall be enclosed in a factory applied and sealed vapor barrier jacket. Insulated flexible duct shall be Thermaflex Type M-KE manufactured by the Flexible Tubing Corp. Flexible duct shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. All joints and connections shall be made with positive locking steel straps. Flexible ductwork shall conform to mechanical code. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A.General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of the types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. B.Duct Liner: Flexible acoustical insulating liner, complying with FS HH-I-545, Type I for round ducts and Type II for rectangular ducts and for pre-molded round duct linings, complying with NFPA Standard 90-A, one inch (1") thickness unless otherwise indicated. See Section 15848, Acoustical Lining. C.Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type applicable for the fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by the manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. D.Ductwork Support Materials: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. E.Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASC-A-7001A by The Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc. (see SMACNA standards). F.Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA Mechanical Fasteners Standard, MF- l971. 2.3 FABRICATION A.Shop Fabricated Ductwork: 1. Fabricate in 4, 8, 10 or 12-foot lengths, unless otherwise indicated or Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 required to complete runs. 2. Pre-assemble work in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. 3. Disassemble systems only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling. 4. Match-mark sections for re-assembly and coordinated installation. B.Fabricate rectangular ductwork with joints, seams and reinforcements as indicated, complying with SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards". C.Fabricate round ductwork with girth joints and girth reinforcements as indicated, complying with SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards". 1. Provide girth joints of the following types (type is fabricator's option where more than one type is indicated): a. Continuously welded b. Flanged c. Beaded sleeve 2. Reinforce round ductwork with either angle frames or flanged girth joints (or combination of both) as follows for the corresponding diameter, and space as indicated: Up to 36"; no reinforcing required Up to 60"; 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8", 72" o.c. spacing Over 60"; 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8", 48" o.c. spacing D.Duct Fittings: 1. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width. 3. Fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. 4. Limit angular tapers to 15 degrees. E.Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. F.Ductwork with Duct Liner: Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where required. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with SMACNA "Duct Liner Application Standard". Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A.General: 1. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards", which will achieve air tight and noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with a minimum of joints. 2. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. 3. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of the type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and will prevent buckling. B.Locations and Runs: 1. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. 2. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access servicing the building and its equipment. 3. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. 4. Limit clearance to 0.5" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. 5.Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1.0" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. 6.Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. 7. Coordinate the layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. C.Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. D.Penetrations Through Walls and Partitions: Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1. Conceal the space between the construction opening and the duct or duct- plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gage as the duct. 2. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1-1/2". 3.At mechanical rooms, caulk the flange to the wall and stuff compressed mineral fiber insulation into the space between duct and flange. E.Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of the ductwork system. F.Support ductwork from building structure as required and, where not otherwise indicated, anchor with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion anchors, welded studs, C-clamps or special beam clamps. G.Support for Horizontal Ducts: 1. Support ducts located against structural walls and other similar adjacent vertical surfaces, at 8'-0" spacing for ducts up to 40" horizontal dimension and 4'-0" spacing for larger ducts. a.Where width is less than height, support duct with 1-1/2" x 16 gage straps. b.Where width is more than height, support duct with shelf-type fabricated angle brackets of the following sizes: Up to 18" duct width; 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle brackets Over l8" duct width; 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle brackets 2. Hang other horizontal rectangular ducts from overhead structure, at 10'-0" spacing for duct widths up to 60" and 8'-0" spacing for larger ducts. a. Support ducts directly with 1" x 16 gage straps for ducts up to 60" width, and with 1-1/2" x 12 gage straps for ducts up to 96" width, bolted or screwed to ductwork. b. Support ducts with trapeze-type hangers with horizontal angle members and vertical support members of the sizes indicated for the corresponding duct sizes (long-side dimension): Up to 30" size; 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle and 1" x 18 gage strap or 1/4" diameter hanger rods. Up to 60" size; 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle and 1-1/2" x 16 gage strap or 3/8" diameter hanger rods. Up to 84" size; 2" x 2" x 1/8" angle and 1-1/2" x 14 gage strap or 1/2" diameter hanger rods. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 Over 84" size; 2" x 2" x 1/4" angle and 5/8" diameter hanger rods, except as otherwise shown. G.Horizontal Round Ducts: 1. Hang with encircling strap and strap hanger (of same size); except for sizes over 50" in diameter, install a pair of strap hangers bolted to opposite sides of angle reinforcing rings or flanged joints. 2. Support ducts at 10'-0" spacing with hangers as follows for the corresponding duct diameters: Up to 30" diameter; 1" x 16 gage strap hanger Up to 50" diameter; 1-1/2" x 16 gage strap hangers Up to 84" diameter; pair of 1-1/2" x 16 gage strap hangers 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Cleaning: 1. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of the metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. B.Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been damaged. C.Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at the time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent the entrance of dust and debris until the time connections are to be completed. 3.3 All duct penetrations through walls forming air plenums shall have sheet metal flange to seal opening. Seal gap between flange and wall with polysulphide sealant. 3.4 Construct acoustical lined plenums as detailed on the plans. 3.5 Ductwork from showers shall be constructed of 3003-H14 (3S-1/2 hard) aluminum. Aluminum ductwork shall be two gauges heavier than scheduled for steel ducts. Slope shower exhaust duct to exhaust grilles. 3.6 All horizontal ductwork exhausting warm humid air shall have the seams sealed watertight with EC800 and imbedded glass fabric tape. 3.7 The Contractor shall provide locally fabricated air deflection devices at duct taps into fan and coil unit plenums. Deflectors shall be constructed and adjusted to assure even air velocity across filter assembly. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 SECTION 15850 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.The extent of ductwork accessories work is shown on drawings and by the requirements of this section. B.The types of ductwork accessories required for the project include the following: 1. Turning vanes. 2. Splitter dampers. 3. Access doors. 4. Straightening grids. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Unless otherwise indicated, comply with latest SMACNA recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A.Provide ductwork accessories and ductwork materials as required by applicable sections of Division 15. Except as otherwise indicated for each ductwork accessory, provide metal type, gauge thickness, weight, construction and reinforcing as required by size limitations, and applicable SMACNA standards, including fittings, supports, and appurtenances. 2.2 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A.Provide turning vanes in the size and type indicated with the following additional construction features: 1. Blades: 2" galvanized steel for up to and including 18" ducts. 2. Construction: Double wall blade. 3. Types: Fixed blades for 90 degree elbows. B. Flexible Duct Connectors: Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 3. Provide sound and vibration flexible duct connectors on the inlet and outlet of each fan and/or fan housing to which ductwork or plenum connections are made. 4.Material: a.Flexible duct connectors, except those exposed to the weather, shall be Ventfabrics "VENTGLAS" Neoprene coated glass fabric. 5.Flexible duct connector shall be 6" wide with at least 1" of slack to insure that no vibration is transmitted. 6.Flexible connector shall be either folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar frames to provide an airtight installation capable of withstanding the system pressures. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A.Provide miscellaneous materials for ductwork accessories, including, hinges, refrigerator latches, sash locks, bolts and wing nuts, gaskets, and pitot tubes as recommended by the ductwork accessories manufacturer for the application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A.Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications for installation of ductwork materials. Install ductwork products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, with applicable portions of the details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. B.Install access doors so that the doors open against the system air pressure wherever feasible, and their latches are operable from either side except where the duct is too small to be entered. C.Coordinate work with ductwork installer. 3.3 TESTING A.Check installed ductwork accessories for required operation and leakage during the system's operational test. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 15870 - AIR DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1.The Conditions of the Contract. 2.Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1.Titus 2.Tuttle and Bailey 3. Barber-Colman 4. Carnes PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Furnish and install air diffusers as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. All units shall be constructed to have a neat, well-made appearance. Grille framework shall be rigidly constructed; flange corners shall be mitered and supported for a hairline crack. All face bars shall be of heavy gauge metal to adequately resist bending or twisting and fit tightly and closely within the framework. The units shall have a neck to slip inside ductwork for an airtight noiseless connection. Units not meeting the above specifications shall be rejected at the jobsite. 2.2 It is this Contractor's responsibility to check the architectural drawings to supply the proper air diffusers and adapting framework for the type of construction at each outlet. The frame shall be of the same finish as the unit and be of a configuration the manufacturer recommends for the construction involved. The outlets shall fit the construction with no additional expense to the Owner. All registers and grilles shall have a separate mounting frame in gypsum board walls and ceilings. 2.3 The manufacturer furnishing the air diffusers shall verify sizes against cfm requirements for each device to get the intended throw and be without objectionable noise when the device is applied to the system. He shall coordinate any approved differences from the drawings with the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish proper framework, boots and install the devices approved. 2.4 All return and discharge air diffusers shall be installed in the same configuration; i.e., all return grilles, shall be mounted to have prominent bars horizontal. 2.5 Return grilles in corridors and other areas subject to damage shall be constructed with 1/8" thick bar louvers supported on 6" center. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.6 Supply units shall have a volume control device at locations where more than one unit is connected to the same supply duct unless otherwise noted in the schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Units located in surfaces having a factory finish shall be painted off-white. Units without plating shall be coated with rust-proofing primer. Plated units shall be covered with a thick coat of plating for a complete dense coat. Check other sections of the General and Mechanical specifications to determine if painting of wall and ceiling units is to be done by another Contractor. 3.2 The Contractor shall furnish the air diffusers as scheduled. 3.3 The Contractor shall install all air diffusers securely, true and plumb. All screw holes shall have screws in them. END OF SECTION 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 1 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The general requirements for electrical work are intended to be complementary to and not instead of the General Requirements of the Construction Contract of these Specifications. B. Work Included: Provide complete electrical service where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Underground secondary electric service. 2. Main distribution panelboards. 3. Pole mounted sports lighting fixtures and lamps. 4. Lighting circuits and controls. 5. Transformers, contactors and timeclocks. 6. Wiring devices. 7. Branch circuit wiring. 8. Pole mounted area lighting 9. Other items and services required to complete the systems. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Codes: All electrical work shall conform with the requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and all local codes and ordinances. In conflicts between codes, the more stringent requirements shall govern. B. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organization are by reference made a part of these specifications and all electrical work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with their requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (A.E.I.C.) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (I.E.E.E.) American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.) American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.) Certified Ballast Manufacturers (C.B.M.) Electrical Testing Laboratories (E.T.L.) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (I.P.C.E.A.) National Bureau of Standards (N.B.S.) National Electrical Contractors Associations (N.E.C.A.) National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (N.E.M.A.) National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.) Radio-Television Manufacturer’s Association (R.T.M.A.) Reflector Luminaire Manufacturers (R.L.M.) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 2 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Act are by reference made a part of these specifications and all electrical work shall comply with their requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other divisions of the contract documents. Refer to each division’s specifications and drawings for all requirements including but not limited to the following: Section 01110 Summary. Section 01300 Administrative Requirements. Section 01400 Quality Requirements. Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. Section 01700 Execution Requirements. Division 2 Site Work. Division 3 Concrete Work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 16. 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. C. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section includes the following: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Branch circuit panelboards. 3. Safety switches. 4. Transformers. 5. Circuit breakers. 6. Lighting fixtures. 7. Lamps. 8. Conductors. 9. Conduit and fittings. 10. Cabinets. 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 3 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 11. Contactors, relays, timeclocks and controls. 12. Wiring devices; receptacles, switches. 13. Grounding system. 14. Light poles. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The use of manufacturers’ names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase “or equal” is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. B. Submittals for “equal” items shall, where applicable, include the following data which are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. C. Submittals of “equal” components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical, architectural, or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the bidders. Manufacturers, distributions, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the Owner for substitutions. E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Owner. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner. F. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also submit a bid on the “as specified” materials and equipment. G. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Owner. 1.7 UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY POWER 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 4 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 16. The location and sizes of electrical lines are shown in accordance with data secured from the Owner’s survey. Data shown is offered as an estimating guide without guarantee of accuracy. B. Temporary Power: 1. Provide temporary power in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 2. Provide temporary lighting and power system required by the building trades installed in accordance with OSHA requirements and described in the General Requirements Division 1. 1.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform excavation and backfilling associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams etc. Ground under conduits shall be well compacted before conduits are installed. D. Exterior conduits shall be installed with a minimum of 24 inches of cover below the finished grade, unless otherwise indicated or required by local ordinances. All exterior conduit shall be installed with a minimum of 12" of cover below the finished paving grade, unless otherwise indicated or required by local ordinances. E. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 90 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-58T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). F. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. G. Coordinate and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. H. In a line stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. I. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 5 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 excavation to their original condition. 1.9 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES AND INSERTS A. Furnish and install flashings where conduits pass through outside walls. Flashings shall be properly formed to fit around conduit and shall be caulked, with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation, so as to make a watertight seal between conduit and building. B. Unless otherwise specified, install sleeves for each conduit where it may pass through interior walls or floors. Galvanized 22 gauge sheet iron sleeves shall be used. Finish flush with each finished wall surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2" above the floor slab and be watertight cemented. The sized of sleeves shall be such as to readily permit the subsequent insertion of the proper size conduits of raceways. C. The conduits and raceways that pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. The inside diameter of these sleeves shall be at least ½ inch greater than the outside diameters of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed in these sleeves, fill the annular space between pipes and sleeves with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. The completed installation shall be watertight. D. All roof penetrations shall be provided with counter flashings arranged to provide a weatherproof installation. E. Penetration through walls floors and ceilings shall be done in such a manner to maintain the integrity of the fire rating of the respective wall, floor or ceiling. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching of work. 2. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work. 3. Request for Architect’s Consent: a. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit written request to the Architect for permission to proceed with cutting. b. Should conditions of the work, or schedule indicate a required change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Architect and secure his written permission and the required 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 6 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 change order prior to proceeding. 4. Perform cutting by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. 5. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 1.11 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide stamped steel access doors at each location where access is required for junction boxes, pull boxes, outlet boxes and conduit boxes that contain electrical wiring. Access doors shall be fully insulated complete with mounting flange, double thickness door, cam latch, gasket, and retaining wire. No tools shall be required to open the access door. B. The minimum size of each access door shall be sufficient to provide adequate access for the intended purpose of installation. C. Access door finish shall match adjacent architectural finishes. D. Provide access doors equal to Nailor-Hart Industries, Inc., series 0800. E. Access doors shall be coordinated with the architect prior to installation. 1.12 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Work required to correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work shall be included as part of the work of this section. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Engineer’s review. B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Engineer review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such a change shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. C. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes, or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work, and for the correct locations of pipe sleeves. 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 7 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.14 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision for interface with the work in this Section. 2. Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the schedule for work of other trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the total work. 3. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, provide required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment. 4. Install all power and control wiring for the installation of equipment furnished under Division 15 sections of work. The Contractor shall furnish all disconnect switches and other equipment as required for the proper operation of the equipment unless such equipment is specified to be factory mounted. 5. Coordinate equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with work affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes are the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B. Data indicated on the drawings and in these specifications are as exact as could be secured, but their absolute accuracy is not warranted. The exact locations, distances, levels, and other conditions will be governed by actual construction and the drawings and specifications should be used only for guidance in such regard. C. Where outlets are not specifically located on the drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where outlets are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Field verify all measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the drawings and actual measurements at the site of construction. E. Branch circuit wiring and arrangement of home runs have been designed for maximum economy consistent with adequate sizing for voltage drops and other considerations. Install the wiring with circuits arranged exactly as shown on the drawings, except as otherwise approved in advance by the Engineer. F. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but are required to be followed as closely as actual construction and other work will permit. 1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide project record documents associated with the work of Division 16 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 8 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Throughout progress of the Division 16 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the contract documents that apply to work of Division 16. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of record documents to one person on the Contractor’s staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records: 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the record documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the contract documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved project record documents. E. Maintain the job set of record documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final project record documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings: 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a “cloud” drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts: 1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, and similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the Engineer’s approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and conduit below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as “Rigid Conduit” and the like. b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item “under slab,” “in ceiling plenum,” “exposed,” and the like. 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 9 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents: 1. The purpose of the final project record documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation and examination. 2. Present a clean, neat set of reproducible mylars showing “as-build” conditions in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph “Project Record Documents”. 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Engineer for review and comments. B. Unless otherwise directed in other sections, or in writing by the Architect, submit three copies of the final manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Where instruction manuals are required to be submitted under other sections of these specifications, prepare in accordance with the following. Format: Size: 8 ½" x 11" Paper: White bond, at least 20 lb. Weight Text: Neatly written or printed Drawings:11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets:Separate each section of manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Bindings:Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect’s approval. Measurements:Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet- and-inches, lbs, and cfm; where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the “International System of Units” (SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architects, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 10 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Name and Address of Work General subject of this manual Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date E. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment involved including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer’s bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent, clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers’ data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required in pertinent sections of three specifications. 1.17 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work of Division 16 in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for main switchboard, distribution panels, and floor mounted transformers. Bases shall be four inches (4") above finished floors or grades (unless otherwise noted) and shall protrude two inches (2") beyond all sides of equipment and shall have exposed chamfered edges. Construct bases from ready-mixed hardrock concrete, ASTM C94, reinforced with #3 rebars, ASTM A615, Grade 40, at 18" on center each way. C. Field verify exact location of outdoor pad mounted electrical equipment with the Architect. Supply necessary fill and grade site to provide natural drainage away from equipment. 1.18 PAINTING 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK Page 11 of 11 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. 1.19 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered. 2. At completion of the work of this section. 3. In the underground condition prior to placing backfill, concrete floor slab, and when all associated electrical work is in place. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. D. In the Architect’s Presence: 1. Test all parts of the electrical system and prove that all such items provided under this section function electrically in the required manner. 1.20 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion of the work of this section, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the electrical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil, and other foreign material, and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. B. Thoroughly indoctrinate the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel in the contents of the operations and maintenance manual required to be submitted as part of this section of these specifications. C. All new lighting fixtures shall be operational at final inspection including replacing all lamps that do not operate. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A.Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to encompass a system that will not interfere with the structural and architectural design of the building. Coordinate the work to avoid interferences between conduit, equipment, architectural and structural work. B.Coordinate with architectural features, trim and millwork details, and install equipment in cabinets or other special areas as directed by A/E. C.Drawings are based on equipment specified. Make adjustments, modifications or changes required, due to use of other equipment, at no additional compensation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work in accordance with the latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements of applicable statutes, ordinances, codes or regulations of Federal, State and Local Authorities having jurisdiction in effect on the date bids are received. B.Where approval standards have been established by OSHA, Underwriter's Laboratories, American Codes, ASME, AGA, AMCA, ANSI, ARI, NFPA 70, State Fire Insurance Regulatory Body, and FM, these standards shall be followed whether or not indicated on Drawings and Specifications. Include the cost of all work required to comply with the requirements of these authorities in the original proposal. Comply with ANSI C2 where applicable. C.Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all equipment, material and work. In instances where capacities, size or other features of equipment, devices or materials exceed these minimums, meet listed or shown capacities. D.Resolve any code violation discovered in contract documents with the A/E prior to award of the contract. After award of the contract, make any correction or addition necessary for compliance with applicable codes at no additional compensation. E.Arrange with local and state authorities and utility companies for permits, fees and service connections, verifying locations and arrangement, and pay all charges including inspections. 1.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A.Provide new materials and equipment by those regularly engaged in the production and manufacture of specified materials and equipment. Where Underwriter's Laboratories or other agency has established standards for materials, provide materials which are listed and labeled accordingly. The commercially standard items of equipment and the specific names mentioned herein are intended to identify standards of quality and performance necessary for the proper functioning of the work. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B.Perform work by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. Install all materials and equipment to present a neat appearance when completed and in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade and in conformance with the Contract Documents. C.Provide all labor, materials, apparatus, and appliances essential to the complete functioning of the systems described or indicated herein, or which may be reasonably implied as essential whether mentioned in the Contract Documents or not. D.In cases of doubt as to the Work intended or in the event of need for explanation thereof, make written request for supplementary instructions to A/E. E.Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor variations are expected; however, performance and material requirements are the minimum standards acceptable. The right to judge the quality of equipment that deviates from the Contract Documents remains solely with A/E. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Follow the manufacturer's directions completely in the delivery, storage, and handling of equipment and materials. B.Store equipment in a clean, dry place, protected from other construction. While stored, maintain factory wrappings or tightly cover and protect equipment against dirt, water, construction debris, chemical, physical or weather damage, traffic and theft. C.Adequately brace and package equipment to prevent breakage and distortion while in transit. 1.5 SERVICE A.Immediately prior to final acceptance of project, inspect, clean and service all light fixtures. Replace all incandescent lamps. Replace all fluorescent or HID lamps if utilized for construction lighting. B.Clean and polish all fixtures, equipment, and materials thoroughly, and return to "as new" condition. C.Remove all excess material and debris. Place all electrical systems in complete working order before request for final review. Broom clean all areas. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Documents at the job site for the purpose of recording the final size, location and interrelation of all work under this Division. Mark-up this set of drawings as the job progresses to indicate "as-built" location of all equipment, including concealed conduit, equipment and the like. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1.7 FINAL REVIEW A.Obtain all necessary Certificates of Occupancy from local authorities. B.Prior to requesting final payment, submit final approved operation and maintenance manuals including approved submittals, test reports and "AS-BUILT" drawings. Delivery of operation and maintenance manuals is a condition of final acceptance. 1.8 GUARANTEE A.Guarantee materials, parts and labor for all work for one year from the date of issuance of occupancy permit. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in materials or workmanship with no additional compensation and to the complete satisfaction of A/E. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 16030-A TESTING Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16030-A - TESTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Test electrical systems and equipment. B. These tests are required to determine that the equipment involved may be safely energized and operated. C. Perform tests by and under the supervision of fully experienced and qualified personnel. Advise each respective manufacturer’s representative of tests on their equipment. D. Record all test data. E. Each section of Division 16 – Electrical that has products or systems listed herein incorporate this section by reference and is incomplete without the required tests stated herein. 1.2 REPORTS A. Submit test report forms for review a minimum of 90 days prior to requesting a final review by A/E. B. Furnish six individually bound copies of test data. Neatly type and arrange data. Include with the data the date tested, personnel present, weather conditions, nameplate record of test instrument and list all measurements taken, both prior to and after any corrections are made to the system. Record all failures and corrective action taken to remedy incorrect situation. C. A/E will retain one copy. Remaining copies will be returned to Contractor for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Section 16012. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Furnish proposed test procedures, recording forms, list of personnel and test equipment for A/E review. 16030-A TESTING Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. Follow recommended procedures for testing as published by test equipment manufacturer. C. Follow IES recommended procedures for testing ballfield lighting. 3.2 WIRE AND CABLE A. Test insulation resistance of each main feeder and service after the installation is complete but before the connection is made to its source and point of termination. B. Test insulation resistance using Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a voltage not less than 1,000 volts DC. Measure resistance from phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. In circuits where insulation test value is lower than 1 megohm, remove and replace conductor and retest. C. Visually inspect connections of every branch circuit for tightness. D. Insure that grounding conductor is electrically continuous. E. Test branch circuits against grounds, shorts or other faults. F. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. G. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. H. Test the system for stray currents, ground shorts, etc. If stray currents, shorts, etc., are detected, eliminate or correct as required. 3.3 WIRING DEVICES A. Operate switches at least twice. B. Test every convenience outlet with plug-in device for proper phasing and grounding. C. Demonstrate operation of lighting circuits and lighting control systems. 3.4 SECONDARY GROUNDING A. Test service entrance ground resistance. B. Provide additional made-electrodes if resistance is more than 3 ohms. END OF SECTION 16111 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16111 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating electrical raceway system as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 3. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 4. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 5. Non-metallic conduit and fittings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS 16111 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Provide metal conduits, tubing, fittings, and couplings of types, grades, sizes, and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings: 1. Rigid steel conduit: ANSI C80.1. 2. Fittings and conduit bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings. 1. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1: steel compression type. D. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: 1. Conduit: FS WW-C566; steel. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. E. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit and Fittings: 1. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. F. Plastic Conduit and Fittings: 1. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, straps and supports: Steel or malleable iron. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT A. Size of conduit shall be as scheduled on the drawings or sized for conductor type installed, whichever is larger. B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. 16111 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2 inch size. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. I. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit. J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints and for seismic considerations. K. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, provide mechanical firestop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise route through roof jack with pitch pocket. 16111 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 M. Maximum size conduit in slabs above grade: 3/4 inch. N. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet or in plastic conduit runs which have more than two bends regardless of length. O. Make joints in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. P. Provide plastic warning tape for underground conduit installation. 3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Underground installations more than two feet from foundation wall: Schedule 40 plastic conduit. B. Installations in or under concrete slab, or underground within two feet of foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit. C. In slab above grade: Rigid steel conduit. D. Exposed outdoor locations: Rigid steel conduit or EMT with weathertight fittings. E. Wet interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing with weathertight fittings or where allowed by code, PVC. F. Concealed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. G. Exposed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. H. Where allowed by local authorities having jurisdiction, PVC schedule 40 may be installed in exposed locations at the filtration building. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnish and install raceway systems, including: 1.Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 2.Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 3.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 4.Nonmetallic conduit and fittings. 1.2 REFERENCES A.ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated. B.NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C.NEMA TC 2 - Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). D.NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings 1.EMT: ANSI C80.3; hot-dipped galvanized tubing. 2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type. B.Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings 1.Conduit: Galvanized steel strips, spirally wound. 2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1. C.Liquidtight Flexible Conduit and Fittings 1.Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket and integral grounding conductor. 2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; liquidtight, zinc coated steel. D.Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings 1.Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. 2.Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT A.Minimum size of conduit is 1/2-inch. Indicated sizes are minimum based on THW copper wire and larger sizes may be used for convenience of wire pulling. B.Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C.Conceal conduit in ceiling of all finished areas and in walls of all areas of the building. In unfinished areas without ceilings, conduit may be run exposed overhead. Install all conduit, including conduit above accessible ceiling, parallel or perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. Neatly route conduit in a common rack where possible. D.Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances. E.Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit securely to building structure using clamps, hangers and threaded rod. F.Refer to Section 16190 for support of conduit. 3.2 GENERAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION A.Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends before joining. B.Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C.Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. D.Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. E.Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. Seal conduit which crosses a boundary between areas of extreme temperature difference. F.Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. G.Drawings indicate intended circuiting and are not intended to be scaled for exact conduit location. H.Install conduit such that it does not interfere with fireproofing of steel. I.Do not install conduit in floor slab of ground floor of building. 3.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT INSTALLATION A.Wipe nonmetallic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes minimum. 3.4 METALLIC CONDUIT INSTALLATION A.Make joints mechanically tight and all conduit electrically continuous. B.Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. Use sealing locknuts and other approved techniques for moisture proofing raceway in wet areas. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C.Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2-inch size. D.Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints and at 150 foot intervals in straight runs. E.Provide fire-stop compound at all penetrations of floor slabs or firewalls such that fire-rating integrity of barrier is not lessened. 3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A.Exterior 1.Exposed a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit. b.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit for connection to vibrating equipment including motors, transformers and control devices. 2.Underground a.Rigid nonmetallic conduit for all branch circuits. b.Rigid nonmetallic conduit for all feeders. B.Interior 1.Exposed a.Electrical metallic tubing. 2.Concealed a.Electrical metallic tubing. 3.Cast-in-Concrete: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 4.Connections to Equipment a.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit in areas subject to moisture, high humidity, or corrosive agents. b.Flexible metal conduit in dry, noncorrosive areas. END OF SECTION 16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16112 - SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16110 - General requirements for Electrical Work. 2. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a completed surface raceway system as indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Auxiliary Gutters (Wireways). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. Where Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for such materials, provide only materials bearing the UL label. 2.2 AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Auxiliary Gutters: General purpose or Rain-tight type wireway, with knockouts. B. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Cover: Hinged screw applied cover with full gasketing. D. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws and drip shield. E. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - AUXILIARY GUTTER A. Bolt auxiliary gutter to wall using two-piece hangers or steel channels fastened to the wall or in self-supporting structure. Install level. B. Gasket each joint in oil-tight gutter. C. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only. END OF SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE Page 1 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16111 - Raceways and Fittings. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of conductors as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Building Wire. 2. Cable. 3. Wiring connections and terminations. 4. Underground wire installed in conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Provide conductors made of soft-drawn annealed copper with conductivity not less than that of 98% pure copper; Anaconda, Triangle Cable Company, or approved equal. B. Building Wire: 16120 WIRE AND CABLE Page 2 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 1. Thermoplastic-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 5. 2. Feeders and branch circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volts insulation, THHN/THWN. 3. Control circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN. 4. Use the following color code system: 120/208 Volt System 277/480 Volt System Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green C. Remote Control and Signal Cables: 1. Control cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 75 degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with PVC jacket; UL listed. 2. Plenum cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 75 degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 20 AWG for control wiring. B. Unless indicated otherwise on the contract drawings, use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet. C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. D. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. 16120 WIRE AND CABLE Page 3 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. B. Plenum rated cable above ceilings shall be routed in neat and workmanship manner, bundle cables together with cable ties and route parallel to building walls and structure. Support bundles from walls or structure, not from equipment. C. Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Include bridle rings or drive rings. D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices, tape, and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 16120 WIRE AND CABLE Page 4 of 4 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under applicable provisions of Division 1 and Division 16. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer’s recommended values. D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing of all connections. 3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. All locations: Building wire in raceways. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16120 - WIRE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnish and install wire and cable, including: 1.Building wire. 2.Wiring connections and terminations. 1.2 REFERENCES A.NEMA WC 3 - Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. B.NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A.Thermoplastic-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5. B.Rubber-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3. C.Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than #6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW, RHW. D.Feeders and Branch Circuits #6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN; smaller than #8 AWG, solid conductor. E.Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600-volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN. F.Plenum Rated Cable: Provide plenum rated cable where cable is installed exposed in plenums. G.Non-metallic sheathed cable with copper conductors for branch circuits as allowed. 2.2 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND SPLICES A.Connect and splice wire #8 AWG and smaller with self-insulating, wire nut connectors. B.Set screw type connectors are only acceptable on the load side lugs of Class I and II switchboards, panelboards, circuit breakers, fusible switches and on individual motor controllers. C.Where three or more conductors larger than #8 AWG are installed in wiring gutter, utilize a screw-type power distribution block. Utilize split-bolt mechanical Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 connector, filled and taped for smooth joint, only where specifically requested by Contractor and approved by A/E. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A.Use no wire smaller than #12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than #14 AWG for control wiring. Provide minimum of #12 AWG for all switch legs. Provide neutral conductor of the same size as the phase conductors to which it is associated. B.Use #10 AWG conductor minimum for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 100 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. C.Provide homerun conductors of continuous length without joint or splice from overcurrent device to first outlet. D.Provide main service and feeder conductors of continuous length without joint or splice for their entire length. E.Install feeders in conduit, except feeders to unit load centers may utilize NMC as allowed. Branch circuits may use NMC as allowed by local authority. F.Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, wiring gutters, and other equipment using Thomas & Betts "Ty-Wraps." G.Provide equal conductor lengths and size for all parallel circuits. H.Support NMC per NEC. I.Drawings indicate proposed circuiting only, and do not indicate every conductor unless intent is unclear and further clarification is required. Provide the necessary travelers for all three-way and four-way switches. J.Tag each circuit in an outlet box where two or more circuits run to a single outlet as a guide for the fixture hanger in making connections. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A.Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended tension. B.Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C.Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. D.Remove and discard conductors cut too short or installed in wrong raceway. Do not install conductors which have been removed from a raceway. E.Do not install conductors in conduit which contains wires already in place. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A.Make taps and splices in accessible junction or outlet boxes only. B.Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. C.Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. D.Provide joints in branch circuits only where such circuits divide. Where circuits divide, provide one through circuit to which the branch is spliced from the circuit. Do not leave joints in branch circuits for fixture hanger to make. Make all taps and splices with approved type compression connector. E.Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. F.Identify and label all conductor terminations as specified in electrical identification. G.Properly terminate indicated conductors in equipment furnished and provide properly sized lugs. 3.4 COLOR CODING A.Color code all distribution systems as follows: 1.120/208V System Phase Color A Black B Red C Blue N White G Green B.Provide color coding throughout the full length of all wire No. 6 and smaller. Identification by permanent paint bands or tags at the outlets will be acceptable for wire sizes larger than No. 6. Provide the same color and shade of color throughout the project. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. B.Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. END OF SECTION 16130 BOXES Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16130 - BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of outlet, pull, and junction boxes as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Pull and junction boxes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Provide standard, stamped galvanized steel outlet boxes except as hereinafter noted, by Steel City or approved equal. B. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Ground mounted concrete boxes as manufactured by Quazite, model #PG1730 BA 12 or equal by Oldcastle. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS 16130 BOXES Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16130 - BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnish and install wall and ceiling outlet boxes, floor boxes, and pull and junction boxes. 1.2 REFERENCES A.NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A.Provide deep type cast metal outlet boxes located in damp locations exposed to weather or exposed areas subject to damage, complete with gasketed cover and threaded hubs. A. Provide outlet boxes of sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, and not less than 1 1/2 inch deep unless shallower boxes are required by structural conditions and are especially approved by A/E. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A.Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B.Electrical box locations shown on Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify with A/E location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in. C.Locate and install boxes to allow access. Provide access doors where installation is inaccessible. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with those specified in Division 15 - Mechanical. D.Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A.Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. B.Provide pull boxes in feeder circuits as required but at least every 150 feet in straight runs. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C.Identify all junction boxes by circuit number on cover with legible permanent ink marker. D.Provide weatherproof pull boxes or junction boxes where installed outdoors with watertight gasketed covers fastened by means of corrosion resistant screws. END OF SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Wall switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Device plates and box covers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES A. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated. B. Provide color selection chart to the Architect for review and selection for all wiring devices and device plates. C. Wall Switches: 1. Snap Switches: General duty flush single pole, 20-amperes, 120/277 volts AC, Leviton 5521 series. 16141 WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2. Three-way Switches: General duty flush single pole, 20-ampere, 120/277 x volts AC, Leviton 5523 series. D. Receptacles: 1. General Duty Duplex: Flush 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type, 20-amperes, 125 volts AC with NEMA Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Leviton 16362 series. E Device Plates and Box Covers: 1. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates; wallplates colored to match wiring devices. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features: Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation:, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. C. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings. D. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas, using jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets. F. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. H. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. I. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces. 16141 WIRING DEVICES Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 J. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. K. Install wallplates after painting work is completed. L. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. M. The Contractor may be directed by the Architect to move a wiring device during the rough-in stage of construction. The Contractor shall move devices at no additional cost if within six (6) feet of where shown on the documents. 3.2 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES A. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3.4 TESTING A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short- circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirement. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnish and install specification grade wiring devices, including: 1.Receptacles. 2.Device plates and box covers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Furnish samples of all devices and plates before purchase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Receptacles 1.Arrow-Hart. 2.Hubbell. 3.Leviton. 4.Pass & Seymour. B.Cover Plates: Match device manufacturer. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A.20A, 125V, 2P3W Duplex: NEMA 5-20R; standard duty. 2.2 COVER PLATES A.Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. B.Exposed Box Cover Plate: Stamped steel handy box covers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building materials, debris, etc. B.Align the tops of all group mounted devices. Install plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall. C.Provide ground fault circuit interrupting type devices in all locations requiring weatherproof devices. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D.Feed through feature for ground fault interrupting devices may be used. Install GFI device at each location. GFI circuit breaker will not be acceptable. E.Mounting Heights 1.Refer to architectural drawing or contact A/E. END OF SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical cabinets and enclosures as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Hinged cover enclosures. 2. Cabinets. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA Type 1or 3R as indicated. B. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard gray enamel finish. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush vandal resistant latch operable by key. Make keys interchangeable with new enclosures of the same voltage and use. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel, 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Page 2 of 2 Roland Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 manufacturer’s standard gray enamel. 2.2. CABINETS A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, 24 inches wide, 10 inches deep. Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks. B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, screw cover front concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide knockouts on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb minimum 6'-6" from finished grade or floor to top of enclosure. END OF SECTION 16190-A SUPPORTING DEVICES Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16190-A - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install supporting devices, including: 1. Conduit and equipment supports. 2. Fastening hardware. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with section on cast-in- place concrete. B. Coordinate size, shape and requirements for utility company equipment with local utility company. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide support systems adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring that they carry. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. B-Line. B. Kindorf. C. Unistrut. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel. B. Hardware: Galvanized or painted steel. C. Provide epoxy or PVC coated materials for corrosive environments. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 16190-A SUPPORTING DEVICES Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, beam clamps or bolts. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction. C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors on new concrete structure. E. Do not drill structural steel members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Provide concrete pads and equipment bases for all outdoor equipment on grade, floor mounted equipment, areas with floors below grade, penthouse equipment rooms and where indicated on the plans. H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. J. Do not support conduit from ceiling wire supports. K. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps or support conduits by individual hanger wires. L. Where multiple runs of conduit can be run grouped together, run conduit in racks supported from the building structure. Provide for future use of rack by properly planning routing of conduits in and through restricted areas such as through walls and around mechanical and electrical equipment. END OF SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of identification for electrical equipment as shown and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Nameplates and tape labels. 2. Wire and cable markers. 3. Buried conduit markers. 4. Junction and pull box identifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve, or tubing type. C. Buried Conduit Marker: Continuous printed plastic tape. 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. 3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings for control wiring. 3.3 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/4 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 3.4 BURIED CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. B. Provide tape with printing of “Buried Electrical Conduit” or other similar warning. Install directly above buried conduit 10" below finished grade. 3.5 JUNCTION AND PULL BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Identify circuits contained within each junction and pull box with permanent marker. END OF SECTION 16195-A ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 SECTION 16195-A - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install items for identification of electrical products installed under Division 16. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Provide engraved three-layer laminated plastic nameplates with white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Provide vinyl cloth markers with split sleeve or tubing type, except in manholes provide stainless steel with plastic ties. C. Underground Warning Tape 1. Manufactured polyethylene material and unaffected by acids and alkalies. 2. 3.5 mils thick and 6 inches wide. 3. Tensile strength of 1,750 psi lengthwise. 4. Printing on tape shall include an identification note BURIED ELECTRIC LINE, and a caution note CAUTION. Repeat identification and caution notes over full length of tape. Provide with black letters on a red background conforming to APWA recommendations. D. Panelboard Directories: Provide a circuit directory for each panelboard. Mount circuit directory in a permanent, clear Lexan cardholder located on inside of door on panelboard. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. 16195-A ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 07/06/2016 3.2 WIRE AND CABLE LABELING A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in splice boxes, pull boxes, and at first load connection on homerun. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings for control wiring. 3.3 EQUIPMENT LABELING A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment. B. Engraved, Laminated Plastic Nameplates: ¼-inch letters, equipment designation; 1/8-inch letters, source circuit number. Provide for: 1. Panelboards. 2. Enclosed switches, starters, circuit breakers and contactors. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Provide phenolic nameplate on cover exterior to indicate motor served. 3. Transformers if identified on Drawings. END OF SECTION 16402 UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16402 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 16110 - General Requirements for Electrical Work. 3. Section 16111 - Raceways and Fittings. 4. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete underground electric service as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Conduit 2. Conductors 3. Concrete 4. Ductbank 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Conduit: See Section 16111 B. Concrete: 3,000 psi with additive to give permanent red color, 3/4" maximum aggregate size. See Section 03300. C. Conductors: See Section 16120 16402 UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D. Cable Lugs: Suitable for the application. E. Drainage Assembly: Provide ½" drain assembly. Drain for each conduit. F. Duct Spacers: Fabricated plastic, UL approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide adaptation from conduit to fiber duct. B. Slope service to drainage point. C. Terminate service conduit in main switchboards with grounding bushing. Make ground connection from bushing to distribution centers ground bus. D. Terminate service conduit at pad mounted transformer with grounding bushing. Make ground connection from bushing to transformer housing or ground bus. 3.2 DUCTBANK A. Place concrete so that voids around ducts are filled. B. Provide minimum concrete thickness between ducts of 2 inches. C. Adjust final slopes onsite to coordinate with existing utilities. D. Install drain assembly with saddle cutouts for each conduit. Tape drain assembly to each conduit to prevent entrance of concrete. Band drain assembly with ½" stainless steel straps to conduit assembly to prevent mechanical displacement. E. After installation, clean and swab ducts. F. Install galvanized steel pullwires in spare ducts. Cap spare ducts. 3.3 SERVICE INSTALLATION A. Provide ductbank and trench from property line to padmount transformer. B. Adapt to rigid steel conduit encased in concrete. END OF SECTION 16440-A DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16440-A - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install disconnect switches, including: 1. Fuses. 2. Enclosures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. UL 198E – Class J Fuses. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish dimensions and ratings for voltage, ampacity, horsepower and short circuit. B. Indicated enclosure material finish and NEMA classification type. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Disconnect Switches 1. General Electric 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Westinghouse. B. Fuses 1. Bussman. 2. Gould-Shawmut. 3. Littlefuse. 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy duty; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class J. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy duty; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. 16440-A DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Enclosures: Unless indicated otherwise, provide general purpose, NEMA 1 for indoor locations; and weatherproof, NEMA 3R for outdoor locations; except at cooling tower, provide NEMA 4, stainless steel. D. General-Use Snap Switch: Motors of one HP or less as allowed by code. E. Construct all current carrying parts of high conductivity copper with silver-plated switch contacts. F. Provide solid copper neutral bar where a neutral is present in the circuit. 2.3 FUSES A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: UL 198E, Class J; as indicated on drawings; time delay, dual element, current limiting, 600 volt. B. Fuses Over 600 Amperes: Class L, bolt-on type with time delay and capability to hold 500 percent rated fuse current for a minimum of four seconds and clear 20 times rated fuse current in .01-second or less. Provide fuses with ‘O’ ring seals between end bells and glass melamine barrel similar to Bussman time delay KRP-C. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. D. Provide all fuses of the same manufacturer. E. Install fuses in motor circuits in accordance with motor manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide disconnect switches, where required by National Electrical Code, where indicated on drawings, and where required by equipment manufacturer, in a location convenient for maintenance on each switch and adjacent equipment. B. Provide fused disconnect switches when required to maintain equipment manufacturer’s warranty. Coordinate with Division 15 for warranty requirements of equipment approved by submittal. C. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Provide permanent marking inside switch enclosure for fuse type. D. Wall mount switches, where possible, or mount on Uni-Strut supports. E. Provide fuse identification label showing type and size inside door of each switch. END OF SECTION 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16111 - Raceways and Fittings. 2. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical systems grounding as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Power system grounding. 2. Communication system grounding. 3. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval: 1. Material list of items proposed to be provided as part of the work of this section. 2. Proposed method of grounding, including drawings indicating location and sizes of grounding materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical grounding system indicated with assembly of materials, including but not limited to: 1. Wires and cables. 2. Connectors. 3. Terminals. 4. Ground rods. 5. Bonding jumper braid. 6. Surge arrestors. B. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. C. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 3/4" diameter, minimum length 8 feet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. C. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged opening at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. D. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rod in main service equipment areas. E. Use minimum 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board. F. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company’s metering equipment in accordance with Section 16420. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms. 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 END OF SECTION 16461 TRANSFORMERS Page 1 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16461 - TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. 2. Section 03300 - Cast In Place Concrete. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of power transformers as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Dry type transformers. (Primary less than 600 volts.). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided as part of the work of the section. 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 16461 TRANSFORMERS Page 2 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The transformers shall be manufactured by the following: 1. Square D Company 2. General Electric 3. Jefferson 4. Cutler- Hammer 5. Approved Equal B. All transformers shall be new and manufactured by the same company. 2.2 DRY TYPE TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS (PRIMARY LESS THAN 600 VOLTS) A. Dry-Type Transformers: ANSI/NEMA ST20; factory-assembled, air cooled dry type transformers; ratings as scheduled on the Drawings. Transformers shall conform with ANSI C89.2 and NEMA ST20 standards and Underwriters Laboratories Listing UL506. B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows: KVA Rating Insulation Class Rise (degree c) 1-15 Class F UL185C [115c.] 30-500 Class H UL220C [150c.] C. Maximum case temperature shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above a 40 Degree C. ambient at its warmest point. D. Winding Taps 25 KVA and Smaller: ANSI/NEMA ST 20. Primary windings shall have 4 taps; two 2-1/2% increments above full-rated voltage and two 2-1/2% increments below full rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing operations. E. Winding Taps 25 KVA and Larger: ANSI/NEMA ST 20. Primary windings shall have 6 taps; two 1-1/2% increments above full-rated voltage and four 2-1/2% increments below full-rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing operation. F. Sound Levels: Guaranteed sound ratings hall no exceed ANSI standard decibel 16461 TRANSFORMERS Page 3 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 levels. G. Basic Impulse Level: 10 KV for transformers less than 300 KVA, 30 KV for transformers 300 KVA and larger. H. Enclosures: 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. I. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. Transformers 30 KVA and larger shall have core and core assembly completely isolated from enclosure with neoprene rubber pads. J. Transformers shall have heat barriered termination compartment arranged for feeder terminations for side or bottom entrance of flexible metallic raceways. K. Transformers shall have a bonding jumper installed between the secondary neutral terminal and the metal case and shall include a ground terminal of proper size to receive ground conductor. L. The transformer impedance shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Coordinate with loadside power distribution equipment manufacturer and verify that the maximum transformer short circuit current availability from the transformer does not exceed loadside equipment short circuit ratings. Report discrepancies to the Engineer. Revise transformer impedance (if required) at no additional cost to Owner. 2.3 IDENTIFICATION A. All associated conductors and/or cables exiting from conduit or cable shall be bundled with ties, similar to the T&B conductor markers. B. All individual conductors shall be identified at their termination by a wraparound type of identification similar to T&B conductor markers. C. All terminal blocks and terminals in the switchgear and control cabinets shall have identification similar to the conductor groups mentioned above. D. The identification of conductors, cables, and conduit shall conform to that set forth in their respective schedules. 16461 TRANSFORMERS Page 4 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards. Install in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate transformer installation work with electrical raceway and wire/cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective ground. D. Set transformer plumb and level. Install vibration isolation pads for all transformers. E. Adjust taps to provide rated secondary voltage as close as practicable and as required to accommodate owners requirements. F. Field modify transformer pad, primary and secondary conduit locations and switchgear interface as required to accommodate new transformers. All modifications shall be in accordance with existing equipment manufacturers recommendations and requirements. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Within 5 days after delivery to the work site and prior to installation perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. Compare transformer and accessories nameplate information with the specification and report discrepancies. 2. Inspect transformer and accessories and report installation or shipping damage, loose material, shipping blocks or contamination that must be corrected. 3. Check operation of doors and access covers. Report deficiencies. 4. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Check pressure relief, fault pressure, temperature meters for functional operation. Report deficiencies. 5. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Take an insulating liquid sample, test dielectric, and water content. Record values and report deficiencies. 6. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Remove access covers and report any damage or loose materials inside of tank 1 enclosure that must be corrected. 16461 TRANSFORMERS Page 5 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 7. Move no-load tap changer through all positions and test turns-ratio on each point. Record values and report deficiencies. 8. Units with Primaries Rated Greater than 1000 Volts: Power Factor test transformer bushings, record values and report unfavorable conditions. 9. Dry Type Units: Check air filters and air circulation for proper operation, correct deficiencies. B. Repairs and Replacements: 1. In event of damage or deficiencies promptly make replacement and repairs to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Promptly remove damaged and unsuitable transformers from the job site, and promptly replace with equipment meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be considered as a means to justify and extension in the Contract Time of Completion. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer. B. Check transformer for level, security to foundation and operation of doors. Correct deficiencies. C. Check the equipment ground bus and straps. Correct deficiencies. D. Make necessary tap adjustments on transformers to insure that the secondary voltages at the transformer terminals will be as close as possible to design voltage when the building is in normal operation. END OF SECTION 16470-A PANELBOARDS Page 1 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16470-A - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install distribution and lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Include outline and support point dimensions, NEMA enclosure type, voltage, main bus ampacity and material, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes. 1.4 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish two keys to Owner for each panelboard, all keyed alike. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Hammer. B. General Electric. C. Siemens. D. Square D. 2.2 GENERAL A. Conform to UL standards and bear UL label. Form cabinets from code gauge galvanized steel. Form fronts of code gauge cold rolled steel bonderized after fabrication. B. Provide cabinet fronts with concealed hinges, concealed adjustment means and master keyed flush lock. Provide weatherproof panel for outside installation. C. Provide with main lugs and breakers or fuses as scheduled on Drawings. Provide main lug connection to accommodate T & B compression connector on end of cable. Attach connector to panel bus with two bolts per lug. Provide captive type bolts or studs to facilitate reinstallation of the lugs with the wire attached. 16470-A PANELBOARDS Page 2 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D. Provide all panelboards with copper bus of the ratings scheduled and designed for all indicated devices and spaces, complete with taps and trim. E. Minimum integrated short circuit rating 10,000 amps RMS symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; or as shown on Drawings. Integrated ratings may be based on tested series ratings in conjunction with feeder breaker actually used. F. Size bus bars to limit the temperature rise within the panelboard to 50 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient temperature. G. Provide adequate space and provisions for wire #6 AWG and larger conductors to terminate with compression type connector to main lugs. 2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Lighting Branch Circuit Panelboards: Circuit breaker type for all common area panels. B. Enclosure: outside installation type; unless indicated otherwise. C. Provide insulated neutral bus and separate copper grounding bus bonded to enclosure. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip branch circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide non-automatic breakers as main device in living unit panels. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. E. Sequence phase all adjacent breakers. All circuit breaker connection straps shall be rated at 100 amperes minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards plumb and flush with wall finishes, in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. Mount securely to walls or structural spaces. B. Height: Install wall mounted panelboards at 6 feet to the top of the enclosure. C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. D. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard mounted in permanent, clear Lexan card holder located on inside of door. Prepare directories only after permanent room numbers have been assigned. Do not use room numbers shown on Drawings. 16470-A PANELBOARDS Page 3 of 3 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 E. Stub one empty 1 inch conduits to accessible location above ceiling out of each recessed panelboard. F. Arrange branch circuit connections in three phase lighting and appliance panelboards such that when two or three circuits are run with a common neutral, each circuit is connected to a different phase. G. Distribute loading on circuits in panelboards to balance the load as evenly as possible in each phase. H. Terminate only one conductor under each lug of branch circuit breakers. I. Do not make splices or taps in panelboard gutters. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers. END OF SECTION 16471 PANELBOARDS Page 1 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16471 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16160 - Cabinets and Enclosures. 2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical panelboards as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Power distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and branch circuit panelboards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The panelboards shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D Company 2. General Electric 16471 PANELBOARDS Page 2 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. Siemens 2.2 PANELBOARDS (GENERAL) A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and shall be so labeled, rated for intended voltage and current characteristics as scheduled. B. Cabinets for panelboards shall be by NEC gage sheet steel having steel doors and trim to conform to the cabinet mounting. The trim on cabinets shall be made adjustable with the door. Door shall be mounted with heavy concealed hinges. C. Cabinets shall have wiring space top, bottom, and both sides in accordance with the National Electrical Code, but no less than 4-inches wide, with standard knockouts. D. Provide a clear plastic covered typed directory card and card holder on the inside of each door. Key locks alike and provide Owner with not less than 5 keys. Finish shall be gray enamel over a rust inhibitor, except cans may be galvanized. E. Multi section panels shall be same height and depth. F. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled, consisting of rigid frame supporting the rectangular bus, mains, neutral and ground bars. Bussing shall be sized in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standards, braced throughout to conform with industry standards governing short circuit stresses in panelboards, and arranged for sequence phasing throughout. G. Phase bussing shall be full height copper without reduction, full size neutral, unless otherwise scheduled, with suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring a neutral connection. H. Terminals for feeder conductors, branch circuit devices and neutrals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductors specified. I. Interiors shall be designed such that circuit protective devices may be changed, replaced, or additional circuits added without disturbing adjacent units and without machining, drilling, or tapping. In no case shall the width of panelboard enclosure be less than 20-inches. J. Enclosures: 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or 16471 PANELBOARDS Page 3 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 brackets. 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98% conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. B. Provide bolt-in type heavy duty molded-case main and branch circuit-breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple- pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. C. On Multi section and split-bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.4 LIGHTING AND BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors. B. Equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole circuit-breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Interrupting rating shall be in excess of the available fault current at the panel in accordance with UL listing for sizes involved, but no less than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. C. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide 16471 PANELBOARDS Page 4 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboard. D. On multisection and split-bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.5 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall be molded case, capacity as indicated, in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall be quick- make, quick-break thermal magnetic common trip type, ambient compensated with trip-free handle and have interrupting rating in accordance with UL listings for sizes required, but not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, and conform to requirements of NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1-1969. Each unit shall have insulated neutral and/or ground terminal of proper size, where indicated. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper cables. B. Enclosures: 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R. C. Circuit breakers shall be of same manufacturer as panelboards. D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Square D, General Electric, Siemens. 2.6 PANELBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, circuit-breakers, ground-fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 16471 PANELBOARDS Page 5 of 5 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA’S “Standard of Installation”, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. D. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. E. Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating loads controlled by each circuit. F. Install wall mounted panelboards a maximum of 6 feet 6 inches above finish floor to top of panel. END OF SECTION 16485 CONTACTORS Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16485 - CONTACTORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of contactors as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Lighting contactors. 2. Enclosures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. Where Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for such materials, provide only materials bearing the UL label. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. The contactors shall be Cutler-Hammer or approved equal as manufactured by Square D Company or General Electric Company. 2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2: electrically held, 2 wire control. B. Coil Operating Voltages: 120/277 or 480 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Contacts: As indicated on drawings. 16485 CONTACTORS Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 D. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6: Type 3R. E. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION 16485-A CONTACTORS Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16485-A - CONTACTORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish written verification that contactor type is compatible with all controlling devices. B. Indicate enclosure material finish and NEMA classification type. C. Provide operation and maintenance manual. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Allen-Bradley. B. ASCO. C. General Electric. D. Square D. 2.2 ELECTRICALLY HELD CONTACTORS A. Electrically held for two-wire control. B. Encapsulate coils and rate for continuous duty. 2.3 MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS A. Mechanically held for three-wire control. B. Encapsulate coils and internally wire to prevent continuous operation. 2.4 GENERAL A. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 hertz with cover mounted H.O.A. switch. B. Contacts: Provide the number of contacts for the control functions indicated plus two additional contacts, field convertible to normally open or normally closed contacts. C. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals. 16485-A CONTACTORS Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Provide single pole double throw momentary switches controlling mechanically held contactors where switches are shown on Drawings controlling contactors. C. Coordinate controlling devices such as time clocks and photocells with contactor furnished for compatible system. D. Identify with nameplate. Label each circuit controlled. END OF SECTION 16491 DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16491 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s Specifications and Drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following; 1. Division 15- Controls and Instrumentation. 2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 3. Section 16483 - Motor Service. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of disconnect switches as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Service Entrance Rated Disconnect. 2. Circuit disconnects. 3. Motor disconnects. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer’s certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Provide disconnect switches manufactured by one of the following: 1. Siemens. 2. General Electric. 3. Square D Company. 16491 DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 600 volts, and incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is padlockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high- conductivity copper. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters’ Laboratory Label. B. Single Phase Disconnect Switches: Two pole toggle switch in NEMA type/or 3R enclosure as indicated. C. Three Phase Motor Disconnect Switches: Three pole heavy duty 600 volt as required in NEMA Type 1 or 3R enclosures as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated complying with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, and in accordance with recognized industry practices. END OF SECTION 16503 POLES AND STANDARDS Page 1 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16503 - POLES AND STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 09910 - Painting. 3 Section 16450 - Grounding. 4. Section 16530 - Site Lighting. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of poles and standards as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Concrete bases and base reinforcement. 2. Anchor bolts. 3. Painting. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide poles and standards as specified on the lighting fixture schedule or an approved equal. 16503 POLES AND STANDARDS Page 2 of 2 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 2.2 POLES A. Configuration: As Specified of fixture schedule. B. Handhole: Complete with removable weatherproof cover installed 18 inches above bottom of pole. C. Finish: Factory painted. 2.3 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide four anchor bolts per pole; complete with flat washers, lock washers, and hexagonal nuts for each pole. (All items to be hot-dipped galvanized.) B. Provide template for positioning of anchor bolts. C. Provide anchor bolt covers painted to match pole. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BASES A. Construct as indicated on the structural contract drawings. B. Install anchor bolts with 2 inch projection above top of bases unless indicated otherwise on the contract drawings. C. Bases shall extend beyond Anchor base cover a minimum of 2” on all sides. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mount standards on bases plumb and true, utilizing shims as necessary. B. Touch-up chips and scratches on poles upon completion. END OF SECTION Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16505 - LIGHTING FIXTURES - BUILDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnish and install light fixtures associated with building, including: 1.Interior luminaires and accessories. 2.Lamps. 3.Ballasts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Include product data for fixtures, including photometric data, reflectance, lens, lamps, ballasts, poles and lighting control. B.Furnish samples to A/E for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Lighting Fixtures 1.Manufacturers of individual lighting fixtures shall be as scheduled on Drawings, and indicate quality and design features required. 2.Products of other manufacturers will be considered upon submittal of proper data. 2.2 GENERAL A.Provide lighting fixtures of the size, type and rating indicated, complete with lamps, lampholders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, wiring and accessories. B.Where fixtures are recessed mounted in ceiling system, provide trim and accessories required for installation in the ceiling system installed. C.It is the intent of Drawings and Specifications to indicate the type of fixture for each intended use. It is generally intended that rooms of similar usage and configuration will have similar fixture types. Where fixture type is not indicated, it is the duty of the Contractor to request clarification prior to proceeding with the work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Support surface-mounted luminaires to ceiling using bolts, screws, or approved clips. B.Install recessed luminaires with proper frames in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C.Support pendant or bracket fixtures as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer for job conditions encountered. D.Connect photocell into system to signal darkness and timeclock to de-energize system at a preset time. E.Install lamps in luminaires and lampholders. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Coordinate receipt and installation of all fixtures with regard to the overall schedule of the project. B.Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. Clean paint splatters, dirt and debris from installed luminaires. C.Demonstrate proper operation of all luminaires and controls. D.Refer to Section 16010 regarding lamp replacement prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION 16510 SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES Page 1 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 SECTION 16510 – SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 16120 - Wires and Cables. 2. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 3. Section 16501 - Lamps. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of lighting fixtures as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. High intensity discharge lighting fixtures. 2. LED lighting fixtures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide lighting fixtures of the types specified on the Drawings or an approved equal. 16510 SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES Page 2 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 B. ELECTRICAL STEEL DEVICES Stainless steel materials shall be used for all fasteners, latches, hinges, and threaded devices. All stainless steel shall be clear thermoset polymer coated. C. ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS Branch circuits for each lighting structure shall be provided that includes the following: 1. Disconnect –Disconnect Switch. 2. Landing lugs for the feeder circuit as part of the disconnecting device. 3. Fuse block for individual fusing each load carrying conductor of each lamp circuit. (Neutral conductors are not fused). 4. Manufacturer shall provide all branch circuits completed from the disconnecting device to the lamp with either plug-in or landing lug connections provided for completion of circuits during the field installation. This is to assure that the electrical equipment on the pole is in conformance with UL standards. 5. Wire harness shall be provided with: (a) Uniformly wound conductors to avoid excessive stress on any individual conductors. (b) Mylar wrapped wire harness to prevent unraveling of the conductors. (c) Kellum grips attached and tied for mounting the wires inside the pole. (d) Plug-in connections for each end of the wire harness to connect it to the electrical component enclosure near the base of the pole and to the lamps at the top of the pole to assure proper matching of circuits. 6. Assembly and wiring of the fixtures to a plug-in connection is to be completed by the manufacturer who is to provide a warranty of the entire assembly. Manufacturer shall provide a schematic of the wiring on the inside of the door of the electrical component enclosure. 7. Grounding of the electrical system and the equipment shall be provided throughout the pole structure for connection to ground rods and feeder circuit ground wires. 16510 SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES Page 3 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 8. Mounting of the NEMA 3R enclosure containing all electrical components, except the lamps, shall be near the base of the pole with the bottom of the enclosure 8 feet above the ground to allow the step ladder maintenance access. 9. UL (Underwriter Laboratories) listing report shall be provided for the entire base and pole assembly and its included electrical systems in addition to the use of UL listed components within the system. 2.2 H.I.D. SPORTS LIGHTING SYSTEM A. The lighting system shall consist of steel poles with 1500 watt metal halide fixtures pre-wired and pre-aimed. The fixture configuration shall be indicated on the luminaire / Pole schedule. B. Lighting Performance: Guaranteed maintained illumination levels as measured by a light meter on a horizontal plane shall be as follows: Baseball : 50 fc infield, 30 fc outfield Constant Illumination. Soccer Area: 30fc. Constant Illumination C. Uniformity shall be a minimum of 2 to 1 on the infield and 2.5 to 1 on the outfield for the Baseball fields. Uniformities shall be a minimum of 2 to 1 on the Soccer Fields. D. Bidders shall supply computer generated point-by-point light scans based on 155,000 lumens per lamp showing both initial and maintained footcandle levels on lighting systems that depreciate and a scan showing the target values on lighting systems that provide Constant Illumination. E. A Recoverable LLF of 0.70 shall be used on systems that do not provide Constant Illumination. Initial illumination levels as measured by a light meter on a horizontal plane shall be as follows for these systems: F. All lighting manufacturer’s must submit an independent report by a third party licensed engineer that documents independent testing of an installed system that uses the same type of equipment proposed for this project. This test should outline the computer predicted target light levels along with actual, verified light levels tested at various time intervals during the proposed life of the lamp. The report shall clearly identify light loss factors used and state if the predicted light levels were met until the end of the published lamp life. G. There shall be an individual ballast for each fixture, the ballast shall be located remote from the luminaire crossarm and shall be approx. 12 feet above final 16510 SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES Page 4 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 grade. Ballast box must be a NEMA 3R enclosure. H. Structural steel 1. Luminaire shall be designed to withstand wind forces of 150 mph without damage or misalignment to assembly. Luminaires shall be constructed with a die-cast aluminum housing to protect the luminaire reflector system. Alternative systems that provide spun aluminum reflectors must have a protective hail shroud. 2. Strength of the materials used in the structures shall be calculated based upon AASHTO Pole Structure Criteria. 3. Foundation design criteria are to be based upon BROMS Standards using a safety factor of 3. (Alternate UBC) 4. Galvanize by hot-dipping processing to ASTM-123 standards shall be used for a pole, crossarms, braces, boxes, hubs, or any extensions attached to the pole. 5. Poles and foundations shall be designed to meet 2012 IBC, Table 1804.2-I-A and 110 mph wind zone. I. Foundations 1. Base is to be formed with concrete that obtains 9500 PSI strength and contains pre-stressed steel cable that is stressed to 28,910 lbs. (which shall be 70% of the ultimate yield strength of the cable). 2. Foundation Drawings: Project specific foundation drawings stamped by a registered engineer in the state where the project is located are required. The foundation drawings must list the moment, shear (horizontal) force, and axial (vertical) force at ground level for each pole. J. Life Cycle Costs 1. Complete Lamp Replacement: Manufacturer shall include all group lamp replacements required to provide 25 years of operation based upon 500 usage hours per year. 2. Preventative and Spot Maintenance: Manufacturer shall provide all preventative and spot maintenance, including parts and labor for 25 years from the date of equipment shipment. Individual lamp outages shall be repaired when the usage of any field is materially impacted. Owner agrees to check fuses in the event of a luminaire outage. 16510 SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES Page 5 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 3. Remote Monitoring System: System shall monitor lighting performance and notify manufacturer if individual luminaire outage is detected so that appropriate maintenance can be scheduled. The manufacturer shall notify the owner of outages within 24 hours, or the next business day. The controller shall determine switch position (Manual or Auto) and contactor status (open or closed). 4. Remote Lighting Control System: System shall allow owner and users with a security code to schedule on/off system operation via a web site, phone, fax or email up to ten years in advance. Manufacturer shall provide and maintain a two-way TCP/IP communication link. Trained staff shall be available 24/7 to provide scheduling support and assist with reporting needs. The owner may assign various security levels to schedulers by function and/or fields. This function must be flexible to allow a range of privileges such as full scheduling capabilities for all fields, to only having permission to execute “early off” commands by phone. Controller shall accept and store 7-day schedules, be protected against memory loss during power outages, and shall reboot once power is regained and execute any commands that would have occurred during outage. 5. Management Tools: Manufacturer shall provide a web-based database of actual field usage and provide reports by facility and user group. 6. Communication Costs: Manufacturer shall include communication costs for operating the controls and monitoring system for a period of 25 years. K. WARRANTY 25-Year Warranty: Each manufacturer shall supply a signed warranty covering the entire system for 25 years. Warranty shall guarantee light levels; lamp replacements; system energy consumption; monitoring, maintenance and control services, and structural integrity. Manufacturer shall maintain specifically-funded financial reserves to assure fulfillment of the warranty for the full term. Warranty may exclude fuses, storm damage, vandalism, abuse and unauthorized repairs or alterations PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 16190. B. Install fixtures on lighting cross-arm as recommended by manufacturer. 16510 SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES Page 6 of 6 Roland G. Vela Soccer Complex B000399.001 11/15/17 C. Aim fixtures as per manufacturer’s point-by-point aiming diagram to achieve 50FC infield and 30FC outfield as a minimum, and 30FC as a minimum on soccer and football areas. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Illumination Measurements: Upon substantial completion of the project and in the presence of the Contractor, Project Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Manufacturer's Representative, illumination measurements shall be taken and verified. The illumination measurements shall be conducted in accordance with IESNA RP-6-01, Appendix B. END OF SECTION